International Edition - McGraw

Transcription

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introductory Psychology ................3 Social and Personality
Psychology ....................................47
Introductory Psychology ........................................................... 4
Introductory Psychology – Readers .................................................9
Advanced Social Psychology .................................................. 52
Attitudes and Behavior ........................................................... 51
Developmental Psychology ...........13
Health Psychology .................................................................. 56
Interpersonal Relations ........................................................... 57
Intimacy ................................................................................. 54
Adolescence – Reader / Cases ................................................ 31
Adolescence – Texts ............................................................... 28
Adulthood and Aging ............................................................. 32
Adulthood and Aging – Readers ............................................. 33
Personality.............................................................................. 51
Psychology of Women and Gender ........................................ 54
Social Psychology – Readers................................................... 49
Social Psychology – Texts ....................................................... 48
Child Development – Chronological ...................................... 22
Child Development – Readers / Cases .................................... 26
Child Development – Topical ................................................. 24
Child Guidance ...................................................................... 28
Cognitive Development – Readers.......................................... 35
Cognitive Science ................................................................... 37
Developmental Psychopathology ........................................... 36
Gender Role Development ..................................................... 37
Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ................... 15
Human Development / Lifespan – Readers ............................. 19
Human Development / Lifespan – Topical .............................. 18
Clinical Psychology.......................59
Abnormal Psychology ............................................................. 60
Abnormal Psychology – Readers ............................................ 61
Adjustment – Readers ............................................................. 62
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ................................................ 63
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers ................................ 64
Introduction to Clinical Psychology ........................................ 63
Educational Psychology ...............39 Experimental Psychology ............. 67
Child, Family & Society – Readers .......................................... 45
Death and Dying .................................................................... 45
Educational Psychology .......................................................... 40
Educational Psychology – Readers .......................................... 42
Infants & Toddlers .................................................................. 44
Cognitive Psychology ............................................................. 73
Experimental Psychology – Readers ........................................ 71
Neuropsychology ................................................................... 73
Perception .............................................................................. 74
Research Methods .................................................................. 68
SPSS/SAS ................................................................................ 72
Statistics ................................................................................. 71
Tests and Measurements ......................................................... 72
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Applied Psychology ......................75 Sociology.......................................85
Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior .................... 76
Comparative Societies .......................................................... 139
Sports Psychology................................................................... 76
Criminology ......................................................................... 129
Criminology – Readers ......................................................... 130
Psychology History & Systems .....79
History and Systems ............................................................... 80
Drugs & Society.................................................................... 125
Drugs & Society – Readers ................................................... 127
Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers ......................... 110
Introductory Sociology ........................................................... 88
Introductory Sociology – Readers ........................................... 93
Juvenile Delinquency ........................................................... 125
Human Sexuality.......................... 81
Human Sexuality .................................................................... 82
Human Sexuality – Readers .................................................... 83
Marriage & The Family ......................................................... 101
Marriage & The Family – Readers ......................................... 103
Medical Sociology – Readers ................................................ 109
Political Sociology ................................................................ 115
Race and Ethnicity – Readers ................................................ 113
Race, Class. Gender, and Sexuality ....................................... 108
Research Methods ................................................................ 123
Social Inequality / Social Stratification .................................. 115
Social Problems ...................................................................... 95
Social Problems – Readers ...................................................... 97
Social Psychology ................................................................. 120
Social Psychology – Readers................................................. 121
Social Work / Welfare .......................................................... 119
Sociological Theory .............................................................. 116
Sociology of Complex Organization ..................................... 140
Sociology of Death ............................................................... 111
Sociology of Death – Readers ............................................... 112
Sociology of Education – Readers ......................................... 132
Sociology of Family .............................................................. 105
Sociology of Family – Readers .............................................. 107
Sociology of Gender ............................................................. 119
Sociology of Health – Readers .............................................. 134
Sociology of Law – Readers .................................................. 131
Sociology of Sexuality .......................................................... 136
Sociology of Sexuality – Readers .......................................... 136
Sociology of Sport ................................................................ 132
Special Topics ...................................................................... 140
Special Topics – Readers ...................................................... 140
SPSS / SAS ............................................................................ 124
Statistics ............................................................................... 124
Technology & Society ........................................................... 138
Urban Sociology ................................................................... 112
2
2008–2009 NEW Psychology Titles
Introductory Psychology ~ Contents
Introductory Psychology ........................................................... 4
2008 New Title
■
DUFFY
Annual Editions: Personal Growth and Behavior 07/08,
26e ..................................................................................... 9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339731-3 / MHID: 0-07-339731-8
■
FELDMAN
Essentials of Understanding Psychology, 7e ....................... 4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340549-0 / MHID: 0-07-340549-3
■
FELDMAN
Understanding Psychology, 8e ........................................... 6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353193-9 / MHID: 0-07-353193-6
■
KING
The Science Of Psychology: An Appreciative View ........... 7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353188-5 / MHID: 0-07-353188-X
■
SLIFE
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Psychological Issues,
15e ................................................................................... 10
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351510-6 / MHID: 0-07-351510-8
Introductory Psychology – Readers .................................................9
2009 New Title
■
PASSER
Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior, 4e ........... 4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338276-0 / MHID: 0-07-338276-0
3
Introduction to Psychology
Introductory Psychology
NEW
International Edition
NEW
PSYCHOLOGY: THE SCIENCE OF MIND AND
BEHAVIOR
4th Edition
Michael W. Passer, University of Washington
Ronald E. Smith, University of Washington
2009 / 800 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338276-0 / MHID: 0-07-338276-0
Available: November 2007
Psychology: The Science of Mind and Behavior imparts
students with a scientific understanding of the field of
psychology while showing them the impact on their day-today existence. A simple conceptual framework within the
text emphasizes relations between biological, psychological,
and environmental levels of analysis and portrays the focus
of modern psychology. Together with Research Close-Ups in
each chapter and Beneath the Surface discussions and What
Do You Think? questions, the text challenges students to
think critically about psychology as a science and its impact
on their lives.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Chapter 3: Biological Foundations of Behavior has been
expanded to two chapters, Chapter 3: Genes, Environment, and
Behavior; and Chapter 4: The Brain and Behavior.
• Chapter 11: Development has been reorganized so that the
infancy-early childhood portion, when changes are rapid, is
covered chronologically, and the later life sections are covered
thematically.
• Increased Emphasis on the Scientific Method. Chapter 2 has
been revised to clarify and increase student engagement with
this important content area, and includes a new, in-depth feature
using the Scientific Method.
• Experimental Design Diagrams in conjunction with the
Research Close-Ups in each chapter reinforce the emphasis in the
book on helping students to understand research. These diagrams
explore the methodology used in the experiment and why.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 The Science of Psychology
Chapter 2 Studying Behavior Scientifically
Chapter 3 Genes, Environment, and Behavior
Chapter 4 The Brain and Behavior
Chapter 5 Sensation and Perception
Chapter 6 States of Consciousness
Chapter 7 Learning and Adaptation: The Role of Experience
Chapter 8 Memory
Chapter 9 Language and Thinking
Chapter 10 Intelligence
Chapter 11 Motivation and Emotion
Chapter 12 Development over the Life Span
Chapter 13 Personality
Chapter 14 Adjusting to Life: Stress, Coping, and Health
Chapter 15 Psychological Disorders
Chapter 16 Treatment of Psychological Disorders
Chapter 17 Social Thinking and Behavior Appendix: Statistics in
Psychology A-1
4
ESSENTIALS OF
UNDERSTANDING
PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
Robert Feldman, University of MassAmherst
2008 / 688 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340549-0 / MHID: 0-07-340549-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110165-3 / MHID: 0-07-110165-9 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/feldmaness7
Students First. Essentials of Understanding Psychology is
written around the philosophy that an effective textbook
must be oriented to students—informing them, engaging
them, exciting them about the field, and expanding their
intellectual capabilities—because when students understand
psychology, they learn psychology. No matter what brings
students into the introductory course and regardless of their
initial motivation, Essentials of Understanding Psychology,
Seventh Edition, draws students into the field and stimulates
their thinking. This revision integrates a variety of elements
that foster students’ understanding of psychology and its
impact on their everyday lives. It also provides instructors
with a fully integrated supplements package to objectively
gauge their students’ mastery of psychology’s key principles
and concepts and to create dynamic lectures.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Following a number of chapters, five key concepts are reviewed
in a format that is more visual than verbal in the Visual Mastery
Reviews. These concepts are: Mastering Research Design and
Methodology; Mastering the Difference between Sensation and
Perception; Mastering the Action Potential; Mastering Operant
Conditioning; and Mastering Persuasion. Following the visual
review are Evaluate/Rethink questions for students to assess
their understanding—questions that are directly sourced from
Bob Feldman’s own test questions on these concepts. These five
concepts were chosen based on feedback received from instructors
who participated in McGraw-Hill’s We Listen campaign as the
most difficult concepts for students to learn.
• The book retains the modular format that was initiated in the
last edition—a change that has proven highly popular. However,
in this edition the chapter structure has been reinstated so that
those who prefer to assign the complete chapter and/or topic can
do so more easily. Essentials of Understanding Psychology, Eighth
Edition is divided into 46 short modules grouped into 14 chapters
and an Appendix covering the major areas of psychology. An
advantage of the modular structure is allowing students to study
material in smaller chunks, which psychological research long
ago found to be the optimal way to learn. Moreover, instructors
can customize assignments for their students by asking them to
read only those modules that fit their course outline and in the
sequence that matches their syllabus. At the beginning of each
module, one or more questions introduce the key concepts
covered in the module. These key concepts are also the focus of
PsychInteractive Online, available on the Online Learning Center
for the text (www.mhhe.com/feldess7) and described below. In
Introductory to Psychology
the text, references and icons direct students to PsychInteractive
activities that correspond to each concept.
• The media program for Essentials of Understanding Psychology
was developed with both the instructor and student in mind. The
goal of the program is to provide parity; that is, that each concept
covered in the text has a supporting media element for both the
instructor and student. For example, if there is an animation on
perception for the instructor on PrepCenter, there is a Concept
Quiz for the student on PsychInteractive. Rather than providing a
large quantity of assets, we believe that building a program with
an eye toward continually reinforcing the important concepts for
both the student and instructor was paramount.
• PrepCenter helps you build your classroom presentations whenever, where-ever, and how-ever you want. In one convenient
online location, PrepCenter offers individual asset files such as
the line art from the textbook, PowerPoint presentations for each
key concept, video clips embedded in PowerPoint slides, and
animations on biological and other difficult concepts. Each is
ready to use as is, or to drop into a PowerPoint slideshow or your
course webpage. You can search for individual assets the way
you want to search—by chapter, by concept, or by type of media.
Access PrepCenter through the Instructor’s Online Learning
Center.
• The new PsychInteractive Online is a student resource for further
review of key concepts that is also available for instructors to use
in an online course or as a lab component. It includes more than
70 interactivities and reference pages, all with accompanying
conceptual self-tests, personal insight surveys, and study pages.
For each concept, students can create and print a personalized
study page.
• Content throughout the book has been revised and updated
to reflect current research and respond to comments from
reviewers. In particular Chapter 6 on Memory has been organized
to offer clearer focus on core concepts. In addition, increased
biological information is integrated throughout the book where
appropriate.
• Students can purchase a cost-saving alternative to their
traditional printed textbook with a Zinio ebook.
CONTENTS
Preface
1: Introduction to Psychology
Module 1: Psychologists at Work
Module 2: A Science that Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the
Future
Module 3: Research in Psychology
Module 4: Research Challenges: Exploring the Process Mastering
the Experimental Method: The Difference between Dependent
and Independent Variables
2: Neuroscience and Behavior
Module 5: Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior
Module 6: The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:
Communicating Within the Body
Module 7: The Brain Mastering the Action Potential
3: Sensation and Perception
Module 8: Sensing the World Around Us
Module 9: Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye
Module 10: Hearing and Other Senses
Module 11: Perceptual Organization: Constructing our View
of the World Mastering the Difference between Sensation and
Perception
5: Learning
Module 15: Classical Conditioning
Module 16: Operant Conditioning
Module 17: Cognitive-Social Approaches to Learning Mastering
the Distinction between Reinforcement and Punishment
6: Memory
Module 18: The Foundations of Memory
Module 19: Recalling Long-Term Memories
Module 20: Forgetting: When Memory Fails
7: Thinking, Language, and Intelligence
Module 21: Thinking
Module 22: Language
Module 23: Intelligence
8: Motivation and Emotion
Module 24: Explaining Motivation
Module 25: Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be
Daring
Module 26: Understanding Emotional Experiences
9: Development
Module 27: Nature, Nurture, and Prenatal Development
Module 28: Infancy and Childhood
Module 29: Adolescence: Becoming an Adult
Module 30: Adulthood
10: Personality
Module 31: Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality
Module 32: Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and
Humanistic Approaches to Personality
Module 33: Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us
Distinctive
11: Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-Being
Module 34: Stress and Coping
Module 35: Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-Being
Module 36: Promoting Health and Wellness
12: Psychological Disorders
Module 37: Normal versus Abnormal: Making the Distinction
Module 38: The Major Psychological Disorders
Module 39: Psychological Disorders in Perspective
13: Treatment of Psychological Disorders
Module 40: Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and
Cognitive Approaches to Treatment
Module 41: Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and
Group Approaches to Treatment
Module 42: Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to
Treatment
14: Social Psychology
Module 43: Attitudes and Social Cognition
Module 44: Social Influence
Module 45: Prejudice and Discrimination
Module 46: Positive and Negative Social Behavior Mastering
Attitude Change
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
4: States of Consciousness
Module 12: Sleep and Dreams
Module 13: Hypnosis and Meditation
Module 14: Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness
5
NEW
(www.mhhe.com/feldmanup8) and described below. In the text,
references and icons direct students to PsychInteractive activities
that correspond to each concept.
UNDERSTANDING
PSYCHOLOGY
8th Edition
Robert Feldman, University of MassAmherst
2008 / 800 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353193-9 / MHID: 0-07-353193-6
(No selling rights)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110166-0 / MHID: 0-07-110166-7 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/feldmanup8
Students First. Understanding Psychology is written around
the philosophy that an effective textbook must be oriented
to students—informing them, engaging them, exciting
them about the field, and expanding their intellectual
capabilities—because when students understand psychology,
they learn psychology. No matter what brings students
into the introductory course and regardless of their initial
motivation, Understanding Psychology, Eighth Edition, draws
students into the field and stimulate their thinking. This
revision integrates a variety of elements that foster students’
understanding of psychology and its impact on their everyday
lives. It also provides instructors with a fully integrated
supplements package to objectively gauge their students’
mastery of psychology’s key principles and concepts and to
create dynamic lectures.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The media program for Understanding Psychology was
developed with both the instructor and student in mind. The goal
of the program is to provide parity; that is, that each concept
covered in the text has a supporting media element for both the
instructor and student. For example, if there is an animation on
perception for the instructor on PrepCenter, there is a Concept
Quiz for the student on PsychInteractive. Rather than providing a
large quantity of assets, we believe that building a program with
an eye toward continually reinforcing the important concepts for
both the student and instructor was paramount.
• PrepCenter helps you build your classroom presentations whenever, where-ever, and how-ever you want. In one convenient
animations on biological and other difficult concepts. Each is ready
to use as is, or to drop into a PowerPoint slideshow or your course
webpage. You can search for individual assets the way you want
to search—by chapter, by concept, or by type of media. Access
PrepCenter through the Instructor’s Online Learning Center.
• The new PsychInteractive Online is a student resource for
further review of key concepts that is also available for instructors
to use in an online course or as a lab component. It includes more
than 70 interactivities and reference pages, all with accompanying
conceptual self-tests, personal insight surveys, and study pages.
For each concept, students can create and print a personalized
study page.
• Content throughout the book has been revised and updated
to reflect current research and respond to comments from
reviewers. In particular chapter 7 on Memory has been organized
to offer clearer focus on core concepts. In addition, increased
biological information is integrated throughout the book where
appropriate.
• Following a number of chapters, five key concepts are reviewed
in a format that is more visual than verbal in the Visual Mastery
Reviews. These concepts are: Mastering Research Design and
Methodology; Mastering the Difference between Sensation and
Perception; Mastering the Action Potential; Mastering Operant
Conditioning; and Mastering Persuasion. Following the visual
review are Evaluate/Rethink questions for students to assess
their understanding—questions that are directly sourced from
Bob Feldman’s own test questions on these concepts. These five
concepts were chosen based on feedback received from instructors
who participated in McGraw-Hill’s We Listen campaign as the
most difficult concepts for students to learn.
CONTENTS
• The book retains the modular format that was initiated in the
last edition—a change that has proven highly popular. However,
in this edition the chapter structure has been reinstated so that
those who prefer to assign the complete chapter and/or topic can
do so more easily. Understanding Psychology, Eighth Edition is
divided into 60 short modules grouped into 17 chapters and an
Appendix covering the major areas of psychology. An advantage
of the modular structure is allowing students to study material in
smaller chunks, which psychological research long ago found to
be the optimal way to learn. Moreover, instructors can customize
assignments for their students by asking them to read only those
modules that fit their course outline and in the sequence that
matches their syllabus. At the beginning of each module, one
or more questions introduce the key concepts covered in the
module. These key concepts are also the focus of PsychInteractive
Online, available on the Online Learning Center for the text
Chapter 3 Neuroscience and Behavior
Module 7: Neurons: The Basic Elements of Behavior
Module 8: The Nervous System and the Endocrine System:
Communicating Within the Body
Module 9: The Brain Mastering the Action Potential
6
Chapter 1 Introduction to Psychology
Module 1: Psychologists at Work
Module 2: A Science Evolves: The Past, the Present, and the Future
Module 3: Psychology’s Key Issues and Controversies
Chapter 2 Psychological Research
Module 4: The Scientific Method
Module 5: Conducting Psychological Research
Module 6: Critical Research Issues
Mastering the Experimental Method: The Difference between
Dependent and Independent Variables
Chapter 4 Sensation and Perception
Module 10: Sensing the World Around Us
Module 11: Vision: Shedding Light on the Eye
Module 12: Hearing and the Other Senses
Module 13: Perceptual Organization: Constructing Our View
of the World Mastering the Difference between Sensation and
Perception
Chapter 5 States of Consciousness
Module 14: Sleep and Dreams
Module 15: Hypnosis and Meditation
Module 16: Drug Use: The Highs and Lows of Consciousness
Chapter 6 Learning
Module 17: Classical Conditioning
Module 18: Operant Conditioning
Module 19: Cognitive Approaches to Learning Mastering the
Distinction between Reinforcement and Punishment
Chapter 7 Memory
Module 20: The Foundations of Memory
Module 21: Recalling Long-Term Memories
Module 22: Forgetting: When Memory Fails
Chapter 8 Cognition and Language
Module 23: Thinking and Reasoning
Module 24: Problem Solving
Module 25: Language
Chapter 9 Intelligence
Module 26: What is Intelligence?
Module 27: Variations in Intellectual Ability
Module 28: Group Differences in Intelligence: Genetic and
Environmental Determinants
Chapter 10 Motivation and Emotion
Module 29: Explaining Motivation
Module 30: Human Needs and Motivation: Eat, Drink, and Be
Daring
Module 31: Understanding Emotional Experiences
Module 32: Nonverbal Behavior and the Expression of Emotions
Chapter 11 Sexuality and Gender
Module 33: Gender and Sex
Module 34: Understanding Human Sexual Response: The Facts
of Life
Module 35: The Diversity of Sexual Behavior
Module 36: Sexual Difficulties: When Sex Goes Wrong
Chapter 12 Development
Module 37: Nature and Nurture: The Enduring Developmental
Issue
Module 38: Prenatal Development: Conception to Birth
Module 39: Infancy and Childhood
Module 40: Adolescence: Becoming an Adult
Module 41: Adulthood
Chapter 13 Personality
Module 42: Psychodynamic Approaches to Personality
Module 43: Trait, Learning, Biological, Evolutionary, and
Humanistic Approaches to Personality
Module 44: Assessing Personality: Determining What Makes Us
Distinctive
Chapter 14 Health Psychology: Stress, Coping, and Well-Being
Module 45: Stress and Coping
Module 46: Psychological Aspects of Illness and Well-Being
Module 47: Promoting Health and Wellness
Chapter 15 Psychological Disorders
Module 48: Normal Versus Abnormal: Making the Distinction
Module 49: The Major Psychological Disorders
Module 50: Psychological Disorders in Perspective
Chapter 16 Treatment of Psychological Disorders
Module 51: Psychotherapy: Psychodynamic, Behavioral, and
Cognitive Approaches to Treatment
Module 52: Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Interpersonal, and
Group Approaches to Treatment
Module 53: Biomedical Therapy: Biological Approaches to
Treatment
Chapter 17 Social Psychology
Module 54: Attitudes and Social Cognition
Module 55: Social Influence
Module 56: Prejudice and Discrimination
Module 57: Positive and Negative Social Behavior
Mastering Attitude Change
Appendix: Going by the Numbers: Statistics in Psychology
Module 58: Descriptive Statistics
Module 59: Measures of Variability
Module 60: Using Statistics to Answer Questions: Inferential
Statistics and Correlation
NEW
THE SCIENCE OF PSYCHOLOGY
AN APPRECIATIVE VIEW
Laura King, University of Missouri--Columbia
2008 / 864 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353188-5 / MHID: 0-07-353188-X
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/king1
Why Things Go Right. The Science of Psychology: An
Appreciative View by Laura King (University of Missouri at
Columbia) is the first text to bring a truly appreciative view
of psychology—as a science and for exploring behavior—to
introductory students. It is built around the idea that students
must study the discipline of psychology as a whole, that the
sub-disciplines are intricately connected, and that human
behavior is best understood by exploring its functioning
state in addition to its potential dysfunctions. For example,
imagine that you have been asked to create a science of
“watchology.” You have two watches that both have had the
unfortunate “trauma” of being left in the pocket of someone’s
jeans through the washer and dryer. One watch has suffered
the worst possible fate—it no longer tells time. The other has
emerged from the traumatic event still ticking. Which watch
would you use to develop your new science of watchology?
Clearly, the working watch will help you understand watches
better than the broken one. What does watchology have
to do with psychology? Quite simply, in psychology as
in watchology, it makes sense to start with what works: to
gain a general understanding of human behavior and then
apply that knowledge to those who have emerged from life’s
experiences in dysfunction.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 What Is Psychology? Defining Psychology
CHAPTER 2 Psychology’s Scientific Methods
CHAPTER 3 Biological Foundations of Behavior
CHAPTER 4 Human Development
CHAPTER 5 Sensation and Perception
CHAPTER 6 States of Consciousness
CHAPTER 7 Learning
CHAPTER 8 Memory
CHAPTER 9 Thinking, Language, and Intelligence
CHAPTER 10 Motivation and Emotion
CHAPTER 11 Personality
CHAPTER 12 Social Psychology
CHAPTER 13 Industrial and Organizational Psychology
CHAPTER 14 Psychological Disorders
CHAPTER 15 Therapies
CHAPTER 16 Health Psychology
7
PSYCHOLOGY: AN INTRODUCTION
9th Edition
Benjamin B. Lahey, University of Chicago
2007 / Softcover / 768 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312387-5 / MHID: 0-07-312387-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322882-2 / MHID: 0-07-322882-6
(with CD/Powerweb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110616-0 / MHID: 0-07-110616-2 [IE]
Available: January 2006
Website: Browse http://www.mhhe.com/lahey9e
Respected researcher and author Benjamin Lahey uses engaging
writing on a foundation of solid scholarship to help students
master the basics of psychology. The text’s proven learning
system is more effective than ever in this revision, thanks
to a streamlined and functional visual design. Applications
of basic concepts throughout the text help students retain
what they learn by demonstrating psychology’s relevance to
their own lives, and fully integrated coverage of culture and
diversity promotes an inclusive learning experience for all.
The fully revised ninth edition benefits from expert reviewing
in many specialties--including neuroscience, sensation and
perception, social psychology, and applied topics-and fully
updated coverage in all areas.
CONTENTS
Part 1: INTRODUCTION AND FOUNDATIONS
1. What is Psychology?
2. Research Methods in Psychology
3. Biological Foundations of Behavior
Part 2: AWARENESS
4. Sensation and Perception
5. States of Consciousness
Part 3: LEARNING AND COGNITION
6. Basic Principles of Learning
7. Memory
8. Cognition, Language and Intelligence
Part 4: DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY
9. Developmental Psychology
Part 5: THE SELF
10. Motivation and Emotion
11. Gender and Sexuality
12. Personality Theories and Assessment
Part 6: HEALTH AND ADJUSTMENT
13. Stress and Health
14. Abnormal Behavior
15. Therapies
Part 7: SOCIAL CONTEXT
16. Social Psychology
17. Psychology Applied to Business and
Other Professions
Appendix: Measurement and Statistics
8
PSYCHOLOGY WITH IN-PSYCH PLUS STUDENT
CD-ROM AND POWERWEB
Updated 7th Edition
John W. Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas
2005 / Hardcover with CD-ROM / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298073-8 / MHID: 0-07-298073-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111394-6 / MHID: 0-07-111394-0 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/santrockp7u
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: What Is Psychology?
Chapter 2: Psychology’s Scientific Methods
Chapter 3: Biological Foundations of Behavior
Chapter 4: Human Development
Chapter 5: Sensation and Perception
Chapter 6: States of Consciousness
Chapter 7: Learning
Chapter 8: Memory
Chapter 9: Thinking and Language
Chapter 10: Intelligence
Chapter 11: Motivation and Emotion
Chapter 12: Personality
Chapter 13: Psychological Disorders
Chapter 14: Therapies
Chapter 15: Stress, Coping, and Health
Chapter 16: Social Psychology
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
ESSENTIALS OF PSYCHOLOGY WITH MAKING THE
GRADE CD-ROM
Benjamin B. Lahey, University of Chicago
ISBN-13: 978-07-248762-6 / MHID: 07-248762-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112120-0 / MHID: 0-07-112120-X [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/laheye1
CONTENTS
Ch 1 - What is Psychology?
Ch 2 - Biological Foundations of Behavior
Ch 3 - Sensation and Perception
Ch 4 - States of Consciousness
Ch 5 - Basic Principles of Learning
Ch 6 - Memory
Ch 7 - Cognition, Language, and Intelligence
Ch 8 - Developmental Psychology
Ch 9 - Motivation and Emotion
Ch 10 - Gender
Ch 11 - Personality Theories and Assessment
Ch 12 - Stress and Health
Ch 13 - Abnormal Behavior
Ch 14 - Therapies
Ch 15 - Social Psychology
Appendix: Measurement, Research Design, and Statistics
PSYCHOLOGY
5th Edition
Camille B. Wortman, SUNY-Stony Brook, Elizabeth F. Loftus,
University of Washington and Charles A. Weaver, III, Baylor
University
1999 / Hardcover / 768 pg
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-071931-6 / MHID: 0-07-071931-4
(Out of Print)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-115627-1 / MHID: 0-07-115627-5 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/socscience/intro/cafe/wort/
index.htm
CONTENTS
1. The Science of Psychology
2. Research Methods
3. The Biological Foundations of Behavior
4. Sensation and Perception
5. The Nature of Consciousness
6. Learning and Behavior
7. Memory
8. Cognition and Language
9. Cognitive Development
10. Social and Personality Development
11. Motivation and Emotion
12. Health Psychology
13. Theories of Personality
14. Psychological Assessment and Individual Differences
15. Psychological Disorders
16. Psychological Treatments
17. Social Psychology I: Attitudes and Social Cognition
18. Social Psychology II: Social Influence, Aggression, and Altruism
Introductory Psychology – Readers
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: PERSONAL
GROWTH AND BEHAVIOR
07/08
26th Edition
Karen G Duffy, State University of
Coll-Geneseo
2008 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339731-3 / MHID: 0-07-339731-8
Website: http://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/007339
7318.mhtml
This Twenty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS:
PERSONAL GROWTH AND BEHAVIOR 07/08 provides
convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected
from the best of the public press. Organizational features
include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web
sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general
introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index;
and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials.
USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered
as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles
are supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/
online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Becoming a Person: Foundations
1. Carl Rogers’ Life and Work: An Assessment on the 100th
Anniversary of His Birth
2. Mysteries of the Mind
3. Skepticism of Caricatures: B.F. Skinner Turns 100
4. The “Big Five” and You: How Personality Traits Affect
Behavior
UNIT 2. Determinants of Behavior: Motivation, Environment,
and Physiology
5. What Makes You Who You Are
6. The Blank Slate, Steven Pinker
7. Genetic Influence on Human Psychological Traits
8. Nature vs. Nurture: Two Brothers With Schizophrenia
9. The Amazing Brain: Is Neuroscience the Key to What Makes
Us Human?
10. His Brain, Her Brain
11. Cultural Psychology: Studying the Exotic Other
12. Just Do It
13. Stand and Deliver
UNIT 3. Problems Influencing Personal Growth
14. The Biology of Aging
15. and Now, the Hard Part: That Sweet Little Thing Is About to
Commandeer Your Life
16. Childhood Is for Children
17. Kaleidoscope of Parenting Cultures
18. What American Schools Can Learn from Hogwarts School of
Witchcraft and Wizardry
19. What Makes Teens Tick
20. Staving Off Middle-Age Spread Requires Portion Control and
Plenty of Exercise
21. Midlife Crisis? Bring It On!
22. The Borders of Healing
UNIT 4. Relating to Others
23. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See You
24. What’s Your Emotional IQ?
25. Nurturing Empathy
26. What Does That Mean?
27. Deception Detection
28. Calling It Off
29. Want to Stay Married? Move to Massachusetts
30. Forgiveness: Who Does It and How Do They Do It?
UNIT 5. The Individual and Society
31. The Emperor’s New Woes
32. Suspicious Minds
33. 50th Anniversary: Brown v. Board of Education
34. The Social Net
35. Work-life: Organizations in Denial
36. How to Get Out Alive
37. The Collateral Psychological Damage of War
UNIT 6. Enhancing Human Adjustment: Learning to Cope
Effectively
38. Are We Becoming a Nation of Depressives?
39. Dear Reader: Get a Life
40. The 10 Rules of Change
41. Drugs vs. Talk Therapy
9
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON
PSYCHOLOGICAL ISSUES
15th Edition
Brent Slife, Brigham Young University
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351510-6 / MHID: 0-07-351510-8
Available: October 2007
108.mhtml
This Fifteenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: PSYCHOLOGICAL
ISSUES presents current controversial issues in a debate-style
format designed to stimulate student interest and develop
critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with
an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An
instructor’s manual with testing material is available for each
volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also
an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions
on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom.
Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing
of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our
student website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Research Issues
Issue 1. Should Animal Research in Psychology Be Eliminated?
Issue 2. Are Traditional Scientific Methods Sufficient to Provide
Evidence for Psychological Practice
Issue 3. Classic Dialogue: Was Stanley Milgram’s Study of
Obedience Unethical?
UNIT 2 Biological Issues
Issue 4. Are Humans Naturally Violent?
Issue 5. Do Women and Men Communicate Differently?
Issue 6. Do Brain Deficiencies Determine Learning Disabilities?
UNIT 3 Human Development
Issue 7. Does the Environment Influence Human Development
More than Genes?
Issue 8. Does the Divorce of Parents Harm Their Children?
Issue 9. Does Research Show That Homosexual Parenting Has
No Negative Effects?
UNIT 4 Cognitive Processes
Issue 10. Are Human Activities Determined?
Issue 11. Is the Theory of Multiple Intelligences Valid?
UNIT 5 Mental Health
Issue 12. Does ADHD Exist?
Issue 13. Does Taking Antidepressants Lead to Suicide?
Issue 14. Does Low Self-Esteem Produce Anti-Social Behavior?
UNIT 6 Psychological Treatments
Issue 15. Should Psychologists Be Able to Prescribe Medicine?
Issue 16. Is Treating Homosexuality Ethical?
UNIT 7 Social Psychology
Issue 17. Do Video Games Lead to Violence?
Issue 18. Can Sex Be Addictive?
ANNUAL EDITIONS: PSYCHOLOGY 07/08
37th Edition
Karen Duffy, State University Coll-Geneseo
2007 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351629-5 / MHID: 0-07-351629-5
Available: September 2006
295.mhtml)
This Thirty-Seventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS:
PSYCHOLOGY provides convenient, inexpensive access to
current articles selected from the best of the public press.
Organizational features include: an annotated listing of
selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of contents;
a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for each
section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide
with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE
CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for instructors.
ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our student
website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Science of Psychology
1. Why Study Psychology?
2. Does Psychology Make a Significant Difference in Our Lives?
New! 3. The 10 Commandments of Helping Students Distinguish
Science from Pseudoscience in Psychology.
4. Causes and Correlations
UNIT 2. Biological Bases of Behavior
Us Human?
New! 7. The Structure of the Human Brain
UNIT 3. Perceptual Processes
New! 8. Sensational Tune-ups
9. Eye Wise: Seeing Into the Future
10. A Matter of Taste, Mary Beckman
New! 11. Extreme States
UNIT 4. Learning and Remembering
12. Teaching for Understanding
New! 13. Memory Flexibility
14. Theory of Multiple Intelligences: Is It a Scientific Theory?
UNIT 5. Cognitive Processes
New! 15. Shouldn’t There Be a Word...?
UNIT 6. Emotion and Motivation
18. Unconscious Emotion
New! 19. Feeling Smart: The Science of Emotional Intelligence
20. The Value of Positive Emotions
New! 21. Ambition: Why Some People Are Most Likely to Succeed
New! 22. Obesity—An Epidemic of the Twenty-First Century: An
Update for Psychiatrists
UNIT 7. Development
New! 23. Why Newborns Cause Acrimony and Alimony
24. The Methuselah Report
New! 25. A Peaceful Adolescence
New! 26. Ageless Aging: The Next Era of Retirement
UNIT 8. Personality Processes
New! 28. Freud in Our Midst
New! 29. Exploding the Self-Esteem Myth
30. The Testing of America
UNIT 9. Social Processes
31. To Err Is Human
10
New! 33. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See You
New! 34. Young and Restless
UNIT 10. Psychological Disorders
35. The Age of Depression
New! 36. Soldier Support
UNIT 11. Psychological Treatments
37. The Quandary Over Mental Illness
New! 38. The Discover Interview: Nobel Laureate Eric Kandel,
Susan Kruglinski
New! 39. Offering Hope to the Emotionally Depressed
40. Computer- and Internet-Based Psychotherapy Interventions
CLASSIC EDITION SOURCES: PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
Terry Pettijohn, Ohio State University-marion
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340404-2 / MHID: 0-07-340404-7
Available: March 2006
307.mhtml
This reader provides over 40 selections of enduring intellectual
value--classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies--that
have shaped the study of psychology and our contemporary
understanding of it.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Introducing Psychology
Chapter 2. Psychobiology
Chapter 3. Sensation and Perception
Chapter 4. Sleep and Consciousness
Chapter 5. Learning
Chapter 6. Human Memory
Chapter 7. Cognition and Intelligence
Chapter 8. Motivation
Chapter 9. Emotion
Chapter 10. Human Development
Chapter 11. Personality
Chapter 12. Stress and Adjustment
Chapter 13. Abnormal Behavior
Chapter 14. Therapy
Chapter 15. Social Psychology
11
12
Developmental Psychology ~
Contents
2008 New Title
■
COX
Annual Editions: Aging 07/08, 20e ................................... 34
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339729-0 / MHID: 0-07-339729-6
■
DANIELS
Understanding Children: An Interview and Observation
Guide for Educators, 2e ................................................... 26
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337857-2 / MHID: 0-07-337857-7
■
DEFRATES-DENSCH
Cases in Child and Adolescent Development for
Teachers .................................................................... 26, 31
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352585-3 / MHID: 0-07-352585-5
■
DEL CAMPO
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Childhood and Society,
7e ..................................................................................... 27
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351513-7 / MHID: 0-07-351513-2
■
DIESSNER
Classic Edition Sources: Human Development, 3e ........... 19
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337968-5 / MHID: 0-07-337968-9
■
FREIBERG
Annual Editions: Human Development 08/09, 36e ............ 20
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339751-1 / MHID: 0-07-339751-2
■
HAUGAARD
Child Psychopathology .................................................... 36
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340550-6 / MHID: 0-07-340550-7
■
HOYER
Adult Development and Aging, 6e ................................... 32
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312854-2 / MHID: 0-07-312854-6
■
JUNN
Annual Editions: Child Growth and Development 08/09,
15e ................................................................................... 27
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339753-5 / MHID: 0-07-339753-9
■
LIPS
Adolescence – Reader / Cases ................................................ 31
Adolescence – Texts ............................................................... 28
Adulthood and Aging ............................................................. 32
Adulthood and Aging – Readers ............................................. 33
Child Development – Chronological ...................................... 22
Child Development – Readers / Cases .................................... 26
Child Development – Topical ................................................. 24
Child Guidance ...................................................................... 28
Cognitive Development – Readers.......................................... 35
Cognitive Science ................................................................... 37
Gender Role Development ..................................................... 37
Human Development / Lifespan – Chronological ................... 15
Human Development / Lifespan – Readers ............................. 19
Human Development / Lifespan – Topical .............................. 18
Sex & Gender, 6e ............................................................. 37
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340553-7 / MHID: 0-07-340553-1
■
MEECE
Child and Adolescent Development for Educators,
3e ............................................................................... 24, 28
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352576-1 / MHID: 0-07-352576-6
■
PAPALIA
A Child’s World, 11e ....................................................... 22
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353197-7 / MHID: 0-07-353197-9
■
PATTERSON
Child Development .......................................................... 22
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234795-1 / MHID: 0-07-234795-3
■
REYNOLDS
Guiding Your Children, 4e ............................................... 28
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288093-9 / MHID: 0-07-288093-7
■
SANTROCK
Adolescence, 12e ............................................................. 29
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338261-6 / MHID: 0-07-338261-2
■
SANTROCK
Children, 10e ................................................................... 23
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338260-9 / MHID: 0-07-338260-4
■
SANTROCK
Life Span Development with Lifemap CD-ROM, 11e ....... 16
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331024-4 / MHID: 0-07-331024-7
13
■
STEINBERG
Adolescence, 8e ............................................................... 29
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340548-3 / MHID: 0-07-340548-5
■
STICKLE
Annual Editions: Adolescent Psychology, 6e .................... 31
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339758-0 / MHID: 0-07-339758-X
2009 New Title
■
COX
Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21e ................................... 33
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339760-3 / MHID: 0-07-339760-1
■
DACEY
Human Development Across the Lifespan, 7e ................. 15
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338265-4 / MHID: 0-07-338265-5
■
DICKINSON
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, And Bereavement 08/09,
10e ................................................................................... 34
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339771-9 / MHID: 0-07-339771-7
■
GUEST
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Lifespan Development,
2e ..................................................................................... 19
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351528-1 / MHID: 0-07-351528-0
■
SANTROCK
A Topical Approach to Lifespan Development, 4e ........... 18
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338264-7 / MHID: 0-07-338264-7
■
SANTROCK
Essentials of Life-span Development ................................ 15
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340551-3 / MHID: 0-07-340551-5
14
Developmental Psychology
Human Development / Lifespan
– Chronological
Chapter 3: Physical and Cognitive Development in Infancy
Motor Development
Sensory and Perceptual Development
Cognitive Development
Language Development
Chapter 4: Socioemotional Development in Infancy
Emotional and Personality Development Attachment
Social Contexts
NEW
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT ACROSS THE LIFESPAN
7th Edition
John S Dacey, Boston College
John Travers, Boston College
2009 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338265-4 / MHID: 0-07-338265-5
Available: February 2008
(Details unavailable at press time)
NEW
ESSENTIALS OF LIFE-SPAN
DEVELOPMENT
John W Santrock
2009 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340551-3 / MHID: 0-07-340551-5
Available: August 2007
What’s the single, most often expressed issue in the LifeSpan Development course? Covering a lifetime of material.
Instructors from across the country are clamoring for a
streamlined text capturing the core concepts of life-span
development. Essentials of Life-Span Development was
carefully designed and constructed to deliver these core
concepts, along with a strong applications focus reflecting the
broad range of interests and backgrounds of students taking
this course. and as always, with John Santrock’s texts, the
latest research in the field is incorporated throughout.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
The Life-span Perspective
The Nature of Development
Theories of Development
Research in Life-span Development
Chapter 2: Biological Beginnings
The Evolutionary Perspective
Genetic Foundations of Development
Heredity and Environment Interaction: The Nature-nurture Debate
Prenatal Development
Chapter 5: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
Physical Changes
Cognitive Changes
Early Childhood Education
Chapter 6: Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood
Emotional and Personality Development
Families
Relations, Play, and Television
Chapter 7: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle and
Late Childhood
Physical Changes and Health
Children with Disabilities
Cognitive Changes
Chapter 8: Socioemotional Development in Middle and Late
Childhood
Emotional and Personality Development
Families
Peers
Friends
Schools
Chapter 9: Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence
The Nature of Adolescence
Physical Changes
Issues in Adolescent Health
Adolescent Cognition
Schools
Chapter 10: Socioemotional Development in Adolescence
The Self and Emotional Development
Families
Peers
Culture and Adolescent Development
Adolescent Problems
Chapter 11: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early
Adulthood
The Transition from Adolescence to Adulthood
Physical Development
Sexuality
Careers and Work
Chapter 12: Socioemotional Development in Early Adulthood
Stability and Change from Childhood to Adulthood
Attraction, Love, and Close Relationships
Adult Life Styles
Marriage and the Family
Gender, Relationships, and Self Development
Chapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle
Adulthood
The Nature of Middle Adulthood
Physical Development
Careers, Work, and Leisure
Religion and Meaning in Life
15
Chapter 14: Socioemotional Development in Middle Adulthood
Personality Theories and Development
Stability and Change
Close Relationships
Chapter 15: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late
Adulthood
Longevity, Biological Aging, and Physical Development
Health
Cognitive Functioning
Work and Retirement
Mental Health
Chapter 16: Socioemotional Development in Late Adulthood
Theories of Socioemotional Development
Personality and Society
Families and Social Relationships
Ethnicity, Gender, and Culture
Chapter 17: Death and Grieving
Defining Death and Life/Death Issues
Death and Sociohistorical, Cultural Contexts
Facing One’s Own Death
Coping with the Death of Someone Else
NEW
presents the latest, most contemporary research on each period
of the human life span. The 11th edition includes more than
2,100 citations from the twenty-first century with more than
1,700 of these from 2004, 2005, and 2006. The 11th Edition also
includes discussion of material from research reviews in two very
recently pubished major handbooks in life-span development: 1)
Handbook of Child Psychology (2006) and 2) Handbook of the
Psychology of Aging (2006).
CONTENTS
The Life-Span Developmental Perspective
Chapter 1. Introduction
Chapter 2. The Science of Life-Span Development
Beginnings
Chapter 3. Biological Beginnings
Chapter 4. Prenatal Development and Birth
Infancy
Chapter 5. Physical Development in Infancy
Chapter 6. Cognitive Development in Infancy
Chapter 7. Socioemotional Development in Infancy
Early Childhood
Chapter 8. Physical and Cognitive Development in Early
Childhood
Chapter 9. Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood
LIFE SPAN DEVELOPMENT WITH
LIFEMAP CD-ROM
11th Edition
John Santrock, University of Texas at
Dallas
2008
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331024-4 / MHID: 0-07-331024-7
ISBN-13: 9780-07-128631-2 / MHID: 0-07-128631-4 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/santrocklsd11
Driven by learning goals, previous editions of this text have
been widely adopted for their accurate, complete, and upto-date coverage. While maintaining these hallmarks, this
revision includes increased coverage of adulthood and aging,
a new “Interlude” feature on applications, and updated
research with more 21st-century citations than ever before.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New! Applications in Life-Span Development Interludes:
Appearing in each chapter, these interludes focus on health and
well-being, parenting, and education, giving students a sense that
life-span development has personal meaning for them. Among
the topics covered are facilitating infant and toddler development,
reducing adolescent pregnancy, and communicating with
children about divorce.
• Expanded coverage of adult development and aging: An
important but often neglected topic in life-span development
texts, topics new to this edition include metacognition in
middle adulthood, cognitive neuroscience and aging, language
development and aging, technology and older adults, and recent
research on the decline in brain volume in later adulthood.
16
• Recent Research: This edition of Life-Span Development
Middle and Late Childhood
Chapter 10. Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle and
Late Childhood
Chapter 11. Socioemotional Development in Middle and Late
Childhood
Adolescence
Chapter 12. Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence
Chapter 13. Socioemotional Development in Adolescence
Early Adulthood
Chapter 14. Physical and Cognitive Development in Early
Adulthood
Chapter 15. Socioemotional Development in Early Adulthood
Middle Adulthood
Chapter 16. Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle
Adulthood
Chapter 17. Socioemotional Development in Middle Adulthood
Late Adulthood
Chapter 18. Physical Development in Late Adulthood
Chapter 19. Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood
Chapter 20. Socioemotional Development in Late Adulthood
Endings
Chapter 21. Death and Grieving
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
10th Edition
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
8th Edition
Diane E. Papalia, Sally Wendkos Olds, Professional Writer
and Ruth Duskin Feldman
2007 / Hardcover / 832 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313380-9 / MHID: 0-07-313380-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322878-5 / MHID: 0-07-322878-8
(with CD and PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110714-3 / MHID: 0-07-110714-2 [IE]
James W. Vander Zanden, Ohio State University
2007 / 816 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319486-8 / MHID: 0-07-319486-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327130-9 / MHID: 0-07-327130-6
(With Powerweb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110961-1 / MHID: 0-07-110961-7 [IE]
Human Development, Tenth Edition, provides the extensive
cross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the innovative
pedagogical learning system, and the balance between
research and real-life applications that make this book a
favorite of students and professors. In the warmly-written
and engaging style that is their hallmark, Papalia, Olds, and
Feldman continue to provide a chronological view of lifespan
development. The new Tenth Edition expands the coverage
of cultural and historical influences on development,
includes the latest research, and introduces marginal callouts
integrating the LifeMap Student CD-ROM with key concepts
in the text.
CONTENTS
Part 1: ABOUT HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
1: The Study of Human Development
2: Theory and Research
Part 2: BEGINNINGS
3: Forming a New Life
4: Physical Development During the First Three Years
5: Cognitive Development During the First Three Years
6: Psychosocial Development During the First Three Years
Part 3: EARLY CHILDHOOD
7: Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
8: Psychosocial Development in Early Childhood
Part 4: MIDDLE CHILDHOOD
9: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood
10: Psychosocial Development in Middle Childhood
Part 5: ADOLESCENCE
11: Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence
12: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence
Part 6: YOUNG ADULTHOOD
13: Physical and Cognitive Development in Young Adulthood
14: Psychosocial Development in Young Adulthood
Part 7: MIDDLE ADULTHOOD
15: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Adulthood
16: Psychosocial Development in Middle Adulthood
Part 8: LATE ADULTHOOD
17: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood
18: Psychosocial Development in Late Adulthood
Part 9: THE END OF LIFE
19: Dealing with Death and Bereavement
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/vzcrandell7u
Human Development by Vander Zanden, Crandell, and
Crandell presents an interdisciplinary, cross-cultural, and
contextual perspective on development. Applications to
psychology, health care, social work, education, and family
dynamics make this a popular choice for schools offering the
course to a variety of majors. This rich range of applications,
along with instructional design features drawn from cognitive
psychology, provides a strong pedagogical framework for
learning. The eighth edition, fully revised by the Crandells,
includes more than 1,200 citations from the 21st century,
expanded coverage of diversity, new Implications for Practice
boxes, and many new photos, figures, and tables.
CONTENTS
Part 1: THE STUDY OF HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Chapter 2: Developmental Theories
Part 2: BEGINNINGS
Chapter 3: Reproduction, Heredity and Genetics, and Prenatal
Development
Part 3: BIRTH AND INFANCY: THE FIRST TWO YEARS
Chapter 4: Birth and Physical Development the First Two Years
Chapter 5: Infancy: Cognitive and Language Development
Chapter 6: Infancy: Emotional and Social Development
Part 4: EARLY CHILDHOOD: 2 TO 6
Chapter 7: Early Childhood 2 to 6: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 8: Early Childhood 2 to 6: Emotional and Social Development
Part 5: MIDDLE CHILDHOOD: 7 TO 12
Chapter 9: Middle Childhood 7 to 12: Physical and Cognitive
Development
Chapter 10: Middle Childhood 7 to 12: Emotional and Social
Development
Part 6: ADOLESCENCE
Chapter 11: Adolescence: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 12: Adolescence: Emotional and Social Development
Part 7: EARLY ADULTHOOD
Chapter 13: Early Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 14: Early Adulthood: Emotional and Social Development
Part 8: MIDDLE ADULTHOOD
Chapter 15: Middle Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 16: Middle Adulthood: Emotional and Social Development
Part 9: LATE ADULTHOOD
Chapter 17: Late Adulthood: Physical and Cognitive Development
Chapter 18: Late Adulthood: Emotional and Social Development
Part 10: THE END OF LIFE
Chapter 19: Death and Dying
17
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT ACROSS THE LIFESPAN
6th Edition
John S. Dacey, Boston College and John F. Travers, Boston
College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296735-7 / MHID: 0-07-296735-8
Available: June 2005
This chronologically-organized text is less expensive and
briefer than most of the Human Lifespan texts. Its numerous
examples drawn from education, nursing, and psychology
make the content relevant to students from a variety of
majors and backgrounds, while a highly praised study guide
integrated into the text promotes and reinforces conceptual
understanding. The new edition includes increased material
on cognitive development and expanded coverage of culture.
CONTENTS
Part I: INTRODUCTION
1: Lifespan Psychology: An Introduction
2: Theories of Development: Interpreting the Lifespan
Part II: BEGINNINGS
3: The Biological Basis of Development
4: Pregnancy and Birth
Part III: INFANCY
5: Physical and Cognitive Development in Infancy
6: Psychosocial Development in Infancy
Part IV: EARLY CHILDHOOD
Part V: MIDDLE CHILDHOOD
9: Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood
10: Psychosocial Development in Middle Childhood
Part VI: ADOLESCENCE
11: Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence
12: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence
Part VII: EARLY ADULTHOOD
Part VIII: MIDDLE ADULTHOOD
15: Physical Development in Middle Adulthood
16: Psychosocial Development in Middle Adulthood
Part IX: LATE ADULTHOOD
17: Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood
18: Psychosocial Development in Late Adulthood
19: Dying and Spirituality
– Topical
NEW
A TOPICAL APPROACH TO LIFESPAN
DEVELOPMENT
4th Edition
John W Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas
2009 / 832 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338264-7 / MHID: 0-07-338264-7
Available: December 2007
John Santrock’s A Topical Approach to Life-Span Development
text continues with the themes of research, applications,
and contexts that he is famous for. Students and instructors
alike love it for its pedagogy and accessible writing. Building
on these strengths, the fourth edition features more current
research, more applications including new Careers in LifeSpan Development profiles, and a new Visual Assets Database
for Instructors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Research and Content. This 4th edition is truly a twenty-first
century presentation of the ¿eld of life-span development with
more than 1,500 citations from 2005 to 2008 alone, as well
as classic references from the twentieth century. To ensure this
currency and accuracy across all the stages of the life-span,
a panel of leading experts in many different areas of life-span
development provide detailed evaluations and recommendations
in their areas of expertise.
• Applications and Context. Applications are woven
throughout the book and emphasized in Applications in LifeSpan Development interludes and NEW Careers in Life-Span
Development profiles in each chapter.
• New and Improved Visual Assets Database! VAD, McGrawHill’s online database of video & audio clips, photographs, and
illustrations for instructors now features improved asset quality,
all downloadable to any location you choose.
CONTENTS
Section 1: The Life-Span Perspective
Section 2: Biological Processes, Physical Development, and
Health
Chapter 3: Physical Development and Biological Aging
Chapter 4: Health
Chapter 5: Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual Development
Section 3: Cognitive Processes and Development
Chapter 6: Cogntive developmental approaches
Chapter 7: Information Processing
Chapter 9: Language Development
Section 4: Socioemotional Processes and Developments
Chapter 10: Emotional Development
Chapter 11: The Self, Identity, and Personality
Chapter 12: Gender and Sexuality
Chapter 13: Moral Development, Values and Religion
18
Section 5: Social Contexts of Development
Chapter 14: Families, Lifestyles, and Parenting
Chapter 15: Peers and the Sociocultural World
Chapter 16: Schools, Achievement, and Work
NEW
Section 6: Endings
Chapter 17: Death and Grieving Appendix: Careers in Life-Span
Development Glossary References Credits Name Index Subject
Index
CLASSIC EDITION SOURCES:
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
3rd Edition
– Readers
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN LIFESPAN
DEVELOPMENT
2nd Edition
Andrew Guest, University of Portland
2009 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351528-1 / MHID: 0-07-351528-0
280/mhtml
This Second Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS
IN LIFESPAN DEVELOPMENT presents current controversial
issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student
interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue
is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue
introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with
testing material is available for each volume. USING TAKING
SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor
resource with practical suggestions on incorporating this
effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES
reader features an annotated listing of selected World Wide
Web sites and is supported by our student website, www.
dushkin.com/online.
Rhett Diessner, Lewis Clark State
College
2008 / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337968-5 / MHID: 0-07-337968-9
Available: April 2007
689.mhtml
value--classic articles, book excerpts, and research studies-that have shaped the study of human development and our
contemporary understanding of it.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 The Grand Theories
Selection 1 SIGMUND FREUD, from “The Development of the
Sexual Function,” An Outline of Psychoanalysis
Selection 2 JEAN PIAGET, from “The Genetic Approach to the
Psychology of Thought,” The Journal of Educational Psychology
Selection 3 ERIK ERIKSON, from “Eight Stages of Man,” Childhood
and Society
New! Selection 4 LÊ XUÂN HY AND JANE LOEVINGER, from “The
Concept of Ego Development,” Measuring Ego Development
Selection 5 LAWRENCE KOHLBERG, from “The Child as a Moral
Philosopher,” Psychology Today
Selection 6 CAROL GILLIGAN, from “Woman’s Place in Man’s Life
Cycle,” In a Different Voice: Psychological Theory and Women’s
Development
Selection 7 HOWARD GARDNER AND JOSEPH WALTERS, from “A
Rounded Version,” Multiple Intelligences: The Theory in
Practice
New! Selection 8 MARTIN E. P. SELIGMAN AND MIHALY
CSIKSZENTMIHALYI, from “Positive Psychology: An Introduction,”
American Psychologist
Selection 9 WILLIAM WORDSWORTH, from “Ode: Intimations of
Immortality from Recollections of Early Childhood,” The Works
of William Wordsworth
Chapter 2 Non-Western Classics
Selection 10 KEN WILBER, from “The Spectrum of Development,”
Transformations
of
Consciousness:
Conventional
and
Contemplative Perspectives on Development
Selection 11 BAHÁ¿U¿LLÁH, from The Seven Valleys and the Four
Valleys
Selection 12 CONFUCIUS, from “The Great Learning,” A Source
Book in Chinese Philosophy
New! Selection 13 NA’IM AKBAR, from “The Evolution of Human
Psychology for African Americans,” Black Psychology
Chapter 3 Genes and Environmental Influence
Selection 14 ANNE ANASTASI, from “Heredity, Environment, and
the Question ‘How?’,” Psychological Review
Selection 15 ALEXANDER THOMAS, STELLA CHESS, AND HERBERT G.
BIRCH, from “The Origin of Personality,” Scientific American
19
Chapter 4 Development in Infancy
Selection 16 JEAN PIAGET, from The Origins of Intelligence in
Children
Selection 17 MARY D. SALTER AINSWORTH, from “Infant-Mother
Attachment,” American Psychologist
Chapter 5 Development in Early Childhood
Selection 18 JEAN PIAGET, BÄRBEL INHELDER, AND EDITH MAYER, from
The Co-ordination of Perspectives
Selection 19 L. S. VYGOTSKY, from The Genetic Roots of Thought
and Speech
Selection 20 MILDRED B. PARTEN, from “Social Participation Among
Pre-school Children,” Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology
Selection 21 ALBERT BANDURA, DOROTHEA ROSS, AND SHEILA A. ROSS,
from “Imitation of Film-Mediated Aggressive Models,” Journal of
Abnormal and Social Psychology
Selection 22 DIANA BAUMRIND, from “Child Care Practices
Anteceding Three Patterns of Preschool Behavior,” Genetic
Psychology Monographs
New! Selection 40 WILLIAM A. BARRY, S. J., from “Christian
Maturity Through Ignatian Spirituality,” Human Development
Chapter 12 Development During the Elder Years
Selection 41 PAUL B. BALTES AND K. WARNER SCHAIE, from “Aging
and IQ: The Myth of the Twilight Years,” Psychology Today
Selection 42 JAMES W. FOWLER, from Stages of Faith: The
Psychology of Human Development and the Quest for Meaning
Selection 43 ERIK ERIKSON, from “Reflections on the Last Stage—
and the First,” Psychoanalytic Study of the Child
Selection 44 ELISABETH KÜBLER-ROSS, from On Death and Dying
NEW
Chapter 6 Cognitive Development
Selection 23 B.F. SKINNER, from “Verbal Behavior,” About
Behaviorism
Selection 24 NOAM CHOMSKY, from “A Review of B.F. Skinner’s
Verbal Behavior,” Language
New! Selection 25 JEAN PIAGET, from Conservation of Continuous
Quantities
ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 08/09
36th Edition
Chapter 7 Social & Personality Development
Selection 26 ROBERT L. SELMAN AND ANNE P. SELMAN, from
“Children’s Ideas About Friendship: A New Theory,” Psychology
Today
Selection 27 JEAN PIAGET, from The Moral Judgment of the Child
Selection 28 BEATRICE BLYTH WHITING AND CAROLYN POPE EDWARDS,
from “A Cross-Cultural Analysis of Sex Differences in the
Behavior of Children Aged Three Through Eleven,” Journal of
Social Psychology
Website: h t t p : / / w w w . m h c l s . c o m / t e x t - d a t a / c a t a l o g /
0073397512.mhtml
Chapter 8 Physical and Cognitive Development
Selection 29 MARY COVER JONES, from “Psychological Correlates
of Somatic Development,” Developmental Psychology
New! Selection 30 JEAN PIAGET, from “The Mental Development
of the Child,” in Jean Piaget’s Six Psychological Studies, trans.
Anita Tenzer
New! Selection 31 WILLIAM G. PERRY, JR., from Forms of
Intellectual and Ethical Development in the College Years
Chapter 9 Social and Personality Development
Selection 32 JAMES E. MARCIA, from “Development and
Validation of Ego-Identity Status,” Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology
Selection 33 MICHAEL L. PENN AND DEBRA J. WITKIN, from
“Pathognomic Versus Developmentally Appropriate SelfFocus During Adolescence: Theoretical Concerns and Clinical
Implications,” Psychotherapy
Chapter 10 Cognitive Development
Selection 34 MARY FIELD BELENKY ET AL., from Subjective
Knowledge: The Quest for Self
Selection 35 JOHN L. HORN AND RAYMOND B. CATTELL, from “Age
Differences in Primary Mental Ability Factors,” Journals of
Gerontology
New! Selection 36 ELENA MUSTAKOVA-POSSARDT, from “Critical
Consciousness: An Alternative Pathway for Positive Personal and
Social Development,” Journal of Adult Development
Chapter 11 Social and Personality Development
Selection 37 DANIEL J. LEVINSON, from “A Conception of Adult
Development,” American Psychologist
Selection 38 ABRAHAM H. MASLOW, from “Self-Actualizing People:
A Study of Psychological Health,” Motivation and Personality
Selection 39 ROGER GOULD, from “Adult Life Stages: Growth
Toward Self-Tolerance,” Psychology Today
20
Karen L Freiberg, University of Maryland, Baltimore County
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339751-1 / MHID: 0-07-339751-2
This THIRTY-SIXTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS:
HUMAN DEVELOPMENT 08/09 provides convenient,
inexpensive access to current articles selected from the best of
the public press. Organizational features include: an annotated
listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated
table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief
overviews for each section; a topical index; and an instructor’s
resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL
EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical
guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported
by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Genetic and Prenatal Influences on Development
Part A. Genetic Influences
1. The Identity Dance
2. The Power to Divide
New! 3. What Makes Us Different?
Part B. Prenatal Influences
4. The Age of Genetic Technology Arrives
5. The Mystery of Fetal Life: Secrets of the Womb
6. The Smallest Patients
New! 7. Not Always ‘the Happiest Time’
UNIT 2. Development During Infancy and Early Childhood
Part A. Infancy
8. Who’s Raising Baby?
9. Reading Your Baby’s Mind
10. 20 Ways to Boost Your Baby’s Brain Power
Part B. Early Childhood
11. Long-Term Studies of Preschool: Lasting Benefits Far
Outweigh Costs
New! 12. Accountability Comes to Preschool
13. Raising a Moral Child
UNIT 3. Development During Childhood: Cognition and
Schooling
Part A. Cognition
14. A Time and a Place for Authentic Learning
15. Why We Need “The Year of Languages,”
Part B. Schooling
New! 16. Choosing to Learn
New! 17. Ten Big Effects of the No Child Left Behind Act on
Public Schools
18. The Power of Teaching Students Using Strengths
New! 19. The New First Grade: Too Much Too Soon?
UNIT 4. Development During Childhood: Family and Culture
Part A. Family
20. The Blank Slate
21. Parents Behaving Badly
22. Where Personality Goes Awry
Part B. Culture
23. Brown v. Board: A Dream Deferred
New! 24. Girls Gone Bad?
New! 25. Disrespecting Childhood
UNIT 5. Development During Adolescence and Young Adulthood
Part A. Adolescence
New! 26. Parents or Pop Culture? Children’s Heroes and Role
Models
27. A Peaceful Adolescence
New! 28. Understanding Street Culture
29. Jail Time Is Learning Time
Part B. Young Adulthood
30. How Spirit Blooms
31. The Battle for Your Brain
New! 32. Getting Back on Track
UNIT 6. Development During Middle and Late Adulthood
Part A. Middle Adulthood
33. Emotions and the Brain: Laughter
New! 34. The Fine Art of Letting Go
35. The Myth of the Midlife Crisis
Part B. Late Adulthood
New! 36. Second Time Around
37. Secrets of the Centenarians
38. Lost and Found
New! 39. Start the Conversation
40. Navigating Practical Dilemmas in Terminal Care
New! ISSUE 2. Are Peers More Important than Parents During
the Process of Development?
New! ISSUE 3. Do Significant Innate Differences Influence the
Success of Males and Females?
Part 2: PRENATAL DEVELOPMENT
New! ISSUE 4. Does Prenatal Exposure to Drugs Such as Cocaine
Create “Crack Babies” With Special Developmental Concerns?
New! ISSUE 5. Is a Natural Childbirth, Without Pain Medication,
Best for Development?
Part 3: INFANCY
New! ISSUE 6. Is There a “Myth of the First Three Years”?
New! ISSUE 7. Are Infants Born With an Innate Ability to Make
Symbolic Mental Representations of Objects?
Part 4: EARLY CHILDHOOD
New! ISSUE 8. Does Exposure to Music, including Mozart,
During Early Childhood Have a Special Capacity to Enhance
Development?
New! ISSUE 9. Does Emphasizing Academic Skills Help At-Risk
Preschool Children?
Part 5: MIDDLE CHILDHOOD
New! ISSUE 10. Has Promoting Self-Esteem Failed to Improve
the Education of School-Age Children?
New! ISSUE 11. Is Attention Deficit Disorder (ADD/ADHD) a
Legitimate Medical Condition That Affects Childhood Behavior?
Part 6: ADOLESCENCE
New! ISSUE 12. Are Boys More At-Risk Than Girls as They
Develop Through Adolescence?
New! ISSUE 13. Does Violent Media Cause Teenage
Aggresion?
Part 7: YOUTH AND EARLY ADULTHOOD
New! ISSUE 14. Should We Use Medication to Deal With the
Angst of College and Young Adulthood?
New! ISSUE 15. Are College Graduates Unprepared for
Adulthood and the World of Work?
Part 8. MIDDLE ADULTHOOD
DEVELOPMENT
Andrew Guest, University of Portland
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351494-9 / MHID: 0-07-351494-2
942.mhtml
DEVELOPMENT presents current controversial issues in a
debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest and
develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed
with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript.
An instructor’s manual with testing material is available for
each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is
also an excellent instructor resource with practical suggestions
on incorporating this effective approach in the classroom. Each
TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated listing of selected
World Wide Web sites and is supported by our student website,
www.dushkin.com/online.
New! ISSUE 16. Are Contemporary Adults Overlooking the
Importance of Marriage as Part of Successful Development?
New! ISSUE 17. Is One General Intelligence Factor Responsible
for Career Success?
New! ISSUE 18. Is Religion a Pure Good in Facilitating WellBeing During Adulthood?
Part 9: LATER ADULTHOOD
New! ISSUE 19. Can We Universally Define “Successful
Aging”?
New! ISSUE 20. Is Anti-Aging Technology a Cause for Societal
Concern?
CONTENTS
Part 1: GENERAL ISSUES IN THE STUDY OF LIFE SPAN
DEVELOPMENT
New! ISSUE 1. Does Culture and Environment Influence Human
Development More Than Our Genes?
21
Child Development
– Chronological
NEW
A CHILD’S WORLD
11th Edition
Diane E Papalia
Ruth Duskin Feldman
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353197-7 / MHID: 0-07-353197-9
Chapter 9: Physical Development and Health in Early Childhood
Chapter 10: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
Chapter 11: Psychosocial Development in Early Childhood
Chapter 12: Physical Development and Health in Middle
Childhood
Chapter 13: Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood
Chapter 14: Psychosocial Development in Middle Childhood
Chapter 15: Physical Development and Health in Adolescence
Chapter 16: Cognitive Development in Adolescence
Chapter 17: Psychosocial Development in Adolescence
NEW
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaacwll
This fully-revised eleventh edition continues to provide
the extensive cross-cultural and multicultural coverage, the
innovative pedagogical learning system, and the balance
between research and real-life applications that have made
A Child’s World a favorite of students and professors alike.
In the warmly-written and engaging style that has become
their hallmark, Diane Papalia and Ruth Feldman continue
to provide a chronological view of child development; the
new edition expands the coverage of cultural and historical
influences on development, highlights the latest research in
cognitive neuroscience and evolutionary theory, and features
a new and improved Visual Assets Database for instructors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• An enhanced emphasis on evolutionary theory as it affects
the study of child development. Beginning with expanded
introductory material in Chapter 2, many other chapters discuss
evolutionary interpretations of topics ranging from maternal
nutrition (Chapter 4) and early sensory abilities (Chapter 6) to
language (Chapter 7) and gender (Chapters 11 and 14).
• New integration of cognitive neuroscience. The 11th edition
includes sections on brain development in middle childhood,
adolescence, and in the fetus and infant. In addition, many
studies throughout the text shed light on the role of the brain in
cognition and emotions.
• Continued emphasis on cultural and historical influences on
development. The 11th edition fully integrates cross-cultural
research throughout the text and highlights it in Around the
World boxes, reflecting the diversity of the population in the
United States and in other societies.
• New & Improved Visual Assets Database! VAD, McGrawHill’s online database of video & audio clips, photographs, and
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Studying A Child’s World
Chapter 2: A Child’s World: How We Discover It
Chapter 3: Forming a New Life: Conception, Heredity, and
Environment
Chapter 4: Pregnancy and Prenatal Development
Chapter 5: Birth and the Newborn Baby
Chapter 6: Physical Development and Health During the First
Three Years
Chapter 7: Cognitive Development during the First Three Years
Chapter 8: Psychosocial Development during the First Three Years
22
CHILD DEVELOPMENT
Charlotte Patterson, University of VACharlottesville
2008 / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234795-1 / MHID: 0-07-234795-3
Bringing the research to life through stories. What prompted
Virginia Apgar to develop what became the Apgar Test? Who
knew that Eleanor Gibson’s famous “visual cliff” experiment
was inspired by her own toddler’s experience at the Grand
Canyon? These stories help students appreciate the relevance
of theory, and help them internalize and learn the often
research-intensive material.
CONTENTS
BEGINNINGS
1 Introduction to Child Development
2 Heredity, Environment, and Prenatal Development
3 Birth and the Newborn Infant
INFANCY AND THE TODDLER YEARS
4 Physical Development and Health During Infancy and the
Toddler Years
5 Cognitive and Language Development During Infancy and the
Toddler Years
6 Social and Emotional Development During Infancy and the
Toddler Years
EARLY CHILDHOOD
7 Physical Development and Health During Early Childhood
8 Cognitive Development During Early Childhood
9 Social and Emotional Development During Early Childhood
MIDDLE CHILDHOOD
10 Physical Development and Health During Middle Childhood
11 Cognitive Development During Middle Childhood
12 Social and Emotional Development During Middle Childhood
ADOLESCENCE
13 Physical Development and Health During Adolescence
14 Cognitive Development During Adolescence
15 Social and Emotional Development During Adolescence
NEW
CHILDREN
10th Edition
2008 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338260-9 / MHID: 0-07-338260-4
John Santrock’s Children engages students and prepares
them to interact with children in a variety of contexts. John
Santrock’s Learning System pedagogy provides proven study
tools that, together with an accessible presentation and many
applications, foster a clear understanding of the content.
The tenth edition features extensive new coverage of brain
development, a reduced number of chapters, full integration
of the latest research in the field, and a new Visual Assets
Database for instructors.
SECTION 6 Adolescence
CHAPTER 15 Physical Development in Adolescence
CHAPTER 16 Cognitive Development in Adolescence
CHAPTER 17 Socioemotional Development in Adolescence
CHILD DEVELOPMENT WITH MULTIMEDIA
COURSEWARE CD AND POWERWEB
5th Edition
Ganie B. DeHart, SUNY-Geneseo, L. Alan Sroufe, University
of Minnesota-Minneapolis and Robert G. Cooper, San Jose
State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-290008-8 / MHID: 0-07-290008-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121703-3 / MHID: 0-07-121703-7 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/dehart5
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Chapter 1: The Nature of Development
• Extensive increase in coverage of brain development. The
Part One: BEGINNINGS
Chapter 2: The Contexts of Development
Chapter 3: Heredity and Prenatal Development
creation of brain imaging techniques such as fMRI have led to
remarkable increases in our knowledge about brain development
in recent years; in response, this 10th edition features substantially
expanded coverage of children’s brain development, and where
appropriate, images of brain scans.
• Reduction in number of chapters. Chapters 1 and 2 of the
ninth edition have been reduced and are now combined into
single opening chapter, creating a 16-chapter text.
• The latest research. This edition of Children presents the latest,
most contemporary research with more than 1,600 citations from
2000 through 2007. More than 1000 of these are 2004 through
2007 citations, making the 10th edition truly a twenty-first-century
rendition of the field of child development.
CONTENTS
Preface
SECTION 1 The Nature of Children’s Development
CHAPTER1 Introduction
CHAPTER 2 The Science of Child Development
SECTION 2 Beginnings
CHAPTER 3 Biological Beginnings
CHAPTER 4 Prenatal Development
CHAPTER 5 Birth
SECTION 3 Infancy
CHAPTER 6 Physical Development in Infancy
CHAPTER 7 Cognitive Development in Infancy
CHAPTER 8 Socioemotional Development in Infancy
Part Two: INFANCY
Chapter 4: First Adaptations
Chapter 5: Infant Cognitive Development
Chapter 6: Infant Social and Emotional Development
Part Two Epilogue: Infancy
Part Three: TODDLERHOOD
Chapter 7: Toddler Language and Thinking
Chapter 8: Toddler Social and Emotional Development
Part Three Epilogue: Toddlerhood
Part Four: EARLY CHILDHOOD
Chapter 9: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
Chapter 10: Social and Emotional Development in Early Childhood
Part Four Epilogue: Early Childhood
Part Five: MIDDLE CHILDHOOD
Chapter 11: Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood
Chapter 12: Social and Emotional Development in Middle
Childhood
Part Five Epilogue: Middle Childhood
Part Six: ADOLESCENCE
Chapter 13: Physical and Cognitive Development in
Adolescence
Chapter 14: Social and Emotional Development in Adolescence
Part Six Epilogue: Adolescence
Part Seven: DISORDERS AND RESILIENCY
Chapter 15: Developmental Psychopathology
Part Seven Epilogue: Psychopathology and Individual Lives
SECTION 4 Early Childhood
CHAPTER 9 Physical Development in Early Childhood
CHAPTER 10 Cognitive Development in Early Childhood
CHAPTER 11 Socioemotional Development in Early Childhood
SECTION 5 Middle and Late Childhood
CHAPTER 12 Physical Development in Middle and Late Childhood
CHAPTER 13 Cognitive Development in Middle and Late Childhood
CHAPTER 14 Socioemotional Development in Middle and Late
Childhood
23
Child Development – Topical
NEW
CHILD AND ADOLESCENT
DEVELOPMENT FOR
EDUCATORS
3rd Edition
Judith Meece, University of NCChapel Hill
Denise H Daniels, California
Polytechnic State University
2008 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352576-1 / MHID: 0-07-352576-6
Available: May 2007
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meece3e
Topically-arranged and teacher-focused, Child and
Adolescent Development for Educators is a richly contextual
research-based foundation in the science of development that
is ideal for future teachers. Attending to the development of
school-aged children and youth, the brevity of the text and
the diversity of in-text activities give teacher educators ample
opportunity to assign observations and other school-based
projects.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Supporting Child and Adolescent Development in School:
This new chapter (9) highlights important topics such as
fostering resiliency in youth, establishing positive interpersonal
relationships in classrooms, teaching students with special
learning needs, and creating successful schools for children,
youth, and families.
• Health and Nutrition: New and expanded sections are provided
on children’s health and nutrition, including sleep issues and
play as they relate to physical development and implications for
schooling.
• Special Needs: Modeling contemporary inclusive practice,
material on exceptional children and atypical development has
been integrated throughout the text, rather than being relegated
to a separate chapter.
• Emotional development, literacy, brain development, and
more: Over 500 new references in this edition introduce students
to the latest research on brain development, the development
of mathematical and scientific concepts, the impact of family
routines, the influence of media on development, and much
more.
• Interview and Observation Guide: Correlated to the text
through Understanding Children margin notes, the accompanying
Interview and Observation Guide (0-07-337857-7) helps the
reader put development theory into classroom practice.
CONTENTS
List of Features
Preface
Chapter 1: Studying Child and Adolescent Development
Chapter 2: Physical Development
24
Chapter 3: Cognitive Development: Piaget’s and Vygotsky’s Theories
Chapter 4: Cognitive Development: Information Processing and
Intelligence Theories
Chapter 5: Language and Literacy Development
Chapter 6: Self-Concept, Identity, and Motivation
Chapter 7: Peer Relations and Moral Development
Chapter 8: The Family: Partners in Education
Chapter 9: Supporting the Development of Children and Youth
in School
Glossary
References
Text Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
CHILD DEVELOPMENT: AN INTRODUCTION
11th Edition
John W. Santrock, University of Texas at Dallas
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296743-2 / MHID: 0-07-296743-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110906-2 / MHID: 0-07-110906-4 (IE w/PW)
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/santrockcdll
John Santrock’s Child Development is widely considered the
most accurate and up-to-date, topically-organized text in the
field. Used by hundreds of thousands of students over ten
editions, its learning-goals-driven learning system provides
a clearer understanding of the content. The fully revised
eleventh edition reinforces the highly contemporary tone
and focus by featuring hundreds of new citations, including
material from chapters from the sixth edition of the Handbook
of Child Psychology .
CONTENTS
Section 1: The Nature of Child Development
Chapter 2: The Science of Child Development
Section 2: Biological Processes, Physical Development, and
Perceptual Development
Chapter 4: Prenatal Development and Birth
Chapter 5: Physical Development and Health
Chapter 6: Motor, Sensory, and Perceptual Development
Section 3: Cognition and Language
Chapter 7: Cognitive Development Approaches
Chapter 8: Information Processing
Section 4: Socioemotional Development
Chapter 12: The Self and Identity
Chapter 13: Gender
Chapter 14: Moral Development
Section 5: Social Contexts of Development
Chapter 15: Families
Chapter 16: Peers
Chapter 17: Schools and Achievement
Chapter 18: Culture
CHILD PSYCHOLOGY: A CONTEMPORARY
VIEWPOINT WITH LIFEMAP CD-ROM AND POWERWEB
6th Edition
Part III: COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT
Chapter 7: Intelligence and Creativity
Chapter 8: Theories of Cognitive Development: Piaget and
Vygotsky
Chapter 9: Learning, Information Processing, and Academic Skills
E. Mavis Hetherington, University of Va-Charlottesville,
Ross D. Parke and Mary Gauvain of University of California
–Riverside, Virginia Otis Locke
2006 / Hardcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319781-4 / MHID: 0-07-319781-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125192-1 / MHID: 0-07-125192-8
[IE with CD/OLC]
Available: July 2005
Part IV: PSYCHOSOCIAL DEVELOPMENT
Chapter 11: The Family
Chapter 12: Self, Gender and Identity Development
Chapter 13: Moral Development
Chapter 14: Peers, Schooling, and Media
Epilogue
This thoroughly revised edition of a classic text uses a topical
organization to emphasize the processes of development.
It examines a variety of theoretical viewpoints, providing
students with a well balanced view of a child’s developmental
process; all of the Chapters are thoroughly grounded in
research. In this edition, a new co-author, esteemed cognitive
developmentalist Mary Gauvain, joins E. Mavis Hetherington,
Ross Parke, and Virginia Locke—creating a true powerhouse
in developmental psychology.
MEDIATED LEARNING EXPERIENCE WITH
CHILDREN
CONTENTS
1: Child Development: Themes, Theories, and Methods
2: Heredity and Environment
3: Prenatal Development and Birth
4: Infancy: Sensation, Perception, and Learning
5: The Child’s Growth: Brain, Body, Motor Skills, and Sexual
Maturation
6: Emotional Development
7: Language and Communication
8: Cognitive Development: Piaget and Vygotsky
9: Cognitive Development: The Information-Processing Approach
10: Intelligence and Achievement
11: The Family
12: Expanding the Social World: Peers and Friends
13: Gender Roles and Gender Differences
14: Morality, Altruism, and Aggression
15: Developmental Psychopathology
CHILD DEVELOPMENT: A TOPICAL APPROACH
AND MAKING THE GRADE CD ROM
Diane E. Papalia, Professional Writer, Sally Wendkos Olds,
Professional Writer and Ruth Duskin Feldman, Professional
Writer
2003
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282941-9 / MHID: 0-07-282941-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112419-5 / MHID: 0-07-112419-5 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliat1
CONTENTS
Part I: ABOUT CHILD DEVELOPMENT
Chapter 1: The Study of Child Development
Chapter 2: Theory and Research
Part II: FOUNDATIONS OF DEVELOPMENT
Chapter 3: Forming a New Life; Conception, Heredity and
Environment
Chapter 4: Prenatal Development and Birth
Alice Seok-Hoon Seng, Lucy Kwee-Hoon Pou and Oon-Seng
Tan
2003 (June 2003) / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123217-3 / MHID: 0-07-123217-6
[An Asian Publication]
This book is based on the theories of cognitive psychologist
Dr Reuven Feuerstein, who pioneered the theory on Mediated
Learning Experience (MLE) in the late 1940s through his work
with children who were orphaned or separated from their
parents as a result of the Holocaust. The theory of MLE is
based on the belief that intelligence is modifiable and not
fixed, and intervention programs can be designed to enhance
the cognitive skills necessary for independent thinking.
Written by renowned cognitive education, psychology and
child development professors, professionals and practitioners
with years of experience in research and development
of MLE, this book presents a fresh view of MLE theory for
anyone working with children. The contributors have built
on the current theoretical framework of MLE with a series of
rich and relevant illustrations of MLE interventions at different
developmental stages from preschool to primary levels.
CONTENTS
THEORETICAL FRAMEWORKS
Chapter 1: Mediated Learning and the Meeting of Minds: Things
Old and New
Chapter 2: Transcending Cognitive Modified ability: Developing
a Multi Dimensional Model of Modified ability
Chapter 3: Applying the Theory of Mediated Learning Experience:
A Review of Mediation Strategies and Techniques
Chapter 4: Developing a Peer-Mediated Learning Experience
Model for Culturally Deprived Children
APPLICATIONS ACROSS CONTEXTS
Chapter 5: Early Intervention Mediational Intervention for
Sensitizing Caregivers (MISC)
Chapter 6: Peer Mediation with Young Children (PMYC): An
Intervention Program
Chapter 7: A Preschool Mediational Context: The Bright Start
Curriculum
Chapter 8: Bright Start for Children with Autism Spectrum
Disorder
Chapter 9: Improving Cognitive Performance of Children with
Disabilities: A Case of Mediation
Chapter 10: Involving Parents in Mediated Learning Experience
with Children
Chapter 11: Foundations of Dynamic Assessment of Young
Children
Chapter 12: Dynamic Assessment Measures for Young Children
Epilogue
25
Child Development
– Readers / Cases
NEW
NEW
CASES IN CHILD AND
ADOLESCENT DEVELOPMENT
FOR TEACHERS
UNDERSTANDING CHILDREN:
AN INTERVIEW AND
OBSERVATION GUIDE FOR
EDUCATORS
2nd Edition
Lorrie Beaumont, Northern Illinois
University
Carol Doolin, Northern Illinos
University
2008 / 256 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337857-2 / MHID: 0-07-337857-7
This hands-on guide for interviewing and observing children
in educational settings is a supplement for child development
courses taken by elementary and middle school education
majors. It includes a rationale for interviewing and observing
children as a way to understand their behavior, learning, and
development and makes connections to the work of major
developmental theorists and educational researchers. It provides
practical tips for incorporating observations and interviews of
children into teachers’ busy schedules and discusses the analysis
of observational data and its uses for guiding educational
practices (e.g., instruction, cooperative grouping, and parent
conferences). The guide’s organization follows the topical
organization of most child development textbooks.
CONTENTS
List of Strategies
Preface
Chapter 1: An Introduction to Understanding Children
Chapter 2: Interviewer/Observer Roles, Ethical Responsibilities,
and Techniques
Chapter 4: Cognitive Development
Chapter 5: Socioemotional Development and Motivation in the
Classroom
Chapter 6: Integrating Observations and Interviews: Child Profiles
Chapter Summary
Appendix A. Sample Parent Information Letter
Appendix B. Sample Parent Consent Form
Appendix C. Record Forms
26
Nancy Defrates-Densch, Northern
Illinois University
2008 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352585-3 / MHID: 0-07-352585-5
Available: May 2007
Containing more than 40 cases, with subjects ranging from
preschool to high school students, Case Studies in Child and
Adolescent Development for Teachers brings developmental
issues to life. The reality-based cases address a variety of
developmental issues, giving teachers and future teachers the
opportunity to think critically about the way development
influences the educational environment and to reflect on their
own classroom practice.
CONTENTS
Cases in Child and Adolescent Development for Teachers
Case 1: The Accident
Case 2: Recess
Case 3: Please Don’t Pick Me!
Case 4: I Can’t Go Back to School
Case 5: Socks
Case 6: Late Bloomer
Case 7: Body Image
Case 8: Plotting
Case 9: Symbolism?
Case 10: Songs
Case 11: Chanting
Case 12: What on Earth?
Case 13: Challenge
Case 14: I Can Read!
Case 15: Mine!
Case 16: Tragedy
Case 17: Depressed
Case 18: Who am I Now?
Case 19: Pants
Case 20: (Almost) All Grown Up, Now Where Do I Go?
Case 21: Dolls and Soldiers
Case 22: Hallway Horseplay
Case 23: Communication
Case 24: You’re Gonna Get in Trouble
Case 25: I TOLD You...
Case 26: Rules and Consequences
Case 27: Morality or Health?
Case 28: Parental Involvement
Case 29: Divorce
Case 30: The Target
Case 31: Sit with Us--Or Else
Case 32: Rejection
Case 33: The Boy
Case 34: What Did I Do?
Case 35: Because He Loves Me
Case 36: Locker Room Bravado
Case 37: I Said “No!
Case 38: She Wanted To
Case 39: Around the World
Case 40: Boys’ School
Case 41: The Only One
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: CHILD GROWTH AND
DEVELOPMENT 08/09
15th Edition
Ellen N Junn, California State University-Fullerton
Chris J Boyatzis, Bucknell University
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339753-5 / MHID: 0-07-339753-9
Website: htt://www.mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397
539.mhtml
This Fifteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: CHILD
GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT provides convenient,
listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated
table of contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief
overviews for each section; a topical index; and an instructor’s
resource guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL
EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Conception to Birth
1. Brave New Babies
New! 2. Success at Last
UNIT 2 Cognition, Language, and Learning
Part A. Early Cognition and Physical Development
3. Reading Your Baby’s Mind
New! 4. Infants’ Differential Processing of Female and Male Faces
5. Brain Research and Early Childhood Development
6. Culture and Language in the Emergence of Autobiographical
Memory
7. Gender Bender
8. Language and Children’s Understanding of Mental States
Part B. Learning in School
9. A Deeper Sense of Literacy
10. Parental School Involvement and Children’s Academic
Achievement
11. The Trouble with Boys
12. The Preschool Promise
UNIT 3 Social and Emotional Development
Part A. The Child’s Feelings: Emotional Development
13. Children’s Capacity to Develop Resiliency
Part B. Entry Into the Social World: Peers, Play, and Popularity
New! 14. Understanding Popularity in the Peer System
New! 15. Children’s Social and Moral Reasoning about
Exclusion
New! 16. Toy Stories
17. Gender and Group Process,
18. Taming Wild Girls
19. Girls Just Want to Be Mean
20. A Profile of Bullying at School
UNIT 4 Parenting and Family Issues
21. Contemporary Research on Parenting
New! 22. Children of Lesbian and Gay Parents
23. Physical Discipline and Children’s Adjustment
24. A Nation of Wimps
25. Why Our Kids Are Out of Control
New! 26. The New Science of Siblings
27. The Environment of Childhood Poverty
New! 28. After the Bell Curve
New! 29. Adoption Is a Successful Natural Intervention Enhancing
Adopted Children’s IQ and School Performance
UNIT 5 Cultural and Societal Influences
Part A. Social and Cultural Issues
New! 30. What’s Wrong with Cinderella?
New! 31. Goodbye to Girlhood
32. The Culture of Affluence
New! 33. Extreme Parenting
34. Forensic Developmental Psychology
New! 35. The Baby Deficit
36. The Pediatric Gap
Part B. Special Challenges
37. Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder in Very Young
Children: Early Signs and Interventions
38. Childhood’s End
39. Inside the Autistic Mind
40. Three Reasons Not to Believe in an Autism Epidemic
New! 41. What Causes Specific Language Impairment in Children?
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN CHILDHOOD
AND SOCIETY
7th Edition
Diana S Del Campo, New Mexico State University-Las Cruces
Robert L Del Campo, New Mexico State University-Las Cruces
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351513-7 / MHID: 0-07-351513-2
Website: http://www.mhchl.com/text-data/catalog/007351
5132.mhtml
From McGraw-Hill Contemporary Learning Series (formerly
known as McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this Seventh Edition of
TAKING SIDES: CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY presents
current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed
to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills.
Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an
issue introduction, and a postscript. An instructor’s manual
with testing material is available for each volume. USING
TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM is also an excellent
instructor resource with practical suggestions on incorporating
this effective approach in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Infancy
Issue 1. Is Institutional Child Care Beneficial to Children?
Issue 2. Does Maternal Employment Have Negative Effects on
Children’s Development?
Issue 3. Should Scientists Be Allowed to Clone Children?
27
Issue 4. Do Federal Laws Make Transracial Adoptions More
Commonplace?
and detailed analyses of actual parent/teacher conferences
conducted by the author.
UNIT 2 Early Childhood
Issue 5. Is Spanking Detrimental to Children?
Issue 6. Are Fathers Really Necessary?
Issue 7. Does Divorce Create Long-Term Negative Effects for
Children?
Issue 8. Is Viewing Television Violence Harmful for Children?
• Grief and Trauma: The coverage of behavior challenges in
Chapter 8 has been expanded to include issues that may arise
from a child's experience of grief or trauma.
UNIT 3 Middle Childhood
Issue 9. Does Marriage Improve Living Standards for Children?
Issue 10. Are Stepfamilies Inherently Problematic for Children?
Issue 11. Is Television Viewing Responsible for the Rise in
Childhood Obesity?
Issue 12. Do Bilingual Education Programs Help Non-EnglishSpeaking Children Succeed?
Issue 13. Is Gay Adoption and Foster Parenting Healthy for
Children?
Issue 14. Should the HPV Vaccination Be Mandatory for Girls in
Later Childhood?
CONTENTS
Preface
1. The Program and the Philosophy: An Overview
2. Setting Up the Problem-Solving Environment
3. Supervising Young Children
4. Listening for Feelings
5. Negotiation
6. Setting Limits
7. Affirmations
8. Problem Solving for Problem Behavior
9. The Problem-Solving Approach to Curriculum
10. Working with Parents and Peers
UNIT 4 Adolescence
Issue 15. Should Children Who Are at Risk for Abuse Remain
with Their Families?
Issue 16. Is Abstinence-Only Sex Education the Best Way to
Teach About Sex?
Issue 17. Is the Internet a Safe Place for Teens to Explore?
Adolescence – Texts
NEW
Child Guidance
CHILD AND ADOLESCENT
DEVELOPMENT FOR
EDUCATORS
3rd Edition
NEW
GUIDING YOUR CHILDREN
4th Edition
Eleanor Reynolds
2008 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288093-9 / MHID: 0-07-288093-7
Drawing on the author’s 25 years in early childhood education,
Guiding Young Children: A Problem-Solving Approach
introduces future childcare providers and preschool teachers
to a child-centered philosophy of education and care. The
problem-solving approach encourages “kids to do what kids
do” as they learn to take responsibility for their words and
actions. Through real-life examples, sample dialogues, and
numerous photographs and posters, the problem-solving
approach is explained, stressing environment first, then
progressing to listening skills, negotiating, conflict resolution,
and setting limits.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Working with Parents: A thoroughly revised Chapter 10
includes extensive coverage on working with parents to solve
problems, initiating and conducting parent/teacher conferences,
28
Judith Meece, University of NC
– Chapel Hill
2008 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352576-1 / MHID: 0-07-352576-6
Available: May 2007
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/meece
Topically-arranged and teacher-focused, Child and Adolescent
Development for Educators is a richly contextual researchbased foundation in the science of development that is ideal for
future teachers. Attending to the development of school-aged
children and youth, the brevity of the text and the diversity of
in-text activities give teacher educators ample opportunity to
assign observations and other school-based projects.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Supporting Child and Adolescent Development in School:
This new chapter (9) highlights important topics such as
fostering resiliency in youth, establishing positive interpersonal
relationships in classrooms, teaching students with special
learning needs, and creating successful schools for children,
youth, and families.
• Health and Nutrition: New and expanded sections are provided
on children’s health and nutrition, including sleep issues and
play as they relate to physical development and implications for
schooling.
• Special Needs: Modeling contemporary inclusive practice,
material on exceptional children and atypical development has
been integrated throughout the text, rather than being relegated
to a separate chapter.
• Emotional development, literacy, brain development, and
more: Over 500 new references in this edition introduce students
to the latest research on brain development, the development
of mathematical and scientific concepts, the impact of family
routines, the influence of media on development, and much
more.
• Interview and Observation Guide: Correlated to the text
through Understanding Children margin notes, the accompanying
Interview and Observation Guide (0-07-337857-7) helps the
reader put development theory into classroom practice.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Studying Children’s Development
Chapter 3: Cognitive Development: Piaget’s and Vygotsky’s
Theories
Chapter 4: Cognitive Development: Information Processing and
Intelligence Theories
Chapter 5: Language and Literacy Development
Chapter 6: Self-Concept, Identity, and Motivation
Chapter 7: Peer Relations and Moral Development
Chapter 8: The Family--Partners in Education
Chapter 9: Supporting Child and Adolescent Development in
School
comprise a single chapter (Ch. 1), and the material from Chapter
15, Health, Stress, and Coping, has been integrated and expanded
throughout the text rather than relegated to a single chapter.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1: Introduction
CHAPTER 2 The Science of Adolescent Development
CHAPTER 3 Puberty and Biological Foundations
CHAPTER 4 Cognitive Development
CHAPTER 5 The Self, Identity, Emotions, and Personality
CHAPTER 6 Gender
CHAPTER 7: Sexuality
CHAPTER 8 Moral Development, Values, and Religion
CHAPTER 9: Families
CHAPTER 10: Peers
CHAPTER 11: Schools
CHAPTER 12: Achievement, Work, and Careers
CHAPTER 13: Culture
CHAPTER 14: Adolescent Problems
CHAPTER 15: Health, Stress, and Coping
NEW
NEW
ADOLESCENCE
12th Edition
ADOLESCENCE
8th Edition
2008 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338261-6 / MHID: 0-07-338261-2
Laurence Steinberg, Temple
University-Philadelphia
More students learn from John Santrock’s Adolescence than
from any other text in this field. Students and instructors
rely on the careful balance of accurate, current research and
applications to the real lives of adolescents. This new 12th
edition features expanded coverage of emerging adulthood,
increased coverage of brain development, integrated and
expanded coverage of health and wellness, and a new and
improved Visual Assets Database for instructors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Substantial Increase in Material on Emerging Adulthood.
Responding to the dramatic increase in research on emerging
adulthood (approximately 18- to 25-years of age), every chapter
in this edition of Adolescence devotes more space to the new
research and thinking about emerging adulthood.
• Movement of brain discussion to Chapter 3 and expansion of
coverage. Coverage of the brain now opens Chapter 3, The Brain
and Cognitive Development, resulting in more attention to this
rapidly increasing area of interest in adolescent development.
• Integrated and Expanded Coverage of Health and Well-Being.
The 12th edition integrates and expands the coverage of health,
stress, and coping throughout the text, including new Health and
Well-Being interludes in each chapter.
• Reduction in Number of Chapters. This 12th edition has
been reduced from 15 chapters to 13. Chapters 1 and 2 in now
2008 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340548-3 / MHID: 0-07-340548-5
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/steinberg8
Adolescence, 8th edition by Laurence Steinberg has been
thoroughly updated to reflect current findings in the field of
adolescent development. In this edition, the author continues
to utilize the effective combination of a friendly writing
style, thorough research and a contextual approach that
emphasizes adolescence in contemporary society. The text’s
careful organization ensures maximum teaching flexibility
that allows the chapters to work together or be covered in
sequence or stand alone. Ethnicity and minority issues are
thoroughly discussed in a way that enables students to see
how the adolescent experience is shaped by class and culture.
The strong pedagogical framework helps students organize
and integrate material. Adolescence, 8th edition, is based
on solid research and theory, yet it has a distinctively “real
world” feel that emphasizes the reality of being an adolescent
in today’s society.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Thoroughly updated and revised with nearly 1,000 new research
citations to bring students the very latest thinking in the field.
29
• New and expanded material on adolescent brain development,
sleep, risk-taking, romance, religious development, conduct
disorder, and media use.
• New and expanded content on neighborhood influences on
development and the prolonged extension of late adolescence.
• Content previously included in “The Scientific Study of
Adolescence” boxes moved into the body of the text.
• With this edition, the writing has been made more accessible
and the chapters easier to navigate with more subheadings and a
clean, fresh design.
CONTENTS
Preface
Introduction: The Study of Adolescent Development
Part I: THE FUNDAMENTAL CHANGES OF ADOLESCENCE
Chapter 1 Biological Transitions
Chapter 2 Cognitive Transitions
Chapter 3 Social Transitions
Part II: THE CONTEXTS OF ADOLESCENCE
Chapter 4 Families
Chapter 5 Peer Groups
Chapter 6 Schools
Chapter 7 Work, Leisure, and Mass Media
Part III: PSYCHOSOCIAL DEVELOPMENT DURING ADOLESCENCE
Chapter 8 Identity
Chapter 9 Autonomy
Chapter 10 Intimacy
Chapter 11 Sexuality
Chapter 12 Achievement
Chapter 13 Psychosocial Problems In Adolescence
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
30
ADOLESCENCE: CONTINUITY, CHANGE, AND
DIVERSITY
6th Edition
Nancy Cobb, California State University--Los Angeles
2007 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319472-1 / MHID: 0-07-319472-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110640-5 / MHID: 0-07-110640-5(IE)
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cobb6
Nancy Cobb’s Adolescence, recognized as one of the leading
texts in the field, provides an up-to-date and thorough
review of current research and theory. Praised for its clear
and engaging writing style, this highly acclaimed text is
distinguished by its excellent coverage of gender, ethnicity,
and identity, and for its treatment of differences between
early and late adolescence. Research Focus Boxes in each
chapter provide comprehensive coverage of developmental
research methods. Additionally, In More Depth boxes on
topics of special interest to students extend the coverage of
each chapter.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Defining Adolescents: Who Are They?
Chapter 2 Theoretical Foundations of Adolescent Development
Chapter 3 The Biological and Physical Changes of Adolescence
Chapter 4 The Cognitive and Intellectual Changes of
Adolescence
Chapter 5 Defining the Self: Identity and Intimacy
Chapter 6 The Sexual Self: Close Relationships in Adolescence
Chapter 7 Adolescents in the Family: Changing Roles and
Relationships
Chapter 8 Adolescents and Their Friends
Chapter 9 Adolescents in the Schools
Chapter 10 Work, Careers, and College: New Decisions, New
Ways of Thinking
Chapter 11 Facing the Future: Values in Transition
Chapter 12 The Problems of Youth
Chapter 13 Positive Development in Adolescence: Meeting the
Challenges and Making It Work
Chapter 14 Studying Adolescence: Research Methods and Issues
Adolescence – Reader / Cases
NEW
CASES IN CHILD AND
ADOLESCENT DEVELOPMENT
FOR TEACHERS
Nancy Defrates-Densch, Northern
Illinois University
2008 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352585-3 / MHID: 0-07-352585-5
Containing more than 40 cases, with subjects ranging from
preschool to high school students, Case Studies in Child and
Adolescent Development for Teachers brings developmental
issues to life. The reality-based cases address a variety of
developmental issues, giving teachers and future teachers the
opportunity to think critically about the way development
influences the educational environment and to reflect on their
own classroom practice.
CONTENTS
Cases in Child and Adolescent Development for Teachers
Case 1: The Accident
Case 2: Recess
Case 3: Please Don’t Pick Me!
Case 4: I Can’t Go Back to School
Case 5: Socks
Case 6: Late Bloomer
Case 7: Body Image
Case 8: Plotting
Case 9: Symbolism?
Case 10: Songs
Case 11: Chanting
Case 12: What on Earth?
Case 13: Challenge
Case 14: I Can Read!
Case 15: Mine!
Case 16: Tragedy
Case 17: Depressed
Case 18: Who am I Now?
Case 19: Pants
Case 20: (Almost) All Grown Up, Now Where Do I Go?
Case 21: Dolls and Soldiers
Case 22: Hallway Horseplay
Case 23: Communication
Case 24: You’re Gonna Get in Trouble
Case 25: I TOLD You...
Case 26: Rules and Consequences
Case 27: Morality or Health?
Case 28: Parental Involvement
Case 29: Divorce
Case 30: The Target
Case 31: Sit with Us--Or Else
Case 32: Rejection
Case 33: The Boy
Case 34: What Did I Do?
Case 35: Because He Loves Me
Case 36: Locker Room Bravado
Case 37: I Said “No!
Case 38: She Wanted To
Case 39: Around the World
Case 40: Boys’ School
Case 41: The Only One
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY
6th Edition
Fred Stickle, Western Kentucky University
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339758-0 / MHID: 0-07-339758-X
58X.mhtml
This Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: ADOLESCENT
CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906 is offered as a practical
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Perspective on adolescence
New! 1. A Peaceful Adolescence
New! 2. Youth Participation
3. The Future of Adolescence
New! 4. Youth Engaged for Action
UNIT2. Puberty, physical development, and health
5. Why Do Kids Eat Healthful Food?
New! 6. Prescription for Disaster
New! 7. Youth Smoking Prevention: What Works?
UNIT 3. Cognitive Development and Education
New! 8. Documenting Learning with Digital Portfolios
New! 9. Help Us Make the 9th Grade Transition
New! 10. Stories from Tween Classrooms
New! 11. My Year as a High School Student
New! 12. The Dropout Problem: Losing Ground
New! 13. Let Seniors Lead
14. Studies Reveal Strengths, Weaknesses
15. The New Cheating Epidemic
New! 16. Leading Adolescents to Mastery
17. Healthier Students
UNIT 4. Identify Social-Emotional Development
18. Fostering Social-Emotional Learning in the Classroom
19. The Consequences of Insufficient Sleep for Adolescents
20. Body Image: How Do You See Yourself?
New! 21. Adolescent Stress,
New! 22. ADHD and the SUD in Adolescents
New! 23. Coping with Stress
24. A Mother’s Story
31
UNIT 5. Family Relationships
New! 25. Traumatic Stress in Adolescents Anticipating Parental Death
New! 26. Parental Illness and Adolescent Development
27. A Nation of Wimps
28. Teenage Fatherhood and Involvement in Delinquent Behavior
New! 29. Impact of Family Recovery on Pre-Teens and Adolescents
New! 30. After Incarceration
New! 31. When a Parent Starts Dating Again
32. Learning to Chill
UNIT 6. Peers and Contemporary Culture
33. Risky Business: Exploring Adolescent Risk-Taking Behavior
34. The Overdominance of Computers
New! 35. Teaching Kids to Kil
36. Alcohol Use Among Adolescents
37. Terrorism, the Media, and Distress in Youth
UNIT 7. Teenage Sexuality
38. The Sexual Revolution Hits Junior High
39. The Cuddle Puddle of Stuyvesant High School
40. Give Students the Knowledge to Make Wise Choices About Sex
41. The Perils of Playing House,Nancy Wartik
UNIT 8. Problems Behaviors and Intervention
New! 42. School Bullying: Who, Why, and What to Do
43. Bullying at School Among Older Adolescents
44. Prevention of Domestic Violence during Adolescence
45. Adolescents Who Self-Injure
ADOLESCENCE
Maureen Drysdale, St. Jerome’s University / University of
Waterloo
BJ Rye, St. Jerome’s University / University of Waterloo
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351508-3 / MHID: 0-07-351508-6
086.mhtml
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN ADOLESCENT
PSYCHOLOGY presents current controversial issues in a
debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest
and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully
framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction, and
a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material is
available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE
CLASSROOM is also an excellent instructor resource with
practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach
in the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an
annotated listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is
supported by our student website, www.mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
Part 1: ADOLESCENT HEALTH
New! ISSUE 1. Should Adolescents Be Taking Antidepressants?
New! ISSUE 2. Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Drink Alcohol?
New! ISSUE 3. Should Parental Consent Be Required for
Adolescents Seeking Abortions?
New! ISSUE 4. Do Boys Worry About an Ideal Body Image as
Much as Girls Do?
Part 2: SEX AND SEXUALITY
New! ISSUE 5. Should Adolescents Get Comprehensive Sex
Education Outside the Home?
New! ISSUE 6. Should Adolescents Have Easy Access to Condoms
in Schools?
32
New! ISSUE 7. Is There Cause for Concern About an “Oral Sex
Crisis” for Teens?
New! ISSUE 8. Is Comprehensive Sex Education for Adolescents
Too Liberal?
New! ISSUE 9. Does Sex on TV Negatively Impact Adolescent
Sexuality?
New! ISSUE 10. Does a Traditional or “Strong” Double Standard
with Respect to Sexual Behavior Exist Among Adolescents?
New! ISSUE 11. Is Female Sexual Orientation More Fluid than
Male Sexual Orientation During Adolescence?
Part 3: RELATIONSHIPS
New! ISSUE 12. Does Divorce or Disruption in Family
Structure During Adolescence Have a Detrimental Effect on
Development?
New! ISSUE 13. Does Dating Impede Developmental Adjustment
for Adolescents?
New! ISSUE 14. Do Cyber-Friendships Hinder Healthy Adolescent
Development?
Part 4: ANTISOCIAL BEHAVIORS
New! ISSUE 15. Should Adolescents Who Commit Serious
Offenses Be Tried and Convicted as Adults?
New! ISSUE 16. Is School-Related Violence Increasing?
New! ISSUE 17. Are Girls Bigger Bullies Than Boys?
New! ISSUE 18. Is the Use of “Club Drugs” a Problem Among
Adolescents?
Adulthood and Aging
NEW
ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING
6th Edition
William J. Hoyer, Syracuse University and Paul A. Roodin,
State University of NY-Oswego
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312854-2 / MHID: 0-07-312854-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110673-3 / MHID: 0-07-110673-1 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hoyer6
CONTENTS
1 Adult Development And Aging: An Introduction
2 Cultural And Ethnic Diversity
3 Physiological And Sensory Processes
4 Coping And Adaptation
5 Mental Health Interventions
6 Physical Health And Aging
7 Memory, Attention, And Learning
8 Intelligence And Creativity
9 Cognition, Wisdom, And Expertise
10 Personality
11 Relationships
12 Work, Leisure, And Retirement
13 Approaching Death
Appendix Developmental Research Methods
ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING
3rd Edition
Diane Papalia and Harvey Sterns of University of Akron
and Ruth Feldman and Cameron Camp of Myers Research
Institute
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293788-6 / MHID: 0-07-293788-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111287-1 / MHID: 0-07-111287-1 [IE]
ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING, WITH
POWERWEB
5th Edition
William J. Hoyer, Syracuse University, Paul A. Roodin,
State University College-Oswego and John Michael Rybash,
Hamilton College
2003
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-256488-4 / MHID: 0-07-256488-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121323-3 / MHID: 0-07-121323-6 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/papaliaad3
Website: www.mhhe.com/hoyer5
This text delivers the most current research findings in the
field clearly and concisely, using a topical organization, in a
writing style that students and instructors have praised. This
edition provides a balanced, positive perspective on adult
development and aging, enhanced by strong multicultural
and diversity coverage.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
Part I: EXPLORING THE WORLD OF ADULTHOOD
1 Adult Development and Aging in a Changing World
2 Metatheoretical Perspectives and Research Methods
Part II: THE WORLDS OF BODY AND MIND
3 Longevity and Physiological Aging
4 Health and Body Systems
5 Memory
6 Intelligence and Creativity
7 Mature Thought, Wisdom and Moral Intelligence
Part III: THE SOCIAL WORLD
8 Education, Work, Leisure, And Retirement
9 Intimate Relationships and Lifestyles
10 Mature Kinship Ties and Living Arrangements
Part IV: THE WORLD WITHIN
11 Personality Development
12 Mental Health, Coping and Adjustment to Aging
13 Dealing with Death and Bereavement
Adult Development: An Introduction
Social and Cultural Diversity
Physiological and Sensory Processes
Adaptation and Coping
Mental Health and Interventions
Physical Health and Lifestyles
Memory, Attention, and Learning
Intelligence and Creativity
Wisdom and Experience
Personality
Relationships and Sexuality
Work, Leisure and Retirement
How We Die
Appendix A: Developmental Research Methods
Appendix B: Careers in Basic & Applied Gerontology
Adulthood and Aging – Readers
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 08/09
21st Edition
Harold Cox, Indiana State University—Terre Haute
2009 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339760-3 / MHID: 0-07-339760-1
601.mhtmlf
This Twenty-First Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING
provides convenient, inexpensive access to current articles
selected from the best of the public press. Organizational
features include: an annotated listing of selected World
Wide Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic
guide; a general introduction; brief overviews for each
CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906, is offered as a practical
33
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH, AND
BEREAVEMENT 08/09
10th Edition
George E Dickinson, College of Charleston
Michael R Leming, Saint Olaf College
2009 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339771-9 / MHID: 0-07-339771-7
717.mhtml
This Tenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DYING, DEATH,
AND BEREAVEMENT provides convenient, inexpensive
access to current articles selected from the best of the public
press. Organizational features include: an annotated listing of
31. How Different Religions Pay Their Final Respects
32. The Arlington Ladies
33. Face to Face With Death
34. Six Feet Under
35. The Grieving Process
36. Disenfranchised Grief
37. Enhancing the Concept of Disenfranchised Grief
38. The Increasing Prevalence of Complicated Mourning
39. Those Left Behind
40. Till Death Do Us Part
41. Counseling With Children in Contemporary Society
42. Discussing Tragedy With Your Child
43. Life Is Like the Seasons
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING
07/08
20th Edition
Harold Cox, Indiana State UniversityTerre Haute
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Issues in Dying and Death
1. Finding Better Ways to Die
New! 2. Organ Transplantation in a Globalised World
New! 3. Into the Oblivion
New! 4. Moving Toward Peace,
5. Technology and Death Policy
New! 6. A Survey of End-of-Life Care in Care Homes
New! 7. How Much Is More Life Worth?,
8. The Unsettled Question of Brain Death
9. Studying the Black Death
UNIT 2. Dying and Death Across the Life Cycle
New! 10. Editorial: On Behalf of Children
New! 11. Knowledge of Sudden Infant Death Syndrome Prevention
Strategies in a Multicultural, Disadvantaged Community
New! 12. And Then the Dog Died
New! 13. To Live with No Regrets
New! 14. “Cast Me Not Off in Old Age”
15. Trends in Causes of Death Among the Elderly
UNIT 3. The Dying Process
16. Palliative Care
17. Placing Religion and Spirituality in End-of-Life Care
18. Spirituality and Religion in the “Art of Dying”,
New! 19. Death in the Nursing Home
New! 20. Dying on the Streets
New! 21. Aging Prisoners’ Concerns Toward Dying in Prison
UNIT 4. Ethical Issues of Dying, Death, and Suicide
22. Death and the Law
23. Doctor, I Want to Die. Will You Help Me?
24. Competent Care for the Dying Instead of Physician-Assisted
Suicide
25. Colleen’s Choice
26. Ethics and Life’s Ending
27. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame
28. Life Everlasting
29. Who Will Speak for You When You Can’t?
30. The Contemporary American Funeral
34
2008 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339729-0 / MHID: 0-07-339729-6
Website: http://www .mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397
296.mhtml
This Twentieth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 07/08
features include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide
Web sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a
general introduction; brief overviews for each section; a
topical index; and an instructor’s resource guide with testing
materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM
is offered as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL
EDITIONS titles are supported by our student website, www.
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Phenomenon of Aging
1. Elderly American
2. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population
New! 3. Living Longer
4. Puzzle of the Century
5. The Demographic Drivers of Aging
6. Will You Live to Be 100?
New! 7. The 2005 White House Conference on Aging
UNIT 2. The Quality of Later Life
8. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the
More They Stay the Same
New! 9. As Good As It Gets
New! 10. Cohabitation Among Older Adults: A National Portrait
11. We Can Control How We Age
UNIT 3. Societal Attitudes Toward Old Age
12. Society Fears the Aging Process
13. Ageism in America
New! 14. The Secret Lives of Single Women
15. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its
Threat to Business Vitality
UNIT 4. Problems and Potentials of Aging
16. Primary Care for Elderly People: Why Do Doctors Find It So
Hard?
17. Breakthrough
New! 18. Marital History and the Burden of Cardiovascular
Disease in Midlife
19. The Disappearing Mind
New! 20. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of
Older Women and Their Relationship With Health Outcomes
UNIT 5. Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma?
21. How to Survive the First Year
New! 22. The Big Squeeze
23. Old. Smart. Productive
New! 24. The Broken Promise
25. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of Older
Americans
UNIT 6. The Experience of Dying
26. More Hospice Patients Forgoing Sustenance
New! 27. The Grieving Process
28. Start the Conversation
New! 29. Mind Frames Towards Dying and Factors Motivating
Their Adoption by Terminally Ill Elders
UNIT 7. Living Environment in Later Life
30. (Not) the Same Old Story
31. A Home for the Rest of Your Life
New! 32. Nursing Homes: Business As Usual
New! 33. Declaration of Independents
UNIT 8. Social Policies, Programs, and Services for Older
Americans
34. Have Seniors Been Dealt a Bad Hand? Medicare’s Drug
Discount Cards
New! 35. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years
of Reform
36. Universalism Without the Targeting: Privatizing the Old-Age
Welfare State
New! 37. Coverage For All
38. Riding Into the Sunset
Cognitive Development – Readers
4th Edition
Terry F Pettijohn, Ohio State University-Marion
2007 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340404-2 / MHID: 0-07-340404-7
047.mhtml
CONTENTS
Chapter 5. Learning
Chapter 9. Emotion
Chapter 14. Therapy
35
Developmental Psychopathology
NEW
DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
5th Edition
CHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
Jeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University—Ithaca
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340550-6 / MHID: 0-07-340550-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-126354-2 / MHID: 0-07-126354-3 [IE]
All students who will one day work with children or their
families can gain a basic foundation for understanding child
psychopathology from this text. Students who seek careers
in the mental health, physical health, or social work fields
will find extensive information on childhood disorders, their
prevention, and their treatment. All will gain an appreciation
for the many facets of this growing field, and of the need to
base interventions on research and on a humane attitude
toward each child and family.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical Issues
Chapter 3 Basic Psychological Theories
Chapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral Genetics
Chapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment Disorders
Chapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder
Chapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
Chapter 8 Bipolar Disorder
Chapter 9 Depressive Disorders
Chapter 10 Anxiety Disorders
Chapter 11 Mental Retardation
Chapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental Disorders
Chapter 13 Childhood-onset Schizophrenia
Chapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and Other
Trauma
36
Charles Wenar, Ohio State University and Patricia Kerig,
James Madison University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282019-5 / MHID: 0-07-282019-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121520-6 / MHID: 0-07-121520-4 [IE]
Accessible
and
clearly
written,
Developmental
Psychopathology, 5e, by Charles Wenar and Patricia
Kerig approaches child psychopathology as “normal
development gone awry” and encourages students to “think
developmentally” about psychopathology from childhood
through adolescence. The fifth edition includes cutting-edge
research, a new organization, and new coverage of problems
that arise in late adolescence/early adulthood.
CONTENTS
1: The Developmental Psychopathology Approach
2: Normal Development
3: The Bridge to the Psychopathologies
4: Infancy: The Developmental Consequences of Mental
Retardation
5: Infancy: Disorders in the Autistic Spectrum
6: Infancy through Preschool Attachment Disorders, Oppositional
Defiant Disorder, and Enuresis
7: The Preschool Period: Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder
and Learning Disabilities
8: Middle Childhood: The Anxiety Disorders
9: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Mood Disorders and
Suicide
10: Middle Childhood to Adolescence: Conduct Disorder and
the Development of Antisocial Behavior
11: Severe Deviation in Late Childhood and Adolescence:
Schizophrenia
12: Psychopathologies of the Adolescent Transmission: Eating
Disorders and Substance Abuse
13: The Developmental Consequences of Brain Injury and
Chronic Illness
14: Risks in the Family Context: Child Maltreatment and Domestic
Violence
15: Late Adolescence to Early Adulthood: Emergent Personality
Disorders
16: Psychological Assessment
17: Intervention and Prevention
Gender Role Development
NEW
Chapter 14 Justice, Equity, and Social Change
Epilogue
The Ties That Bind: The Future of Sex and Gender
Glossary
References
Author Index I–1 Subject Index I–15 Credits C–1
Cognitive Science
SEX & GENDER
6th Edition
Hilary M Lips, Radford University
2008 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340553-7 / MHID: 0-07-340553-1
This is a comprehensive introduction to sex and gender
theories, research, and issues, focusing on social psychological
and feminist perspectives. The book examines the similarities
and differences between women and men, discusses
where that knowledge comes from, and explains how that
knowledge may itself be shaped and limited by cultural
perceptions. This new edition has been thoroughly revised
with up-to-date research citations for all chapters and more
current examples.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Substantially revised material on mental health/mental illness
appears in Chapter 9.
• New content includes material on women in the workplace,
stereotype threat, children’s development of gender schemas,
and stability and change in gender stereotypes.
CONTENTS
Part I: MYTHS, THEORIES, AND RESEARCH
Chapter 1 Masculinity and Femininity: Myths and Stereotypes
Chapter 2 Theoretical Perspectives on Sex and Gender
Chapter 3 Researching Sex and Gender: Exploring the Whys and
Hows
Part II: BEHAVIOR & EXPERIENCE: FEMALE—MALE
SIMILIARITIES AND DIFFERENCES
Chapter 4 Worlds Apart? Gender Differences in Social Behavior
and Experience
Chapter 5 Biology and Environment: The Process of Becoming
Female or Male
Chapter 6 Perceptual and Cognitive Abilities: Gender Similarities
and Differences
Chapter 7 Sexual Lives and Orientations
Chapter 8 Hormonal and Reproductive Connections
Chapter 9 Mental and Physical Health: Stress, Change, and
Adaptations
CONTROVERSIAL ISSUES IN COGNITIVE SCIENCE
Marion Mason, Bloomsburg University of Pennsylvania
2005 / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-295328-2 / MHID: 0-07-295328-4
Available: May 2004
Catalog Page (Browse http://www.dushkin.com/catalog/00729
53284.mhtml)
CONTENTS
Part 1: MIND AND BRAIN
New! ISSUE 1. Are Mind and Brain the Same?
New! ISSUE 2. Do Children Develop Theories About Other
People’s Minds?
New! ISSUE 3. Is Mindfulness a Cognitive Style?
Part 2: CONCEPTS
New! ISSUE 4. Are We Overestimating Infant’s Math Ability?
New! ISSUE 5. Can Infants Develop Abstract Concepts?
New! ISSUE 6. Is Sensory Information the Strongest Part of a
Stored Concept?
Part 3: MEMORY
New! ISSUE 7. Is Novice Memory Based on Associations?
New! ISSUE 8. Is Imagination Inflation Imaginary?
New! ISSUE 9. Is Adult Memory for Childhood Abuse
Unreliable?
Part 4: LANGUAGE
New! ISSUE 10. Is Context Stronger Than Frequency?
New! ISSUE 11. Is Stuttering Isolated from Lexical Retrieval?
New! ISSUE 12. Can Computer Models Explain Language
Disorders?
Part 5: INTELLIGENCE
New! ISSUE 13. Is Emotional Intelligence Really a Form of
Intelligence?
New! ISSUE 14. Is the Birth Order Effect on Intelligence Real?
Part 6: REASONING AND INTUITION
New! ISSUE 15. Can a Neural Network Model Account for Moral
Development?
New! ISSUE 16. Do We Use Reasoning to Make Moral
Decisions?
New! ISSUE 17. Is Intuition a Valid Way of Knowing?
New! ISSUE 18. Should Schools Teach for Wisdom?
Part III: SEX AND GENDER IN SOCIAL RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter 10 Sex and Gender and Childhood: Constructing
Gender
Chapter 11 Family and Friends: Attachment, Intimacy, and
Power
Chapter 12 Economic and Political Life: Power, Status, and
Achievement
Chapter 13 Issues in the Workplace
37
38
Educational Psychology ~ Contents
Child, Family & Society – Readers .......................................... 45
2008 New Title
■
ABBEDUTO
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Educational Psychology,
5e ..................................................................................... 42
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351521-2 / MHID: 0-07-351521-3
■
CAULEY
Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 07/08, 22e ....... 43
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339737-5 / MHID: 0-07-339737-7
■
DEL CAMPO
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Childhood and Society,
7e ..................................................................................... 45
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351513-7 / MHID: 0-07-351513-2
■
DICKINSON
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, And Bereavement 08/09,
10e ................................................................................... 46
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339771-9 / MHID: 0-07-339771-7
■
GONZALEZ-MENA
Diversity in Early Care and Education: Honoring
Differences, 5e ................................................................ 44
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352586-0 / MHID: 0-07-352586-3
■
SANTROCK
Educational Psychology, 3e.............................................. 40
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352582-2 / MHID: 0-07-352582-0
Death and Dying .................................................................... 45
Educational Psychology .......................................................... 40
Educational Psychology – Readers .......................................... 42
Infants & Toddlers .................................................................. 44
2009 New Title
■
DESPELDER
The Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, 8e ........ 45
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340546-9 / MHID: 0-07-340546-9
39
Educational Psychology
NEW
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
3rd Edition
John W. Santrock, University of Texas
at Dallas
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352582-2 / MHID: 0-07-352582-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110187-5 / MHID: 0-07-110187-X [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/santedu3e
Written by the author of highly effective psychology texts
relied upon by thousands of teachers and students, Educational
Psychology is a well-crafted text that emphasizes the application
of theory to classroom practice. With richly evocative
classroom vignettes provided by practicing teachers, as well
as the most case studies--three per chapter--of any Introductory
text, Santrock’s Educational Psychology helps students
think critically about the research basis for best practices.
Additionally, Santrock’s hallmark Learning System organizes
the content into manageable chunks to support retention and
mastery, and make it much more likely that students will have
an engaging and successful course experience.
opportunities for self-efficacy, for example – and offer specific
recommendations that students can use when they become
teachers. The Best Practice sections also includes first-person
accounts related teaching situations to offer real-world context
for the recommended strategies.
• Brain Research, Character Education, and more: The 3rd
Edition of Educational Psychology presents the latest content
and research, and includes more than 1,800 citations from the
21st century with more than 500 of these coming from 2005,
2006, and 2007 – including new research into the structure
and development of the brain, studies on moral and character
education, and much more.
• Preparation for Standards-Based Tests: The third edition offers
future teachers even more opportunites to practice answering test
items of the kind found on state certification and other PRAXIStype exams. A PRAXIS Practice section appears in the Review,
Reflect, and Practice sections concluding each chapter and
PRAXIS-type items have also been added to the case studies at
the end of each chapter.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Educational Psychology: A Tool for Effective
Teaching
Chapter 2: Cognitive and Language Development
Chapter 3: Social Contexts and Socioemotional Development
Chapter 4: Individual Variations
Chapter 5: Sociocultural Diversity
Chapter 6: Learners Who Are Exceptional
Chapter 7: Behavioral and Social Cognitive Approaches
Chapter 8: The Information-Processing Approach
Chapter 9: Complex Cognitive Processes
Chapter 10: Social Constructivist Approaches
Chapter 11: Learning and Cognition in the Content Areas
Chapter 12: Planning, Instruction, and Technology
Chapter 13: Motivation, Teaching, and Learning
Chapter 14: Managing the Classroom
Chapter 15: Standardized Tests and Teaching
Chapter 16: Classroom Assessment
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• PrepCenter: The faculty support materials – case studies,
online activities, video segments, powerpoints, instructor’s
manual sections – has been completely integrated into a single,
on-demand resource called PrepCenter. This concept-based
archive allows instructors access to every resource related to a
single concept or theory, regardless of where this material may
appear in the textbook. A professor preparing for a lecture on
“attribution” can search on the term and collect every case study,
instructor’s manual page, powerpoint slide, and video segment
related to the topic – all suitable for use as part of an in-class
lecture, or for posting to a course website.
• Expert Content and Research Consultants: As in prior editons,
Santrock’s Educational Psychology has been reviewed by experts
to ensure that the content is completely accurate and reflects the
most current research. The third edition consultants are:
Joyce Epstein, The Johns Hopkins University
Dale Schunk, University of North Carolina—Greensboro
James Kauffman, University of Virginia
Barbara McCombs, Denver Research Institute
Richard Mayer, University of California—Santa Barbara
Carolyn Evertson, Vanderbilt University
Carlos Diaz, Florida Atlantic University
Karen Swan, Kent State University
James McMillan, Virginia Commonwealth University
Gary Bitter, Arizona State University
• Best Practices: These sections describe a specific area of
professional practice – improving prosocial behavior or providing
40
ENHANCING COGNITIVE FUNTIONS
APPLICATIONS ACROSS CONTEXTS
Oon-Seng Tan and Alice Seok-Hoon Seng
2005 (May 2005) / 320 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124765-8 / MHID: 0-07-124765-3
Cognitive functioning is a new and important advancement
in cognitive psychology and cognitive science. Cognitive
functions are a central focus in the dynamic and mediational
approach to assessment and intervention. An understanding
of cognitive functions is the key to the design of effective
cognitive intervention and enrichment programs. This book
focuses on the mind of the learner, particularly on the
nature and characteristics of cognitive functioning. It covers
innovative and effective approaches to the enhancement
of learning potential and cognitive functioning of children
and adolescents. The approaches are grounded in theories
pertaining to cognitive functions, cognitive modifi ability,
and dynamic assessment. Written in clear language, the
book illustrates the nature of cognitive functioning and the
application of certain cognitive programs and interventions
across contexts. The nature of cognitive functioning today
is of interest not only to cognitive psychologists but also to
those working in the multiple disciplines of neuroscience,
cognitive systems, and human factors design. Cognitive
enrichment programs and assessment scales such as LPADB, FIE-B, ACFS, MindLadder, Building Blocks of Learning,
and MIDAS and their applications in different environments
are highlighted in the book and examples of good practice
and a variety of mediational and dynamic assessment tools
discussed. Educational practitioners working closely with
children, counselors, parents, and caregivers will find the
book a valuable reference.
CONTENTS
1. Toward a Theory of Enhancing Cognitive Functions
2. An Integrative Approach to Knowledge Construction Functions
(KCF)
3. Improving Cognitive Functions for Secondary School Students
4. The Application of Cognitive Functions Scale: A Dynamic
Assessment Procedure for Young Children
5. The Feuerstein Programs for Early Assessment and Intervention:
The LPAD-B and the FIE-B
6. Early Detection: Blessing or Curse
7. Mediation and Assessment of a Young and Low-functioning
Child: An Initial Session
8. Building Blocks of Learning: Dynamic Assessment and
Cognitive Mediation with Children
9. Cognitive Interventions for Memory Deficits
10. Enhancing Cognitive Functions via a Multiple Intelligences
Assessment
11. Sensory and Cognitive Development in Adulthood
TO EMPOWER, BE EMPOWERED
Yeap Lay Leng, Myint Swe Khine, Lim Lee Hean and
Low Guat Tin
2005 (May 2005) / 264 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124649-1 / MHID: 0-07-124649-5
“To empower, be empowered” are processes that enable
individuals to take on greater responsibility and authority in
decision making. The individuals’ potential to make decisions
can be maximized within an environment that nurtures them
through education, training, professional development,
commitment, facilitation, resources, mutual trust and
emotional support. In the educational context, “To empower,
be empowered” is to provide a “self-surpassing classroom”,
that is, a classroom environment with “self-surpassing
teachers” who engage their students in purposeful activities
and direct them to be responsible for their own learning. To
Empower, Be Empowered is suitable and applicable for all
those who are in people management. The 14 chapters in
the book are interrelated topics, written from the different
perspectives of empowerment.
CONTENTS
About the Authors
Introduction: Stepping Up Empowerment
Chapter 1: Empowering the Learner
Chapter 2: Understanding Learning Styles to Empower Learning
Chapter 3: Learning Styles and Educational Issues
Chapter 4: Empowerment through Cognitive Profi ling
Chapter 5: Cognitive Matching to Empower Learning
Chapter 6: Implications of Learning Styles in Empowering Learning
Chapter 7: Empowering Learning with Cognitive Organizers
Chapter 8: Empowering through Motivation: The Theory
Chapter 9: Empowering through Motivation: The Practice
Chapter 10: Empowering through Mentoring
Chapter 11: Empowering through Coaching
Chapter 12: Reframe to Empower Learning
Chapter 13: Empowering the Teacher: First, Learn More Thyself
Chapter 14: Initiatives to Empowerment in a ‘Learning Nation’
References
Index
THINKING ABOUT THINKING WHAT EDUCATORS
NEED TO KNOW
Jessie Ee, Agnes Chang and Oon-Seng Tan
2004 / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123507-5 / MHID: 0-07-123507-8
The new millennium calls for a breakthrough in the way we
learn and think. How can we enhance the flexibility of the
mind so that the spirit of innovation and enterprise can flourish
and flow in those we nurture and teach? What do we know
about the important roles played by attitudes, dispositions,
intellectual habits, and motivation in the development
of thinking? This book captures the latest research and
applications in these fields with contributions by some of
the most renowned researchers and practitioners intimately
involved in research and pedagogy in self-regulated learning
and metacognition.
CONTENTS
Part 1: THEORY AND RESEARCH, AND THEIR IMPLICATIONS
Chapter 1: Pursuing Academic Self regulation: A 20-year
Methodological Quest
Chapter 2: Teaching to Facilitate Self regulated Learning
Chapter 3: Principles of Self-regulated Learning for Teachers
Chapter 4: Thinking for Yourself and Thinking Together: The
Community of Inquiry as a Pedagogy for Self regulated Learning
Chapter 5: Metacognitive Theory and Classroom Practices
Chapter 6: Teachers’ Understanding and Practice of Strategybased Instruction and Classroom Goal Orientations for Students’
Self-regulation: Findings across Cultures
Chapter 7: Motivation, Strategies, and Achievement: A
Comparison of Teachers and Students in High, Average, and Low
Achieving Classes
Part 2: PRACTICE AND APPLICATIONS
Chapter 8: Reflective Practice and Self regulation: Walking the
Talk through Problem-based Learning in Teacher Education
Chapter 9: Choosing the Right Teacher: When Self-regulation
Can Hinder Learning
Chapter 10: Talk Your Walk: Issues in Instruction of Self-regulatory
Second Language Reading
Chapter 11: Self-regulated Learning in Science
Chapter 12: Fostering Students’ Self regulation Skills in
Mathematical Problem-solving
Chapter 13: Helping Students to Become Strategic Learners: The
Roles of Assessment, Teachers, Instruction, and Students
Chapter 14: Self-regulation for Adolescents with Attention Deficit
Hyperactivity Disorder
41
COUNSELLING IN SCHOOLS THEORIES,
PROCESSES AND TECHNIQUES
Esther Tan
2004 (December 2004) / 280 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123366-8 / MHID: 0-07-123366-0
– Readers
This book is intended to be a comprehensive guide and useful
resource for teachers, counsellors, parents and educators who
believe in a holistic education for the young. The nurturing
of the emotional, psychological, moral, physical, artistic
and spiritual well-being of the young is just as important as
challenging their minds and maximizing their intellectual
potentials. The scope of the book is comprehensive and
encompassing, covering a wide range of topics, including
developmental group guidance, career guidance and
career counselling, group dynamics and group counselling,
individual counselling, and intervention strategies in working
with children, youth and parents. There are also opportunities
to learn about the development and management of guidance
and counselling services in schools and how to conduct
school-based research in guidance and counselling to
enhance practice.
KEY FEATURES
v The is the first Asian indigenous resource book for pupil
counselling.
v A team of professional contributors consisting of teacher
educators, educational psychologists, counselling psychologists,
a professor of counselling from the United States and a consultant
psychiatrist from National University Hospital of Singapore, are
involved in the development of the content for this book.
v Care was taken to use everyday examples and case illustrations
to explain psychological concepts and theories, and provide
practical tips.
v This is a book on the what, why and how of pupil counselling,
with a balance between theory and practice.
CONTENTS
Foreword
Preface
Chapter 1: Developmental Group Guidance in the Classroom
Chapter 2: Working with Children
Chapter 3: Working with Youth
Chapter 4: Working with Parents
Chapter 5: Career Guidance and Career Counselling in Schools
Chapter 6: Group Counselling
Chapter 7: Multidimensional Metatheoretical Counselling Model
Chapter 8: An Ecological Multimodal Approach to Counselling
Chapter 9: Managing Guidance and Counselling in Schools
Chapter 10: Research in Guidance and Counselling
About the Contributors
Index
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN
5th Edition
Leonard Abbeduto, University of Wisconsin Madison
Frank Symons, University of Minnesota
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351521-2 / MHID: 0-07-351521-3
213.mhtml
This Fifth Edition of TAKING SIDES: EDUCATIONAL
PSYCHOLOGY presents current controversial issues in a
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Meeting the Diverse Needs of a Diverse Classroom
Issue 1. Are Single-Gender Classes Necessary to Ensure Equal
Educational Opportunities for Boys and Girls?
Issue 2. Should Struggling Students Be Retained?
Issue 3. Should English Immersion Replace Bilingual Education?
Issue 4. Is Full Inclusion Always the Best Option for Students with
Disabilities?
Issue 5. Can Schools Close the Achievement Gap Between
Students from Different
Issue 6. Should Schools Try to Increase Students’ Self-Esteem?
Issue 7. Should Moral Education Be Part of the School Curriculum?
UNIT 2 Theories of Learning and Their Implications for
Educational Practice
Issue 8. Should Schools Adopt a Constructivist Approach to
Education?
Issue 9. Does Reinforcement Facilitate Learning?
Issue 10. Can Howard Gardner’s Theory of Multiple Intelligences
Transform Educational Practice?
Issue 11. Will a Push for Standards and Accountability Lead to
More Motivated Students?
Issue 12. Do Recent Discoveries About the Brain and Its
Development Have Implications for Classroom Practice?
UNIT 3 Effective Teaching and the Evaluation of Learning
Issue 13. Is the Whole Language Approach to Reading Effective?
Issue 14. Is Greater Parental Involvement at School Always
Beneficial?
Issue 15. Should Schools Embrace Computers and Technology?
Issue 16. Should Schools Decrease Class Size to Improve Student
Outcomes?
42
Issue 17. Can a Zero-Tolerance Policy Lead to Safe Schools?
Issue 18. Should U.S. Schools Be Evaluated Against Schools in
Other Coutries?
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
07/08
22nd Edition
Kathleen M Cauley, Virginia
Commonwealth University
Gina Pannozzo, Virginia
Commonwealth University
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339737-5 / MHID: 0-07-339737-7
377.mhtml
From McGraw-Hill Contemporary Learning Series
(formerly known as McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this TwentySecond Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATIONAL
PSYCHOLOGY 07/08 provides convenient, inexpensive
press. Organizational features include: an annotated listing
of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of
contents; a topic guide; a general introduction; brief overviews
for each section; a topical index; and an instructor’s resource
guide with testing materials. USING ANNUAL EDITIONS
IN THE CLASSROOM is offered as a practical guide for
instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles are supported by our
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Perspectives on Teaching
1. A Learner’s Bill of Rights
2. Teachers as Leaders
3. Getting Personal About Teaching
New! 4. Memories from the ‘Other’: Lessons in Connecting with
Students
5. A National Tragedy: Helping Children Cope
UNIT 2. Development
Part A. Childhood
New! 6. Mind and Body
New! 7. Understanding Families: Applying Family Systems
Theory to Early Childhood Practice
Part B. Adolescence
8. The Role of the Generations in Identity Formation: Erikson
Speaks to Teachers of Adolescents
9. The Biology of Risk Taking
New! 10. Broadening the World of Early Adolescents
New! 14. Recognizing Gifted Students: A Practical Guide for
Teachers
15. Raising Expectations for the Gifted
Part C. Cultural Diversity
New! 16. Challenging Deficit Thinking
17. Creating Culturally Responsive Schools
Part D. Gender Differences
New! 18. The SIQ-III Test: Gender Issues in Literacy
New! 19. Boys and Girls Together: A Case for Creating GenderFriendly Middle School Classrooms
New! 20. Learning and Gender
UNIT 4. Learning and Instruction
Part A. Learning and Cognition
21. Successful Strategies for English Language Learners
New! 22. Differentiating for Tweens
23. Metacognition: A Bridge Between Cognitive Psychology and
Educational Practice
24. Constructing Learning: Using Technology to Support Teaching
for Understanding
25. Creating a Culture For Learning
26. Implementing a Research-Based Model of Cooperative
Learning
Part B. Instructional Strategies
27. Teachers Bridge to Constructivism
New! 28. The Changing Classroom: Challenges for Teachers
New! 29. Improve Your Verbal Questioning
New! 30. Designing Learning Through Learning to Design
UNIT 5. Motivation and Classroom Management
Part A. Motivation
New! 31. Convincing Students They Can Learn to Read: Crafting
Self-Efficacy Prompts
32. Help for Stressed Students
33. Caution--Praise Can Be Dangerous
34. ”If Only They Would Do Their Homework:” Promoting SelfRegulation in High School English Classes
Part B. Classroom Management
35. When Children Make Rules
36. The Key to Classroom Management
37. Twelve Practical Strategies to Prevent Behavioral Escalation
in Classroom Settings
New! 38. Bullying: Effective Strategies for Its Prevention
UNIT 6. Assessment
39. Multiple Choice
40. Using Student-Involved Classroom Assessment to Close
Achievement Gaps
41. Grades as Valid Measures of Academic Achievement of
Classroom Learning
New! 42. Seven Practices for Effective Learning
New! 43. Helping Students Understand Assessment
New! 44. Meeting the Challenge of High-Stakes Testing While
Remaining Child-Centered: The Representations of Two Urban
Teachers
UNIT 3. Individual Differences Among Learners
Part A. Exceptional Learning Needs
11. Normalizing Difference in Inclusive Teaching
New! 12. Thinking Positively: How Some Characteristics of
ADHD Can Be Adaptive and Accepted in the Classroom
New! 13. Technology to Help Struggling Students
Part B. Gifted and Talented
43
Infants & Toddlers
INFANTS, TODDLERS, AND CAREGIVERS WITH
THE CAREGIVERS COMPANION
7th Edition
Janet Gonzalez-Mena, Napa Valley College
Dianne Widmeyer Eyer, Canada College
2007
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325768-6 / MHID: 0-07-325768-0
Available: Februrary 2006
NEW
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/itc7e
DIVERSITY IN EARLY CARE AND
EDUCATION
HONORING DIFFERENCES
5th Edition
Janet Gonzalez-Mena, Napa Valley
College
2008 / 192 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352586-0 / MHID: 0-07-352586-3
Available: Februrary 2007
Diversity in Early Care and Education (formerly Multicultural
Issues In Child Care) explores the rich diversity encountered
in programs and environments for children ages birth to 8,
including those serving children with special needs. The
emphasis is on the practical and immediate concerns of
the early childhood professional and family service worker,
though all information has strong theoretical support.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Beyond "Multicultural": Moving from a multicultural to an
equity emphasis, Gonzalez-Mena discusses diversity as it relates
to the “isms” in race, gender, ability, religion, social class, and
status.
• From "Child Care" to "Care and Education": The title reflects
the fact that care and education always come as a package.
The text offers practical applications for a range of situations
encountered by such practitioners and administrators as:
* infant-toddler, preschool, primary teachers and program
directors,
* special educators and early interventionists,
* social services and family support personnel,
* and family child care providers.
• Online Resources at www.mhhe.com/gonzalezdiversity4e:
Online materials include Web links provided to allow students
to further explore text topics.
CONTENTS
1 Perceiving and Responding to Differences
2 Communicating Across Cultures
3 Working with Diversity Issues
4 A Framework for Understanding Differences
5 Attachment and Separation
6 Differing Perspectives on Learning through Play
7 Socialization, Guidance, and Discipline
44
Combining a child-centered philosophy with problemsolving strategies and a thorough discussion of diversity,
Infants, Toddlers, and Caregivers offers an ideal introduction
to curriculum and care for infants and toddlers. The approach
to caregiving that underlies the text is based on a combination
of Magda Gerber’s philosophy and that of her late colleague,
Emmi Pikler: both pioneers taught caregivers how to respect
young children and stressed the need to integrate (1) concepts
of child development with caregiving, (2) knowledge of play
as curriculum, (3) the physical and social environment, and
(4) adult relations. Infants, Toddlers, and Caregivers applies
this approach in a practical, meaningful way for students and
faculty in introductory early childhood courses.
CONTENTS
Preface
Resources for Caregivers
Part I. FOCUS ON THE CAREGIVER
1. Principles, Practice, and Curriculum
2. Infant-Toddler Education
3. Caregiving as Curriculum
4. Play as Curriculum
Part II. FOCUS ON THE CHILD
5. Attachment
6. Perception
7. Motor Skills
8. Cognition
9. Language
10. Emotions
11. Social Skills
Part III. FOCUS ON THE PROGRAM
12. The Physical Environment
13. The Social Environment
14. Adult Relations in Infant-Toddler Care and Education Programs
Appendix A: Quality in Infant-Toddler Programs
Appendix B: Environmental Chart
Appendix C: Guiding Principles of the Parent Services Projects
Notes
References
Glossary
Credits
Index
Appendix A: Quality in Infant-Toddler Programs: A Checklist
Appendix B: Environmental Chart
Appendix C: Guiding Principles of the Parent Services Project
Child, Family & Society – Readers
NEW
Death and Dying
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN CHILDHOOD
AND SOCIETY
7th Edition
THE LAST DANCE: ENCOUNTERING DEATH AND
DYING
8th Edition
Diana S Del Campo and Robert L Del Campo of New
Mexico State University-Las Cruces
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351513-7 / MHID: 0-07-351513-2
Lynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College and Albert Lee
Strickland
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340546-9 / MHID: 0-07-340546-9
132.mhtml
The best-selling textbook in the field, The Last Dance offers
an interdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying.
Integrating the experiential, scholarly, social, individual,
emotional, and intellectual dimensions of death and dying,
the eighth edition of this acclaimed text has been thoroughly
revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensive coverage of
death studies. Together with its companion volumes, this new
edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory
and research, as well as practical application to students’
lives.
known as McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this Seventh Edition of
TAKING SIDES: CHILDHOOD AND SOCIETY presents
current controversial issues in a debate-style format designed
to stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills.
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new companion text, A Journey Through the Last Dance,
helps students reexamine their attitudes and behaviors toward
death and dying, through activities, new ideas, terms, and
references to many resources.
• A new chapter on death systems highlights important public
policy issues.
UNIT 1 Infancy
Issue 1. Is Institutional Child Care Beneficial to Children?
Issue 2. Does Maternal Employment Have Negative Effects on
Children’s Development?
Issue 3. Should Scientists Be Allowed to Clone Children?
Issue 4. Do Federal Laws Make Transracial Adoptions More
Commonplace?
• A new chapter on end-of-life issues and decisions includes
discussion of informed consent, caregiver-patient relationships,
physician-assisted suicide, euthanasia, advance directives, and
financial planning.
UNIT 2 Early Childhood
Issue 5. Is Spanking Detrimental to Children?
Issue 6. Are Fathers Really Necessary?
Children?
Issue 8. Is Viewing Television Violence Harmful for Children?
• A new section on terrorism, including discussion of the impact
and aftermath of the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks.
UNIT 3 Middle Childhood
Issue 9. Does Marriage Improve Living Standards for Children?
Issue 10. Are Stepfamilies Inherently Problematic for Children?
Issue 11. Is Television Viewing Responsible for the Rise in
Childhood Obesity?
Issue 12. Do Bilingual Education Programs Help Non-EnglishSpeaking Children Succeed?
Issue 13. Is Gay Adoption and Foster Parenting Healthy for
Children?
Issue 14. Should the HPV Vaccination Be Mandatory for Girls in
Later Childhood?
UNIT 4 Adolescence
Issue 15. Should Children Who Are at Risk for Abuse Remain
with Their Families?
Issue 16. Is Abstinence-Only Sex Education the Best Way to
Teach About Sex?
Issue 17. Is the Internet a Safe Place for Teens to Explore?
• A new section on Celtic and Northern European cultural
traditions complements discussion of other cross-cultural
perspectives on death and dying.
• Expanded discussion of the role of biological and genetic
factors in suicide risk.
• Integrated discussion of developmental theories and the impact
of sociocultural influences on socialization and learning about
death.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change
Chapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of Sociocultural
Forces
Chapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and
Historical
Chapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and Institutions
Chapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public Policy
Chapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening Illness
Chapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and Decisions
Chapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of Loss
Chapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body Disposition
Chapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and Adolescents
Chapter 11 – Death in the Lives of Adults
45
Chapter 12 – Suicide
Chapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern World
Chapter 14 – Beyond Death / After Life
Chapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social Choices
NEW
BEREAVEMENT 08/09
10th Edition
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339771-9 / MHID: 0-07-339771-7
717.mhtml
CONTENTS
New! 4. Moving Toward Peac
5. Technology and Death Polic
New! 7. How Much Is More Life Worth?
New! 11. Knowledge of Sudden Infant Death Syndrome
Prevention Strategies in a Multicultural, Disadvantaged
Community
16. Palliative Care
18. Spirituality and Religion in the “Art of Dying”
46
Suicid
27. When Students Kill Themselve
34. Six Feet Under
Social and Personality Psychology
~ Contents
2008 New Title
■
CHRISLER
Lectures on the Psychology of Women, 4e ...................... 54
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340544-5 / MHID: 0-07-340544-2
■
DUFFY
Annual Editions: Social Psychology, 7e ............................ 49
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339739-9 / MHID: 0-07-339739-3
■
FISKE
Social Cognition, from Brains to Culture ......................... 52
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340552-0 / MHID: 0-07-340552-3
■
LARSEN
Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge About
Human Nature, 3e ........................................................... 51
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353190-8 / MHID: 0-07-353190-1
■
LIPS
Sex & Gender, 6e ............................................................. 55
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340553-7 / MHID: 0-07-340553-1
■
MYERS
Social Psychology, 9e....................................................... 48
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353189-2 / MHID: 0-07-353189-8
Advanced Social Psychology .................................................. 52
Attitudes and Behavior ........................................................... 51
Health Psychology .................................................................. 56
Interpersonal Relations ........................................................... 57
Intimacy ................................................................................. 54
Personality.............................................................................. 51
Psychology of Women and Gender ........................................ 54
Social Psychology – Readers................................................... 49
Social Psychology – Texts ....................................................... 48
2009 New Title
■
FEIST
Theories of Personality, 7e............................................... 51
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338270-8 / MHID: 0-07-338270-1
■
MIO
Multicultural Psychology, 2e ........................................... 51
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338271-5 / MHID: 0-07-338271-X
■
NIER
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Social Psychology, 3e .... 49
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351531-1 / MHID: 0-07-351531-0
■
TAYLOR
Health Psychology, 7e ..................................................... 56
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338272-2 / MHID: 0-07-338272-8
47
Social Psychology – Texts
NEW
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
9th Edition
David Myers, Hope College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353189-2 / MHID: 0-07-353189-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331026-8 / MHID: 0-07-331026-3
(with student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128670-1 / MHID: 0-07-128670-5
[IE with CD-ROM]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/myers9
David Myers’ Social Psychology continues to set the standard
by which other Social Psychology texts are judged. Its
renowned author’s engaging writing style and unique, intimate
voice make the text compelling without being simplistic. The
organization logically moves the student through the study of
how people think about, influence, and relate to one another,
with an appropriate balance of basic research and application.
This edition features additional contemporary research,
supplemented by video clips and vignettes that demonstrate
social psychology’s relevance.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• An increased emphasis on research and the story behind it,
including extensive revision of Chapter 1 (Research Methods)
and new "Research Close-Up" boxes.
• The Ninth Edition has been edited for conciseness and clarity
which will make this edition nearly 10% shorter than the previous
edition.
• PrepCenter helps instructors build classroom presentations whenever, where-ever, and how-ever they want. In one convenient
to use as is, or to drop into a PowerPoint slideshow or a course
webpage. Instructors can search for individual assets the way they
want to search—by chapter, by concept, or by type of media.
• "Focus On" boxes have been updated to emphasize news and
current events related to topics in social psychology, as well as
the real life role of social psychology.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Social Psychology
Part 1: SOCIAL THINKING
Chapter 2: The Self in a Social World
Chapter 3: Social Beliefs and Judgments
Chapter 4: Behavior and Attitudes
48
Part 2: SOCIAL INFLUENCE
Chapter 5: Genes, Culture, and Gender
Chapter 6: Conformity
Chapter 7: Persuasion
Chapter 8: Group Influence
Part 3: SOCIAL RELATIONS
Chapter 9: Prejudice: Disliking Others
Chapter 10: Aggression: Hurting Others
Chapter 11: Attraction and Intimacy: Liking and Loving Others
Chapter 12: Helping
Chapter 13: Conflict and Peacemaking
Part 4: APPLYING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Chapter 14: Social Psychology in the Clinic
Chapter 15: Social Psychology in Court
Chapter 16: Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future
Epilogue
Glossary
References
Acknowledgments
Name Index
Subject Index
EXPLORING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
David Myers Hope College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322887-7 / MHID: 0-07-322887-7
(with PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353187-8 / MHID: 0-07-353187-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110300-8 / MHID: 0-07-110300-7 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/myerse4
This brief, modular introduction to social psychology offers
streamlined focus on issues such as belief and illusion,
prejudice and diversity, and love and hate. The brevity of
each of the book’s 31 stand-alone modules makes this the
perfect text for covering the core concepts in the field. The
new edition includes expanded coverage of cultural diversity
and the most current research from the 21st century.
CONTENTS
Part One: INTRODUCING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Module 1 Doing Social Psychology
Module 2 Did You Know It All Along?
Part Two: SOCIAL THINKING
Module 3 Self Concept: Who Am I?
Module 4 Self-serving Bias
Module 5 The Power of Positive Thinking
Module 6 The Fundamental Attribution Error
Module 7 Intuition: The Power and Limits of Our Inner Knowing
Module 8 Reasons for Unreason
Module 9 Behavior and Belief
Module 10 Clinical Intuition: The Perils of Psychologizing
Module 11 Clinical Therapy: The Powers of Social Cognition**
Part Three: SOCIAL INFLUENCE
Module 12 Human Nature and Cultural Diversity
Module 13 Gender, Genes, and Culture
Module 14 How Nice People Get Corrupted
Module 15 Two Routes to Persuasion
Module 16 Indoctrination and Inoculation
Module 17 The Mere Presence of Others
Module 18 Many Hands Make Diminished Responsibility
Module 19 Doing Together What We Would Never Do Alone
Module 20 How Groups Intensify Decisions
Module 21 Power to the Person
Part Four: SOCIAL RELATIONS
Module 22 The Dislike of Diversity
Module 23 The Roots of Prejudice
Module 24 The Nature and Nurture of Aggression
Module 25 Do the Media Influence Social Behavior?
Module 26 Who Likes Whom?
Module 27 The Ups and Downs of Love
Module 28 Causes of Conflict
Module 29 Blessed are the Peacemakers
Module 30 When Do People Help?
Module 31 The Social Psychology of Sustainability
Social Psychology – Readers
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN SOCIAL
PSYCHOLOGY
3rd Edition
Jason A Nier, Connecticut College
2009 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351531-1 / MHID: 0-07-351531-0
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
Stephen L. Franzoi, Marquette University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296747-0 / MHID: 0-07-296747-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319183-6 / MHID: 0-07-319183-3
(with Social Sense CD and PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321345-3 / MHID: 0-07-321345-4
(with PowerWeb OLC Bi-card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111934-4 / MHID: 0-07-111934-5 [IE]
This distinctive, theory-driven text uses “The Self” as a
theme to give students a meaningful context for exploring
the key concepts of social psychology. New “Applications”
sections have been incorporated into most Chapters, and new
“Featured Study” sections at the end of every summarize the
purpose, method, and results of recently published scientific
articles. Retaining the emphasis on methodology, the fourth
edition also continues the tradition of strong gender coverage,
while expanding the coverage of social cognition and social
neuroscience and introducing the new SocialSense CD-ROM.
CONTENTS
1 Introducing Social psychology
2 Research Methods in Social Psychology
Part One: UNDERSTANDING THE PERSON AND LIFE EVENTS
3 The Self
4 Self-Presentation and Person Perception
5 Thinking About Our Social World
Part Two: EVALUATING OUR SOCIAL WORLD
6 Attitudes
7 Persuasion
8 Prejudice and Discrimination
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL
PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
Karen G Duffy, State University
College – Geneseo
Gary Krolikowski, Empire State
College – Saratoga Spg
2008 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339739-9 / MHID: 0-07-339739-3
393.mhtml
This Seventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL
CONTENTS
Part Three: UNDERSTANDING OUR PLACE WITHIN THE
GROUP
9 Social Influence
10 Group Behavior
UNIT 1. Research Issues
New! 1. How to Be a Wise Consumer of Psychological Research
New! 2. Ethnic and Racial Health Disparities Research: Issues
and Problems
Part Four: INTERACTING WITH OTHERS
11 Interpersonal Attraction
12 Intimate Relationships
13 Aggression
14 Prosocial Behavior: Helping Others
UNIT 2. The Self
New! 3. Self-Esteem Development Across the Lifespan
4. Self-Concordance and Subjective Well-Being in Four Cultures
UNIT 3. Social Cognition and Social Perception
Part A. Social Cognition
49
6. How Social Perception Can Automatically Influence Behavior
New! 7. Flashbulb Memories: How Psychological Research Shows
That Our Most Powerful Memories May Be Untrustworthy
New! 8. Culture Affects Reasoning, Categorization
Part B. Social Perception
New! 9. The Social Nature of Perception and Action
New! 10. Perception of Faces and Bodies
UNIT 4. Attitudes
New! 11. Implicit Discrimination
12. The Science and Practice of Persuasion
New! 13. In Search of Pro-Americanism
UNIT 5. Social Influence
New! 14. “Thin Slices” of Life
15. Abu Ghraib Brings A Cruel Reawakening
16. Persuasion: What Will It Take to Convince You?
UNIT 6. Social Relationships
Part A. Interpersonal Relationships
New! 17. Contagious Behavior
New! 18. Competent Jerks, Lovable Fools, and the Formation of
Social Networks
Part B. Intimate Relationships
19. Isn’t She Lovely?
20. If It’s Easy Access That Really Makes You Click, Log On
Here
New! 21. Brokeback Mountain: A Gay and a Universal Love
Story
UNIT 7. Social Biases
Part A. Prejudice
22. The Self-Protective Properties of Stigma: Evolution of a
Modern Classic
New! 23. Leaving Race Behind
Part B. Stereotyping
New! 24. Lowered Expectations
25. Change of Heart
26. Thin Ice: “Stereotype Threat” and Black College Students
UNIT 8. Violence and Aggression
New! 27. A Bicultural Perspective on Worldviews
New! 28. Anger on the Road
29. Bullying: It Isn’t What It Used To Be
30. Influencing, Negotiating Skills, and Conflict-Handling: Some
Additional Research and Reflections
UNIT 9. Altruism, Helping and Cooperation
New! 31. The Compassionate Instinct
New! 32. Gift Giving’s Hidden Strings
33. Trends in the Social Psychological Study of Justice
UNIT 10. Group Processes
Part A. Leadership
New! 34. Seven Transformations of Leadership
35. When Followers Become Toxic
Part B. Groups
New! 36. To Err Is Human
37. Senate Intelligence Report: Groupthink Viewed as Culprit in
Move to War
New! 38. Sports Complex: The Science Behind Fanatic Behavior
50
PSYCHOLOGY
2nd Edition
Jason A. Nier, Connecticut College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351503-8 / NHID: 0-07-351503-5
035.mhtm
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
presents current controversial issues in a debate-style format
designed to stimulate student interest and develop critical
thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with an
issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An
student website, www.dushkin.com/online.
CONTENTS
Part 1: ETHICAL ISSUES IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
ISSUE 1. Is Deception of Human Participants Ethical?
ISSUE 2. Should Social Psychologists Try to Solve Social
Problems?
Part 2: SOCIAL COGNITION
ISSUE 3. Are Our Social Perceptions Often Inaccurate?
ISSUE 4. Does Cognitive Dissonance Explain Why Behavior Can
Change Attitudes?
New! ISSUE 5. Applying Social Psychology: Are Self-Esteem
Programs Misguided?
ISSUE 6. Do Positive Illusions Lead to Healthy Behavior?
ISSUE 7. Can People Accurately Detect Lies?
ISSUE 8. Are Repressed Memories Real?
New! ISSUE 9. Can Social Psychological Research Help Explain
the Abu Ghraib Prison Scandal?
ISSUE 10. Do Milgram’s Obedience Experiments Help Explain
the Nature of the Holocaust?
ISSUE 11. Does the Stanford Prison Experiment Help Explain the
Effects of Imprisonment?
ISSUE 12. Is Subliminal Persuasion a Myth?
ISSUE 13. Can People Really Be Brainwashed?
New! ISSUE 14. Is Stereotyping Inevitable?
New! ISSUE 15. Does the Implicit Association Test (IAT) Measure
Racial Prejudice?
New! ISSUE 16. Can Stereotypes Lead to Accurate Perceptions
of Others?
ISSUE 17. Does True Altruism Exist?
ISSUE 18. Does Media Violence Cause Aggression?
Attitudes and Behavior
NEW
NEW
PERSONALITY PSYCHOLOGY:
DOMAINS OF KNOWLEDGE
ABOUT HUMAN NATURE
3rd Edition
MULTICULTURAL PSYCHOLOGY
2nd Edition
Jeffrey Scott Mio
Lori Barker Hackett
Jaydee Tumambing
2009 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338271-5 / MHID: 0-07-338271-X
Randall J. Larsen, Wasington
University - St Louis and David M.
Buss, University of Texas at Austin
2008 / 784 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353190-8 / MHID: 0-07-353190-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110168-4 / MHID: 0-07-110168-3 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/larsen3
Personality
NEW
THEORIES OF PERSONALITY
7th Edition
Jess Feist, Mcneese State University
Geogory Feist, College of William Mary
2009 / 592 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338270-8 / MHID: 0-07-338270-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-126345-0 / MHID: 0-07-126345-4 [IE]
Larsen and Buss’s Personality Psychology is based on a
framework of six important domains of knowledge about
personality functioning. These six domains are the dispositional
domain (traits, trait taxonomies, and personality dispositions
over time), the biological domain (physiology, genetics,
evolution), the intrapsychic domain (psychodynamics, motives),
the cognitive/experiential domain (cognition, emotion, and
the self), the social and cultural domain (social interaction,
gender, and culture), and the adjustment domain (stress,
coping, health, and personality disorders). This book is based
on the notion that these domains of knowledge represent the
organizing structure of contemporary personality psychology.
CONTENTS
Introduction
1. Introduction to Personality Psychology
2. Personality Assessment, Measurement, and Research Design
Part I: THE DISPOSITIONAL DOMAIN
3. Traits and Trait Taxonomies
4. Theoretical and Measurement Issues in Trait Psychology
5. Personality Dispositions over Time: Stability, Change, and
Coherence
Part II: THE BIOLOGICAL DOMAIN
6. Genetics of Personality
7. Physiological Approaches to Personality
8. Evolutionary Perspectives on Personality
Part III: THE INTRAPSYCHIC DOMAIN
9. Psychoanalytic Approaches to Personality
10. Psychoanalytic Approaches: Contemporary Issues
11. Motives and Personality
Part IV: THE COGNITIVE/EXPERIENTIAL DOMAIN
12. Cognitive Approaches to Personality
13. Emotion and Personality
14. Approaches to the Self
Part V: THE SOCIAL AND CULTURAL DOMAIN
15. Personality and Social Interaction
16. Sex, Gender, and Personality
17. Culture and Personality
Part VI: THE ADJUSTMENT DOMAIN
18. Stress, Coping, Adjustment, and Health
19. Disorders of Personality
Conclusion
20. Summary and Future Directions
51
THEORIES OF PERSONALITY
6th Edition
Jess Feist, McNeese State University and Geogory J. Feist,
College of William Mary
2006
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296980-1 / MHID: 0-07-296980-6
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319181-2 / MHID: 0-07-319181-7
(with OLC PowerWeb Bi-Card)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124439-8 / MHID: 0-07-124439-5
[IE with OLC]
Advanced Social Psychology
NEW
SOCIAL COGNITION, FROM
BRAINS TO CULTURE
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/feist6
This trusted text centers on the premise that personality
theories are a reflection of the unique cultural background,
family experiences, personalities, and professional training
of their originators. The book begins by acquainting students
with the meaning of personality and providing them with a
solid foundation for understanding the nature of theory, as
well as its crucial contributions to science. The chapters
that follow present twenty-three major theories: coverage of
each theory also encompasses a biographical sketch of each
theorist, related research, and applications to real life. The
new edition includes greater coverage of the Big Five theory,
a new organization, and updated research throughout.
CONTENTS
1: Introduction to Personality Theory
Part II: PSYCHODYNAMIC THEORIES
2: Freud: Psychoanalysis
3: Adler: Individual Psychology
4: Jung: Analytical Psychology
5: Klein: Object Relations Theory
6: Horney: Psychoanalytic Social Theory
7: Fromm: Humanistic Psychoanalysis
8: Sullivan: Interpersonal Theory
9: Erikson: Post-Freudian Theory
Part III: HUMANISTIC/EXISTENTIAL THEORIES
10: Maslow: Holistic-Dynamic Theory
11: Rogers: Person-Centered Theory
12: May: Existential Psychology
Part IV: DISPOSITIONAL THEORIES
13: Allport: Psychology of the Individual
14: Eysenck, McCrae, and Costa’s Factor and Trait Theories
Part V: LEARNING THEORIES
15: Skinner: Behavioral Analysis
16: Bandura: Social Cognitive Theory
17: Rotter and Mischel: Cognitive Social Learning Theory
18: Kelly: Psychology of Personal
Constructs
Susan T Fiske, University of
Massachusetts, Amherst
Shelley E Taylor, University of
California-Los Angeles
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340552-0 / MHID: 0-07-340552-3
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fisketaylor
This exciting new version of the classic text, Social
Cognition, describes the increasingly complete link between
neuropsychology and culture. Highlighting the cuttingedge research in social neuropsychology, mainstream
experimental social-cognitive psychology, and cultural
psychology, it retains the authors’ unique ability to be both
scholarly and entertaining. Reader-friendly style and concise
summaries combine with the authors’ engaging perspectives
on this flourishing field. Comprehensive without being
overwhelming, this new standard for the field brings with it a
new organization reflecting current consensus open issues of
the field, and its trajectory into the future.
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
a. Approaches to Studying the Social Thinker
b. Ebb & Flow of Cognition in Psychology & Neuroscience
c. What is Social Cognition?
d. People Are Not Things
e. Culture Matters
f. Brains Matter
g. Summary
Basic Concepts in Social Cognition
2. Dual-Modes
a. Automaticity
b. Control
c. Motivations that Moderate Modes
d. Models of Both Automatic and Controlled Processes
e. Single-Mode Alternatives
f. Summary
3. Attention and encoding: What gets into our heads
a. Salience: A Property of Stimuli in Context
b. Vividness: An Inherent Property of Stimuli
c. Accessibility: A Property of Categories in Our Heads
d. Direct Perception: Not Just in Our Heads
e. Faces: The focus of social attention
f. Summary
g. Unfinished business:
4. Representation in Memory
a. Models of Memory
52
b. Social Memory Structures: Why Social Memory Matters
c. Summary
d. Unfinished business:
e. How Social Memory Matters
Topics in Social Cognition: From Self to Society
5. Self
a. Mental representation of the Self
b. Culture and the Self
c. Self-Regulation
d. Motivation and Self-Regulation
e. Self as a Reference Point (ck Ochsner, Kelley, Heatherton)
6. Causal Attribution Processes
a. What is Attribution Theory?
b. Attribution Theory: The Empirical Legacy
c. Attributional Biases
d. Summary
7. Heuristics
a. Introduction to heuristics
b. When do heuristics lead to the wrong answers?
c. Judgments over time
d. Accuracy-efficiency trade-off in perspective
e. Summary
8. Cognitive Approaches to Attitudes & Evaluations (in progress)
a. Background
b. Cognitive features of two consistency theories
c. Types of attitude processing
d. Cognitive analyses of attitudes within social contexts
e. Attitude change and the self
f. Summary
9. Stereotyping: A Central Topic in Social Cognition
a. Introduction
b. Blatant stereotypes
c. Subtle stereotypes
d. Effects of bias
e. Summary
SOCIAL COGNITION
2nd Edition
Susan T. Fiske, University of Massachusetts’Amherst and
Shelley E. Taylor, University of California’Los Angeles
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-021191-9 / MHID: 0-07-021191-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-100910-2 / MHID: 0-07-100910-8 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/catalogs/0070211914.mhtml
CONTENTS
1: Introduction
Part One: ELEMENTS OF SOCIAL COGNITION
2: Attribution Theory
3: Attribution Theory: Theoretical Refinements and Empirical
Observations
4: Social Categories and Schemas
5: Conditions of Schema Use
6: Social Cognition and the Self
Part Two: PROCESSES OF SOCIAL COGNITION
7: Social Encoding: Attention and Consciousness
8: Person Memory
9: Social Influence
Part Three: BEYOND COGNITION
10: Affect and Cognition
11: Cognitive Approaches to Attitudes
12: Behavior and Cognition
13: Conclusion
10. Prejudice: Interplay of Cogntive and Affective Biases (in
progress)
a. Introduction
b. Intergroup emotions
c. Special case of Race & Ethnicity
d. Prejudice: Special case of Gender
e. Special case of Age
f. Special case of heterosexism
g. Summary
11. Mood & Emotions (in progress)
a. Differentiating among affects, preferences, evaluations, moods
b. Early theories
c. Physiological theories of emotion
d. Social foundations of affect
e. Affective influences on cognition
f. Affect versus cognition
g. Summary
12. Behavior and cognition
a. Self regulation revisited
b. How is cognition related to behavior?
c. When are cognitions and behavior related?
d. Using behavior to test hypotheses about others
e. Summary
13. Conclusion
53
Intimacy
Psychology of Women
and Gender
INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
4th Edition
NEW
Sharon Stephens Brehm & Rowland Miller of Sam Houston
State University and Daniel Perlman & Susan Miller
Campbell of Middlebury College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293801-2 / MHID: 0-07-293801-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111255-0 / MHID: 0-07-111255-3 [IE]
Intimate Relationships, 3rd editon, by Sharon S. Brehm,
Rowland S. Miller, Daniel Perlman, and Susan Campbell
preserves the personal appeal of the subject matter and
vigorous standards of scholarship that made the earlier
editions so successful. Written in a unified voice, this text
builds on the reader-friendly tone that was established in
the first two editions. It presents the key findings on intimate
relationships, the major theoretical perspectives, and some of
the current controversies in the field. Brehm, Miller, Perlman,
and Campbell illustrate the relevance of close relationship
science to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging thought and
analysis. Classic contributions to the field are covered in
addition to topics on the leading edge of research.
LECTURES ON THE
PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN
4th Edition
Joan C. Chrisler, Connecticut College
2008 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340544-5 / MHID: 0-07-340544-2
This unique collection of previously unpublished essays by
experienced teachers and leading experts in Psychology of
Women is designed as a companion reader to any Psychology
of Women textbook. The lectures included are written in an
informal manner: the authors speak to students directly and
address questions that students often ask.
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Part 1: INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF INTIMATE
RELATIONSHIPS
1 The Building Blocks of Relationships
2 Research Methods
• Two of the 24 lectures are new to this edition: "Poor Women
in a Wealthy Nation," by Deborah Belle, and "Women with
Disabilities," by Rhoda Olkin.
Part 2: GETTING TOGETHER AND BASIC PROCESSES IN
3 Attraction
4 Social Cognition
5 Communication
6 Interdependency
Preface
Introduction
Part 3: FRIENDSHIP AND INTIMACY
7 Friendships Across the Life Cycle
8 Love
9 Sexuality
Part 4: RELATIONSHIP ISSUES
10 Stresses and Strains
11 Power in Intimate Relationships
12 Conflict and Violence
Part 5: LOSING AND ENHANCING RELATIONSHIPS
13 The Dissolution and Loss of Relationships
14 Loneliness
15 Fostering Relationships: Getting, Maintaining, and Repairing
Them
CONTENTS
I. Status of Women
1. Transforming the Debate on Sexual Inequality: From Biological
Difference to Institutionalized Androcentrism
2. Who’s In and Who’s Out: The Results of Oppression
3. Poor Women in a Wealthy Nation
4. Sex Discrimination at Work
5. Feminist Perspectives on the Personal and Political Aspects of
Mothering
6. Gender Socialization, or How Long a Way Has Baby Come?
II. Women’s Bodies
7. Sweating It Out: The Good News and the Bad News about
Women and Sport
8. Women, Weight, and Body Image
9. The Intersexed and the Transgendered: Rethinking Sex/Gender
10. PMS as a Culture-bound Syndrome
11. Understanding Emotional Responses after Abortion
12. Women with Disabilities
13. The Health Risks of Being Black, Latina, Women, and/or
Poor: Redefining Women’s Health within the Context of Social
Inequality
III. Diversity of Women
14. Asian American Women and Adolescent Girls: Sexuality and
Sexual Experession
15. Life as a Lesbian; What Does Gender Have to Do with It?
16. Gender Issues Among Latinas
17. Triple Jeopardy in the Lives of Biracial Black/White Women
18. Mammy, jezebel, Sapphire, and Their Homegirls: Developing
54
an “Oppositional Gaze” toward the Images of Black Women
19. Crossing the Color Line in Women’s Friendships
IV. Violence against Women
20. Women’s Fear of Rape: Causes, Consequences, and Coping
21. Women and Pornography: What We Don’t Know Can Hurt Us
22. Battered Women: Why Don’t They Just Leave?
V. Women’s Mental Health
23. Positive Aging for Women
24. A Feminist Approach to Agoraphobia: Challenging Traditional
Views of Women at Home
Chapter 12 Economic and Political Life: Power, Status, and
Achievement
Chapter 13 Issues in the Workplace
Chapter 14 Justice, Equity, and Social Change
Epilogue
The Ties That Bind: The Future of Sex and Gender
Glossary
References
Author Index I–1 Subject Index I–15 Credits C–1
NEW
SEX & GENDER
6th Edition
Hilary M Lips, Radford University
2008 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340553-7 / MHID: 0-07-340553-1
This is a comprehensive introduction to sex and gender
theories, research, and issues, focusing on social psychological
and feminist perspectives. The book examines the similarities
and differences between women and men, discusses
where that knowledge comes from, and explains how that
knowledge may itself be shaped and limited by cultural
perceptions. This new edition has been thoroughly revised
with up-to-date research citations for all chapters and more
current examples.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Substantially revised material on mental health/mental illness
appears in Chapter 9.
• New content includes material on women in the workplace,
stereotype threat, children’s development of gender schemas,
and stability and change in gender stereotypes.
CONTENTS
Part I: MYTHS, THEORIES, AND RESEARCH
Chapter 1 Masculinity and Femininity: Myths and Stereotypes
Chapter 2 Theoretical Perspectives on Sex and Gender
Chapter 3 Researching Sex and Gender: Exploring the Whys and
Hows
Part II: BEHAVIOR & EXPERIENCE: FEMALE—MALE
SIMILIARITIES AND DIFFERENCES
Chapter 4 Worlds Apart? Gender Differences in Social Behavior
and Experience
Chapter 5 Biology and Environment: The Process of Becoming
Female or Male
Chapter 6 Perceptual and Cognitive Abilities: Gender Similarities
and Differences
Chapter 7 Sexual Lives and Orientations
Chapter 8 Hormonal and Reproductive Connections
Chapter 9 Mental and Physical Health: Stress, Change, and
Adaptations
Part III: SEX AND GENDER IN SOCIAL RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter 10 Sex and Gender and Childhood: Constructing
Gender
Chapter 11 Family and Friends: Attachment, Intimacy, and
Power
WOMEN AND GENDER: A FEMINIST
PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
Mary Crawford, University of Connecticut—Storrs and
Rhoda Unger, Brandeis University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-282107-9 / MHID: 0-07-282107-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121661-6 / MHID: 0-07-121661-8 [IE]
CONTENTS
Preface
1. Introduction to a Feminist Psychology of Women
What Is Feminism?
Methods and Values in Scientific Inquiry Themes of This Book
Our Goals for Our Students
Suggested Readings
2. Images of Women and Men
Media Images of Women and Men
The Impact of Media Sexism
Cross-cultural Similarities and Differences in Images of Women
Stereotypes: An Overview
Language and Stereotypes
Stereotypes as Social Demands
Stereotypes and Sexism
Is the Glass Half Empty or Half Full?
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
3. Doing Gender
Gender as a Social Category
Gender Differences as Status Differences
Gender and the Use of Social Power
Women and Men Doing Gender
Internalizing Norms and Interpreting
Discrimination
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
4. The Meanings of Difference
A Focus on Similarity: Working for Equality
Different or Similar? Gender and Math Abilities
The Similarities Tradition: Why It Matters
The Differences Tradition: Celebrating Women
The Differences Tradition: Why It Matters
Can Similarities and Differences be Reconciled?
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
5. Biology, Sex, and Gender
What is Sex and What are the Sexes?
Prenatal Development
Does the Human Brain Have a Sex?
Atypical Human Sexual Development
Cultural Constructions of Gender
55
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
6. Becoming Gendered: Childhood Acquiring Gender: A
Developmental Perspective
How Do Parents View Sons and Daughters?
Gender Bias
How Does Society Foster Gender
Typing?
Sex Segregation
The Socialization of Social Behaviors
Gender Role Scripts for Boys and Girls
Resisting Gender Rules
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
7. Becoming a Woman: Puberty and Adolescence
What Happens During Puberty?
Female Anatomy and Culture
Peers, Schools, and Social Power
Weight, Body Image, and Mental Health
How Do Girls Deal with the Stress of Adolescence?
Are barriers to Gender Equality Falling?
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
8. Sex, Love, and Romance
How Is Sexuality Shaped by Culture?
The Scientific Study of Sex
Adolescent Sexuality
Experiencing Sexuality
Lesbian and Bisexual Women
Romantic Love and Sexual Pleasure
Sexuality in Social Context
Where is the Voices of Women’s Desire?
Mixed Messages
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
9. Commitments: Women and Close Relationships
Marriage
Lesbian Couples
Cohabiting Couples
Never-Married Women
Ending the Commitment: Divorce and
Separation
Remarriage
Equality and Commitment: Are They
Incompatible Ideals?
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
10. Mothering
Images of Mothers and Motherhood
The Decision to Have a Child
The Transition to Motherhood
The Event of Childbirth
Experiences of Mothering
The Future of Mothering
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
11. Work and Achievement
If She Isn’t Paid, Is It Still Work?
Working Hard for a Living: Women in the Paid Workforce
Doing Gender in the Workplace
Women’s Career Development: Are There Obstacles from
Within?
Exceptional Work Lives
Putting It All Together: Work and Family
Woman, Work, and Social Policy: Models for Change
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
56
12. Midlife and Beyond
The Social Construction of Age
The Meanings of Midlife Menopause
Role Transitions of Middle and Later Life
Myths and Realities of Midlife Transitions
Older Women and Poverty
Caregiver Roles in Later Life
Losses Associated with Aging
Psychological Well-Being in the Second Half of Life
Activism and Feminism among Older Women
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
13. Violence Against Women (by Jacquelyn Weygandt White,
Barrie Bondurant, & Patricia L. N. Donat)
A Framework for Understanding
Violence against Women
Childhood Sexual Abuse
Courtship Violence
Acquaintance Sexual Assault and Rape
Sexual Harassment
Partner Abuse against Women
Analyzing and Ending Violence
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
14. Mental and Physical Health
Gender and Psychological Disorders
Power Issues
Depression
Eating Disorders
Issues in Treatment
The Relationship Between Physical and Mental Health
When Is a Culture Healthy for Women?
Connecting Themes
Suggested Readings
15. Making a Difference: Toward a Better Future for Women
Transforming Gender
Transforming Language
Celebrating Diversity
Psychology and Social Change
Suggested Readings
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
Health Psychology
NEW
HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
Shelley Taylor, University of California-Los Angeles
2009 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338272-2 / MHID: 0-07-338272-8
HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY
6th Edition
Shelley E. Taylor, University of Calif-Los Angeles
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-310726-4 / MHID: 0-07-310726-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321946-2 / MHID: 0-07-321946-0
(with PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125193-8 / MHID: 0-07-125193-6
[IE with OLC]
Health Psychology, 6/e by Shelley Taylor continues to set
the standard for the Health Psychology market. One of the
foremost researchers in health psychology, Shelley Taylor has
thoroughly revised this text to incorporate the latest research
findings in the field. The result is a text that conveys the
increasing sophistication and complexity of the connection
between the mind and the body, in an accessible and exciting
manner. The flexible organization and emphasis of many
relevant areas of psychology make Health Psychology, 6e
appropriate for courses in Health Psychology, Health and
Human Behavior, and allied health and pre-med/pharmacy
programs. Thoroughly redesigned, the new edition includes
updated research throughout with increased emphasis on the
biopsychosocial model.
CONTENTS
Part One: INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH PSYCHOLOGY
1: What is Health Psychology?
2: The Systems of the Body
Part Two: HEALTH BEHAVIOR AND PRIMARY PREVENTION
3: Health Behaviors
4: Health-Enhancing Behaviors
5: Health-Compromising Behaviors
Part Three: STRESS AND COPING
6: Stress
7: Moderators of the Stress Experience
Interpersonal Relations
INTERPERSONAL CONFLICT
7th Edition
William W Wilmot, University of Montana
2007 (October 2005) / 384 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313554-0 / MHID: 0-07-313554-2
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/wilmot7
Written for courses such as Communication and Conflict,
Interpersonal Conflict, Conflict Management, Conflict and
Negotiation, and Conflict in Personal Relationships, this
textbook examines the central principles of effective conflict
management in a wide variety of contexts--from romantic
relationships to the workplace. Its combination of up-to-date
research and examples gives students a theoretical as well as
a practical foundation in conflict management.
CONTENTS
Preface
Acknowledgements
Part One: CONFLICT COMPONENTS
Chapter 1: The Nature of Conflict
Chapter 2: Perspectives on Conflict
Chapter 3: Interests and Goals
Chapter 4: Power: The Structure of Conflict
Chapter 5: Styles and Tactics
Part Two: INTERVENTION
Chapter 6: Assessing Conflicts
Chapter 7: Moderating Your Conflicts
Chapter 8: Negotiating for Mutual Gains
Chapter 9: Third-Party Intervention
Chapter 10: Mending the Broken Branch: Forgiveness and
Reconciliation
Chapter 11: Preventing Destructive Conflict
Appendix
References
Name Index
Subject Index
Part Four: THE PATIENT IN THE TREATMENT SETTING
8: Using Health Services
9: Patient-Provider Relations
10: Pain and its Management
Part Five: MANAGEMENT OF CHRONIC AND TERMINAL
ILLNESS
11: Management of Chronic Illness
12: Psychological Issues in Advancing and Terminal Illness
13: Heart Disease, Hypertension, Stroke, and Diabetes
14: Psychoneuroimmunology, AIDS, Cancer, and Arthritis
Part Six: TOWARD THE FUTURE
15: Health Psychology: Challenges for the Future
57
58
Clinical Psychology ~ Contents
Abnormal Psychology ............................................................. 60
2008 New Title
■
DUFFY
Annual Editions: Personal Growth and Behavior 07/08,
26e ................................................................................... 62
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339731-3 / MHID: 0-07-339731-8
■
HAUGAARD
Child Psychopathology .................................................... 66
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340550-6 / MHID: 0-07-340550-7
■
KSIR
Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 12e ...................... 63
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352961-5 / MHID: 0-07-352961-3
■
WILSON
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, and Behavior 07/08,
22e ................................................................................... 65
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339742-9 / MHID: 0-07-339742-3
Abnormal Psychology – Readers ............................................ 61
Adjustment – Readers ............................................................. 62
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology ................................................ 63
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology – Readers ................................ 64
Introduction to Clinical Psychology ........................................ 63
2009 New Title
■
GOLDBERG
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Drugs and Society, 8e .... 64
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351511-3 / MHID: 0-07-351511-6
■
HALGIN
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Abnormal Psychology,
5e ..................................................................................... 61
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351526-7 / MHID: 0-07-351526-4
■
WILSON
23e ................................................................................... 65
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339773-3 / MHID: 0-07-339773-3
59
Clinical Psychology
Abnormal Psychology
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY WITH MINDMAP II
CD-ROM AND POWERWEB
5th Edition
Richard P. Halgin and Susan Krauss Whitbourne of
University of Mass-amherst
2007 / Hardcover with CDROM
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322872-3 / MHID: 0-07-322872-9
(For sale in US/Canada only)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110665-8 / MHID: 0-07-110665-0
[IE with Bi-card MindMap]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/halgin5
Focused, fresh, and engaging, this text captures student interest
and facilitates comprehension through the widespread use of
current and highly relevant clinical case studies. The fullyrevised fifth edition maintains the integrative approach to
treatment using the biopsychosocial model, the emphasis on
cases, and the succinct coverage that have been the foundations
of the text’s success. It now features a more focused approach
than previous editions, with the goal of presenting only the
most relevant research and clinical material.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Understanding Abnormality: A Look at History and
Research Methods
Chapter 2: Classification and Treatment Plans
Chapter 3: Assessment
Chapter 4: Theoretical Perspectives
Chapter 5: Anxiety Disorders
Chapter 6: Somatoform Disorders, Psychological Factors Affecting
Medical Conditions and Dissociative Disorders
Chapter 7: Sexual Disorders
Chapter 8: Mood Disorders
Chapter 9: Schizophrenia and Related Disorders
Chapter 10: Personality Disorders
Chapter 11: Development-Related Disorders
Chapter 12: Cognitive Disorders
Chapter 13: Substance-related Disorders
Chapter 14: Eating Disorders and Impulse-control Disorders
Chapter 15: Ethical and Legal Issues
60
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
Susan Nolen-Hoeksema, Yale University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-313369-0 / MHID: 0-07-313369-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322873-0 / MHID: 0-07-322873-7
(with MindMap CD-ROM and PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-336603-6 / MHID: 0-07-336603-X
(with student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110708-2 / MHID: 0-07-110708-8 [IE]
Authored by award-winning teacher and noted researcher
Susan Nolen-Hoeksema, this text blends cutting-edge research
in psychopathology with compassion for people who suffer
from psychological disorders. Capturing the excitement of
major advances in biological and psychosocial research and
treatment alternatives, Abnormal Psychology imparts a true
enthusiasm for and appreciation of scientific investigation.
The author’s scientific and caring approach, combined with
strong study tools, has won accolades from instructors and
students alike. The fourth edition reflects greater emphasis on
integrated approaches to abnormal psychology, a constant
drive to make biological information clear to students, and a
stronger focus on empirical research and diversity.
CONTENTS
1. Looking at Abnormality
2. Contemporary Theories of Abnormality
3. The Research Endeavor
4. Assessing and Diagnosing Abnormality
5. Treatments for Abnormality
6. Stress Disorders and Health Psychology
7. Anxiety Disorders: Panic, Phobias, Generalized Anxiety, and
Obsessive-compulsive Disorder
8. Dissociative and Somatoform Disorders
9. Mood Disorders
10. Suicide
11. Schizophrenia
12. Personality Disorders
13. Childhood Disorders
14. Cognitive Disorders and Life-Span Issues
15. Eating Disorders
16. Sexual Disorders and Gender Identity Disorder
17. Substance-Related Disorders
18. Mental Health, Social Policy, and the Law
Clinical Psychology
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY WITH MINDMAP PLUS
CD-ROM AND POWERWEB
9th Edition
Lauren Alloy, Temple University-Philadelphia, John Riskind,
George Mason University and Margaret Manos
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-287870-7 / MHID: 0-07-287870-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121780-4 / MHID: 0-07-121780-0 (IE)
Website: www.mhhe.com/alloy9
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Abnormal Behavior: Historical Perspectives
Chapter 2 Diagnosis and Assessment
Chapter 3 Research Methods in Abnormal Psychology
Chapter 4 The Behavioral, Cognitive, and Sociocultural
Perspectives
Chapter 5 The Psychodynamic, Humanistic, and Interpersonal
Perspectives
Chapter 6 The Neuroscience Perspective
Chapter 8 Dissociative and Somatoform Disorders
Chapter 9 Psychological Stress and Physical Disorders
Chapter 10 Mood Disorders
Chapter 11 Personality Disorders
Chapter 12 Substance-Use Disorders
Chapter 13 Sexual Dysfunctions, Paraphilias, and Gender Identity
Disorders
Chapter 14 Schizophrenia and Delusional Disorder
Chapter 15 Neuropsychological Disorders
Chapter 16 Disorders of Childhood and Adolescence
Chapter 17 Mental Retardation and Autism
Chapter 18 Legal Issues in Abnormal Psychology
Abnormal Psychology – Readers
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN ABNORMAL
PSYCHOLOGY
5th Edition
Richard P Halgin, University of Mass-Amherst
2009 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351526-7 / MHID: 0-07-351526-4
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN ABNORMAL
PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
Richard P. Halgin, University of Mass-Amherst
ISBN-13: 9780-07-351498-7 / MHID: 0-07-351498-5
985.mhtml
known as McGraw-Hill/Dushkin), this fourth edition of
TAKING SIDES: ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY presents current
controversial issues in a debate-style format designed to
stimulate student interest and develop critical thinking skills.
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
Part 1: PSYCHOLOGICAL CONDITIONS AND TREATMENTS
New! ISSUE 1. Should Individuals with Anorexia Nervosa Have
the Right to Refuse Life-sustaining Treatment?
New! ISSUE 2. Is Psychological Debriefing a Harmful Intervention
for Survivors of Trauma?
New! ISSUE 3. Are Blocked and Recovered Memories Valid
Phenomena?
ISSUE 4. Is Multiple Personality Disorder a Valid Diagnosis?
New! ISSUE 5. Does Attention Deficit Disorder Exist?
ISSUE 6. Should All Uses of MDMA (Ecstacy) Be Prohibited?
ISSUE 7. Should Abstinence Be the Goal for Treating People with
Alcohol Problems?
Part 2: THE TREND TOWARD BIOLOGICAL INTERVENTIONS
ISSUE 8. Are Prozac and Similar Antidepressants Safe and
Effective?
ISSUE 9. Are Antipsychotic Medications the Treatment of Choice
for People with Psychosis?
ISSUE 10. Is Ritalin Overprescribed?
ISSUE 11. Should Psychologists Prescribe Medication?
ISSUE 12. Is Electroconvulsive Therapy Ethical?
Part 3: SOCIAL ISSUES
New! ISSUE 13. Is Sexual Orientation Conversion Therapy Ethical?
New! ISSUE 14. Does Exposure to Media Violence Promote
Aggressive Behavior?
ISSUE 15. Is Pornography Harmful?
ISSUE 16. Is Divorce Always Detrimental to Children?
ISSUE 17. Does Evolution Explain Why Men Rape?
ISSUE 18. Should Mental Health Professionals Serve as
Gatekeepers for Physician-Assisted Suicide?
61
Clinical Psychology
Adjustment – Readers
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: PERSONAL
GROWTH AND BEHAVIOR
07/08
26th Edition
Karen G Duffy, State University of
Coll-Geneseo
2008 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339731-3 / MHID: 0-07-339731-8
318.mhtml
This Twenty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: PERSONAL
GROWTH AND BEHAVIOR 07/08 provides convenient,
listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Becoming a Person: Foundations
1. Carl Rogers’ Life and Work: An Assessment on the 100th
Anniversary of His Birth
3. Skepticism of Caricatures: B.F. Skinner Turns 100
4. The “Big Five” and You: How Personality Traits Affect
Behavior
UNIT 2. Determinants of Behavior: Motivation, Environment,
and Physiology
6. The Blank Slate, Steven Pinker
8. Nature vs. Nurture: Two Brothers With Schizophrenia
Us Human?
10. His Brain, Her Brain
11. Cultural Psychology: Studying the Exotic Other
12. Just Do It
13. Stand and Deliver
UNIT 3. Problems Influencing Personal Growth
14. The Biology of Aging
15. and Now, the Hard Part: That Sweet Little Thing Is About to
Commandeer Your Life
16. Childhood Is for Children
18. What American Schools Can Learn from Hogwarts School of
Witchcraft and Wizardry
19. What Makes Teens Tick
62
20. Staving Off Middle-Age Spread Requires Portion Control and
Plenty of Exercise
21. Midlife Crisis? Bring It On!
UNIT 4. Relating to Others
23. Mirror, Mirror: Seeing Yourself As Others See You
24. What’s Your Emotional IQ?
25. Nurturing Empathy
26. What Does That Mean?
28. Calling It Off
29. Want to Stay Married? Move to Massachusetts
30. Forgiveness: Who Does It and How Do They Do It?
UNIT 5. The Individual and Society
31. The Emperor’s New Woes
32. Suspicious Minds
33. 50th Anniversary: Brown v. Board of Education
34. The Social Net
35. Work-life: Organizations in Denial
36. How to Get Out Alive
37. The Collateral Psychological Damage of War
UNIT 6. Enhancing Human Adjustment: Learning to Cope
Effectively
38. Are We Becoming a Nation of Depressives?
39. Dear Reader: Get a Life
40. The 10 Rules of Change
41. Drugs vs. Talk Therapy
Clinical Psychology
Introduction to
Clinical Psychology
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology
NEW
INTRODUCTION TO CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY:
SCIENCE AND PRACTICE
DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND HUMAN
BEHAVIOR
12th Edition
Bruce Compas, University of Vermont and Ian Gotlib,
Stanford University
2002
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-253650-0 / MHID: 0-07-253650-0
(with Student CD-ROM)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128745-6 / MHID: 0-07-128745-0
[IE w/Student CD]
Website: www.mhhe.com/compas
CONTENTS
Section I: Introduction to the Field
Chapter 1: What Is Clinical Psychology?
Chapter 2: Clinical Psychology: Past and Present
Chapter 3: Research Methods in Clinical Psychology
Chapter 4: Models of Development, Behavior and Personality
Chapter 5: Psychopathology
Section II: Psychological Assessment
Chapter 6: Assessment: Understanding Individuals and Contexts
Chapter 7: Assessment: Clinical Interviewing
Chapter 8: Assessment: Measurement of Intelligence and
Neuropsychological Testing
Chapter 9: Assessment: Measurement of Personality
Chapter 10: Assessment: Measurement of Behavior, Cognition,
and Psychophysiology
Section III: Psychological Intervention: From Prevention to
Psychotherapy
Chapter 11: Intervention: Promotion, Prevention, and Treatment
Chapter 12: Psychotherapy: Psychoanalytic and Psychodynamic
Approaches
Chapter 13: Psychotherapy: Humanistic, Existential, and
Experiential Approaches
Chapter 14: Psychotherapy: Behavioral and Cognitive
Approaches
Chapter 15: Effectiveness of Psychotherapy: Evaluation and
Integration
Chapter 16: Clinical Psychology: Our Past, Our Future, and Your
Opportunities
Charles J. Ksir, University of Wyoming
– Laramie, Carl L. Hart, Columbia
University and Oakley S. Ray,
Vanderbilt U-sch of Medicine
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352961-5 / MHID: 0-07-352961-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110175-2 / MHID: 0-07-110175-6 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ksir12e
Designed for the introduction to drugs and substance
abuse course as taught in departments of health education,
psychology, biology, sociology, and criminal justice, this
full-color market-leading text provides the latest information
on drugs and their effects on society and human behavior.
For over thirty years, instructors and students have relied
on it to examine drugs and behavior from the behavioral,
pharmacological, historical, social, legal, and clinical
perspectives.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Online Learning Center features updated and expanded
supplements, including a completely revised test bank (more
and better questions), a new image bank, expanded PowerPoint
slides, additional online study tools for students (quizzes, key
terms flashcards, links), audio chapter summaries, HealthQuest
Activities, and Web Activities.
• Provides updated coverage of key topics, such as medical
marijuana, steroids and nutritional ergogenic aids, prevention
programs, smoking in film, abuse of legal pharmaceuticals,
methamphetamine use, and treatment of bipolar disorder,
insomnia, and ADHD
• Significantly expands the photo program.
• Includes updated information on statistics and trends for drug
use and effects (Monitoring the Future, National Survey on Drug
Use and Health, DAWN, SAMHSA treatment info), costs of drug
control, and the prison population.
CONTENTS
Part I: DRUG USE IN MODERN SOCIETY
1: Drug Use: An Overview
2: Drug Use as a Social Problem
3: Drug Production and Regulation
Part II: HOW DRUGS WORK
4: The Nervous System
5: The Actions of Drugs
Part III: UPPERS AND DOWNERS
6: Stimulants
7: Depressants
8: Psychotherapeutic Drugs
63
Clinical Psychology
Part IV: ALCOHOL
9: Alcohol
Part V: FAMILIAR DRUGS
10: Tobacco
11: Caffeine
12: Herbals, Dietary Supplements, and Over-the-Counter Drugs
Part VI: RESTRICTED DRUGS
13: Opioids
14: Hallucinogens
15: Marijuana and Hashish
16: Performance-Enhancing Drugs
Part VII: INTERVENTION STRATEGIES
17: Preventing Drug Misuse and Abuse
18: Treating Substance Dependence
DRUGS IN PERSPECTIVE
6th Edition
Richard Fields, Private Practice Tuscon AZ and Redmond
Washington
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304747-8 / MHID: 0-07-304747-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325202-5 / MHID: 0-07-325202-6
(with PW Bi-card)
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fields5e
Drugs in Perspective is written for the drug and substance
abuse counseling course designed to prepare future health
professionals to work with patients, clients, and families of
abusers. It is designed to provide perspective on the aspects
and problems associated with addiction as well as provide
the fundamentals on the dynamics of chemical dependency.
This edition improves topic flow for easier understanding and
brings the research base into the 21st century.
CONTENTS
Section I: Understanding Substance Abuse
1 Etiology: A Better Understanding of Drug Dependence and
Addiction
2 Alcohol/Drugs and Our American Society—Major Problems
and Perspectives
3 Drug Specific Information: Drugs on the Street Where You Live
4 Screening and Assessment of Alcohol/Drug Problems
Section II: Family
5 Substance Abuse and Family Systems
6 Parenting: Impact on Alcohol/Drug Use and Abuse
7 Growing Up in an Alcoholic Family System
Section III: Prevention, Intervention and Treatment
8 Prevention of Substance Abuse Problems
9 Motivation and Intervention for Substance Abuse Problems
10 Co-occurring Disorders with Substance Abuse
11 Alcohol/Drug Treatment & Relapse Prevention on
Drugs / Psycho-pharmacology
– Readers
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN DRUGS AND
SOCIETY
8th Edition
Raymond Goldberg, State University of NY – Cortland
2009 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351511-3 / MHID: 0-07-351511-6
116.mhtml
This Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: DRUGS AND SOCIETY
CONTENTS
Part 1 DRUGS AND PUBLIC POLICY
Issue 1. Should Laws Against Drug Use Remain Restrictive?
Issue 2. Should the United States Put More Emphasis on Stopping
the Importation of Drugs?
Issue 3. Are Drinking Age Laws Effective?
Issue 4. Are the Dangers of Ecstasy (MDMA) Overstated?
Issue 5. Should Pregnant Drug Users Be Prosecuted?
Issue 6. Should Drug Addiction Be Considered a Disease?
Issue 7. Should the Federal Government Play a Larger Role in
Regulating Steroid Use?
Part 2 DRUGS AND SOCIAL POLICY
Issue 8. Are the Adverse Effects of Smoking Exaggerated?
Issue 9. Should Laws Prohibiting Marijuana Use Be Relaxed?
Issue 10. Are Psychotherapeutic Drugs Over-Prescribed for
Treating Mental Illness?
Issue 11. Do the Consequences of Caffeine Outweigh Its Benefits?
Issue 12. Should School-age Children with Attention Deficit/
Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) Be Treated with Ritalin and
Other Stimulants?
Issue 13. Do Consumers Benefit When Prescription Drugs Are
Advertised?
Part 3 DRUG PREVENTION AND TREATMENT
Issue 14. Does Secondhand Smoke Endanger the Health of
Nonsmokers?
Issue 15. Is Alcoholism Hereditary?
Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Approved for Medical Use?
Issue 17. Should Schools Drug Test Students?
Issue 18. Does Drug Abuse Treatment Work?
Issue 19. Is Abstinence an Effective Strategy for Drug Education?
64
Clinical Psychology
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND
BEHAVIOR 08/09
23rd Edition
Hugh T Wilson, California State University—Sacramento
2009 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339773-3 / MHID: 0-07-339773-3
733.mhtml
This Twenty-Third Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS,
SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR provides convenient, inexpensive
IN THE CLASSROOM (ISBN-13:9780073301907/ISBN10:0073301906)is offered as a practical guide for instructors.
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS,
SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR 07/08
22nd Edition
Hugh T Wilson, California State
University-Sacramento
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339742-9 / MHID: 0-07-339742-3
This Twenty-Second Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS,
SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR 07/08 provides convenient,
listing of selected World Wide Web sites; an annotated table of
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Living with Drugs
1. Hey, You Don’t Look So Good
2. Living the High Life: The Role of Drug Taking in Young
People’s Lives
3. Methamphetamine Across America: Misconceptions, Realities
and Solutions
4. Balding, Wrinkled and Stoned
5. America’s Most Dangerous Drug
6. With Scenes of Blood and Pain
7. My Mother: The Narc
8. Pass the Weed, Dad
9. Did Prohibition Really Work?: Alcohol Prohibition as a Public
Health Innovation
UNIT 2. Understanding How Drugs Work—Use, Dependency,
and Addiction
10. Addiction Is a Brain Disease
11. Predicting Addiction
12. Staying Sober
13. The Effects of Alcohol on Physiological Processes and
Biological Development
14. The Toxicity of Recreational Drugs
15. Structural Differences Found in Brains of Heavy Marijuana
Users
16. Does Cannabis Cause Psychosis or Schizophrenia?
UNIT 3. The Major Drugs of Use and Abuse
17. A More Addictive Meth Emerges as States Curb Homemade
Type
18. Just Say No? No Need Here
19. A Harvest of Treachery
20. An End to ‘Power Hour’
21. Helping Students Stay Clean and Sober
22. The Power of Potent Steroids
23. Cannabis-Related Problems and Their Management
24. Pot Farms Ravaging Park Land
UNIT 4. Other Trends in Drug Use
25. Resurgence of Teen Inhalant Use
26. New Study Shows 1.8 Million Youth Use Inhalants
27. The Changing Face of Teenage Drug Abuse—The Trend
toward Prescription Drugs
28. OxyContin Acting as Pathway Drug for Adolescent Heroin
Addiction
29. Club Drugs: Study Explores Reasons for Use by Young Adults
30. Rx for Trouble
31. Studies Identify Factors Surrounding Rise in Abuse of
Prescription Drugs by College Students
32. The Best High They’ve Ever Had
33. Some Cold Medicines Moved Behind the Counter
34. Facing an Uncertain Twilight
UNIT 5. Measuring the Social Costs of Drugs
35. Meth Addicts’ Other Habit: Online Theft
36. Mothers Addicted to Meth Face Losing Their Children
37. The Role of Substance Abuse in U.S. Juvenile Justice Systems
and Populations
38. My Spirit Lives
39. When Drinking Kills
40. What Alcohol Does to a Child
41. The Problem With Drinking
42. ADHD Drugs and Cardiovascular Risk
43. High on the Job
UNIT 6. Creating and Sustaining Effective Drug Control Policy
44. Administration Announces Anti-Methamphetamine Plan
45. Court Upholds Federal Authority to Reject ‘Medical
Marijuana’
46. Medical Marijuana, Compassionate use, and Public Policy:
Expert Opinion or Vox Populi?
47. Is Drug Testing of Athletes Necessary?
48. Meth Madness
49. How to Stand Up to Big Tobacco
50. Cigarette Trafficking: Expanding Criminal Activity Attracts
65
Clinical Psychology
Law Enforcement Attention
51. Battles Won, A War Still Lost
52. The War on Thugs
53. Arresting the Drug Laws
54. State’s Evidence
UNIT 7. Prevention, Treatment, and Education
55. How to Quit the Cure
56. Drug Treatment and Reentry for Incarcerated Women
57. Combination Treatment of One Year Doubles Smokers’ Quit
Rate
58. Medication & Counseling: The ‘New Paradigm’ in Alcoholism
Treatment
59. A Teen Health Gap
60. Teens Caught in the Middle: Juvenile Justice System and
Treatment
61. No Longer Theory: Correctional Practices That Work
62. Parent Power
63. What to Say When Your Child Asks: Did You Ever Do Drugs?
64. Exercise and Drug Detoxification
Developmental Psychopathology
NEW
CHILD PSYCHOPATHOLOGY
Jeffrey Haugaard, Cornell University--Ithaca
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340550-6 / MHID: 0-07-340550-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-126354-2 / MHID: 0-07-126354-3 [IE]
All students who will one day work with children or their
families can gain a basic foundation for understanding child
psychopathology from this text. Students who seek careers
in the mental health, physical health, or social work fields
will find extensive information on childhood disorders, their
prevention, and their treatment. All will gain an appreciation
for the many facets of this growing field, and of the need to
base interventions on research and on a humane attitude
toward each child and family.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 2 Research Methods and Ethical Issues
Chapter 3 Basic Psychological Theories
Chapter 4 Quantitative Behavioral Genetics
Chapter 5 Classification, Diagnosis, and Assessment Disorders
Chapter 6 Conduct Disorder and Oppositional Defiant Disorder
Chapter 7 Attention-Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
Chapter 8 Bipolar Disorder
Chapter 9 Depressive Disorders
Chapter 11 Mental Retardation
Chapter 12 Autism and Other Pervasive Developmental Disorders
Chapter 13 Childhood-onset Schizophrenia
Chapter 14 Disorders Related to Child Maltreatment and Other
Trauma (Posttraumatic Stress Disorder, Dissociative Disorders,
Reactive Attachment Disorder)
Chapter 15 Disorders Related to Physical Health and Functioning
(Somatoform Disorders, Childhood Obesity, Elimination
Disorders)
66
Experimental Psychology ~ Contents
Cognitive Psychology ............................................................. 73
2008 New Title
■
BORDENS
Research Design and Methods: A Process Approach,
7e ..................................................................................... 68
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312906-8 / MHID: 0-07-312906-2
■
ROSENTHAL
Essentials of Behavioral Research: Methods and Data
Analysis, 3e ...................................................................... 68
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353196-0 / MHID: 0-07-353196-0
■
SPATZ
Research Methods in Psychology: Ideas, Techniques and
Reports ............................................................................ 69
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-253074-2 / MHID: 0-07-253074-X
Experimental Psychology – Readers ........................................ 71
Neuropsychology ................................................................... 73
Perception .............................................................................. 74
Research Methods .................................................................. 68
SPSS/SAS ................................................................................ 72
Statistics ................................................................................. 71
Tests and Measurements ......................................................... 72
2009 New Title
■
COHEN
Pscyhological Testing and Assessment, 7e ....................... 72
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312909-9 / MHID: 0-07-312909-7
■
SHAUGHNESSY
Research Methods in Psychology, 8e ............................... 68
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338269-2 / MHID: 0-07-338269-8
67
Experimental Psychology
Research Methods
NEW
RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY
8th Edition
John Shaughnessy, Hope College
2009 / 544 Pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338269-2 / MHID: 0-07-338269-8
7: Understanding Ethical Issues in the Research Process
Part II
8: Using Nonexperimental Research
9: Using Survey Research
10: Using Between-Subjects and Within-Subjects Experimental
Designs
11: Using Specialized Research Designs
12: Using Single-Subject Designs
13: Describing Data
14: Using Inferential Statistics
15: Using Multivariate Design and Analysis
16: Reporting Your Research Results
Appendix: Statistical Tables
Glossary
References
Text Credits
Index
NEW
NEW
RESEARCH DESIGN AND
METHODS: A PROCESS
APPROACH
7th Edition
Kenneth Bordens and Bruce
Barrington Abbott of Indiana
University
2008 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312906-8 / MHID: 0-07-312906-2
ESSENTIALS OF BEHAVIORAL RESEARCH:
METHODS AND DATA ANALYSIS
3rd Edition
Robert Rosenthal, Harvard University
Ralph L Rosnow, Temple University – Philadelphia
2008 / 848 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353196-0 / MHID: 0-07-353196-0
The only comprehensive treatment of methods and data analysis,
this classic advanced undergraduate/graduate text in research
methods requires statistics as a prerequisite. The first half of
the text concentrates on research methods and the second half
introduces students to advanced statistical procedures.
RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS: A PROCESS
APPROACH, Seventh Edition, offers students an in-depth
introduction to the process of research design and methods. It
is distinguished by its application of the process approach, a
proven strategy for guiding students at each step in designing,
conducting, and evaluating psychological research.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New emphasis on the reporting and interpretation of confidence
intervals.
• A new stand alone chapter on ethical issues. Chapter 7 provides
students with expanded coverage of ethical issues including
more history of research ethics, treating subjects and participants
ethically, and an expanded section on the importance of being
ethical and honest as a researcher.
• Complete chapter on the research paper. Chapter 16 presents
the most current APA guidelines for writing and reporting research
results and also includes a complete paper and information on
paper presentations, oral presentations and poster sessions.
CONTENTS
Preface
Part I
1: Explaining Behavior
2: Developing and Evaluating Theories of Behavior
3: Getting and Developing Research Ideas
4: Choosing a Research Design
5: Making Systematic Observations
6: Choosing and Using Participants and Subjects
68
• More integrated synthesis of research methods and data
analysis.
• New and deeper discussions of methodological and
philosophical issues, data analytic issues, epistemological issues
in human subjects, and research and ethical guidelines.
• New material throughout, including new material on test
validity, the construction of composite variables, dealing with
missing data, bootstrapping and jackknifing, the design and
analysis of hierarchically nested designs, and the use of a recently
developed effect size estimate for multiple-choice-type data.
CONTENTS
Preface
Part I: CONCEPTUAL AND ETHICAL FOUNDATIONS
1. The Spirit of Behavioral Research
2. Contexts of Discovery and Justification
3. Ethical Considerations, Dilemmas, and Guidelines
Part II: OPERATIONALIZATION AND MEASUREMENT OF
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
4. Reliability and Validity of Measurements
5. Observations, Judgments, and Composite Variables
6. Questionnaires, Interviews, and Diaries
Part III: THE LOGIC OF RESEARCH DESIGNS
7. Randomized Controlled Experiments and Causal Inference
8. Nonrandomized Research and Functional Relationships
9. Randomly and Nonrandomly Selected Sampling Units
Part IV: FUNDAMENTALS OF DATA ANALYSIS
10. Describing, Displaying, and Exploring Data
11. Correlation
12. Statistical Power and Effect Size Revisited
Part V: ONE-WAY DESIGNS
13. Comparing Means by Standard t Tests
14. Analysis of Variance and the F Test
15. One-Way Contrast Analyses
Part VI: FACTORIAL DESIGNS
16. Factorial Analysis of Variance
17. Interaction Effects in Analysis of Variance
18. Repeated Measures in Analysis of Variance
Part VII: ADDITIONAL TOPICS IN DATA ANALYSIS
19. Significance Testing and Association in Tables of Counts
20. Multivariate Data Analysis
21. Meta-Analysis: Comparing and Combining Research Results
Part VIII: APPENDICES
A: List of Numbered Equations
B: Statistical Tables
Glossary
References
Indexes
Name Index
Subject Index
NEW
RESEARCH METHODS IN
PSYCHOLOGY: IDEAS,
TECHNIQUES AND REPORTS
Chris Spatz, Hendrix College
Edward P Kardas, Southern Arkansas
University
2008 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-253074-2 / MHID: 0-07-253074-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111664-0 / MHID: 0-07-111664-8 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/spatz
Emphasizing critical thinking and ethics, Spatz & Kardas’
Research Methods in Psychology presents a practical
approach to investigating behavioral and mental processes. By
understanding context, students are led to apply appropriate
methods, collect data, and arrive at valid conclusions about
subjects that relate to the world around them. Intended for a
first undergraduate course, Research Methods in Psychology
incorporates student-friendly features such as Chapter
Reviews and Critical Thinking exercises, while providing all
the background and tools necessary for students to conduct
and report on their own research.
CONTENTS
Preface
Chapter 1 Science
Chapter 2 Research in Psychology
Chapter 3 Ethics
Chapter 4 Measurement
Chapter 5 Data Exploration and Description
Chapter 6 Statistical Tests
Chapter 7 Design I: Between-Subjects Designs
Chapter 8 Design II: Within-Subjects Designs and Pretests
Chapter 9 Complex Designs
Chapter 10 Observational, Qualitative, and Small-N Research
Chapter 11 Planning Research
Chapter 12 Conducting and Reporting Research
APPENDIXES
Appendix A Annotated APA manuscript
Appendix B Ethical Standards of the APA
Appendix C Statistical tables
Appendix D Glossary of Terms
References
Index
METHODS IN BEHAVIORAL RESEARCH
9th Edition
Paul Cozby, California State University-Fullerton
2007
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353181-6 / MHID: 0-07-353181-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327131-6 / MHID: 0-07-327131-4
(with PW)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110643-6 / MHID: 0-07-110643-X [IE]
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110963-5 / MHID: 0-07-110963-3
[IE with PowerWeb]
With its concise and strategic approach to decision making,
Methods in Behavioral Research by Paul C. Cozby continues
to gain in popularity among instructors and students alike.
Building on a strong foundation of pedagogy and well-chosen
examples, the Ninth Edition incorporates learning objectives,
new graphics and activities to increase student involvement,
and an updated appendix on writing research reports as well
as making poster presentations.
CONTENTS
1. Scientific Understanding of Behavior
2. Where to Start
3. Ethical Research
4. Studying Behavior
5. Measurement Concepts
6. Observing Behavior
7. Asking People About Themselves: Survey Research
8. Experimental Design
9. Conducting Experiments
10. Complex Experimental Designs
11. Quasi-Experimental and Single-Participant Designs
12. Understanding Research Results: Description and Correlation
13. Understanding Research Results: Statistical Inference
14. Generalizing Results
Appendix A: Writing Research Reports
Appendix B: Statistical Tests
Appendix C: Statistical Tables
Appendix D: Constructing a Latin Square
Glossary
69
References
Index
RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
John J. Shaughnessy, Hope College, Eugene B. Zechmeister
and Jeanne S. Zechmeister of Loyola University—Chicago
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-298622-8 / MHID: 0-07-298622-0
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111655-8 / MHID: 0-07-111655-9 [IE]
Considered one of the best undergraduate method texts
in the field for the past two decades, Research Methods in
Psychology captures the excitement of psychological inquiry
as well as the importance of understanding the methodology
that is used to conduct research. The text has been praised for
its clear writing, logical organization, depth of coverage, and
wide variety of examples from different fields of psychology.
The new edition includes updated research, a thoroughly
revised introductory chapter, and improved pedagogical
features designed to enhance students’ learning.
CONTENTS
Part I: GENERAL ISSUES
1 Introduction
2 The Scientific Method
3 Ethical Issues in the Conduct of Psychological Research
Part II: DESCRIPTIVE METHODS
4 Observation
5 Survey Research
6 Unobtrusive Measures of Behavior
Part III: EXPERIMENTAL METHODS
7 Independent Groups Designs
8 Repeated Measures Designs
9 Complex Designs
Part IV: APPLIED RESEARCH
10 Single-Case Designs, and Small-n Research
11 Quasi-Experimental Designs and Program Evaluation
Part V: ANALYZING AND REPORTING RESEARCH
12 Data Analysis and Interpretation
Part I: DESCRIBING DATA, CONFIDENCE INTERVALS,
CORRELATION
13 Data Analysis and Interpretation:
Part II: TESTS OF STATISTICAL SIGNIFICANCE AND THE
ANALYSIS STORY
14 Communication in Psychology
Appendix: Statistical Tables
70
PRINCIPLES OF RESEARCH IN BEHAVIORAL
SCIENCE
2nd Edition
Bernard E. Whitley, Jr., Ball State University
2002 / Hardcover / 544pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293233-1 / MHID: 0-07-293233-3
(with Internet Guide)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113135-3 / MHID: 0-07-113135-3 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/whitley2
CONTENTS
1. The Science of Psychology: Theory, Research, and Application
/ Science / Theories / Research / Theory, Research, and
Application
2. Research Strategies: An Overview / Purposes of Research
/ Quantitative and Qualitative Research / Research Strategies /
Time Perspectives: Short-Term versus Long-Term / Research
Settings: Laboratory versus Field / Research as a Set of Tradeoffs
3. The Ethical Treatment of Research Participants / Responsibility
for Ethical Research / Ethical Considerations in Planning Research
/ Ethical Considerations During Data Collection / Ethical
Considerations Following Data Collection
4. Formulating a Research Question / Formulating Research
Hypotheses / Replication Research / Designing Research for
Utilization / Bias in the Formulation of Research Questions
5. Developing a Measurement Strategy / Reliability and Validity /
Modalities of Measurement / Evaluating and Selecting Measures
6. The Internal Validity of Research / Confounds / Threats
to Internal Validity / Reactivity / Demand Characteristics /
Experimenter Expectancies
7. The Experimental Research Strategy / A Note on Statistics /
Manipulating the Independent Variable / Controlling Extraneous
Variance / Multiple-Group Designs / Factorial Designs
8. The Correlational (Passive) Research Strategy / The Nature of
Correlational Research / Simple and Partial Correlation Analysis
/ Multiple Regression Analysis (MRA) / Some Other Correlational
Techniques / Testing Mediational Hypotheses / Factor Analysis
9. The Single-Case Research Strategy / The Role of Single-Case
Research in Psychology / Validity Criteria in Single-Case Research
/ Case Study Research / Single-Case Experiments / Data Analysis
in Single-Case Research
10. Research in Natural Settings / The Problem of Control in
Natural Settings / Field Experiments / Natural Experiments and
Quasi-Experiments / Naturalistic Observation / Interviews /
Archival Data / Coding Open-Ended Data
11. Survey Research / Asking Questions / Obtaining Answers
/ Multi-Item Scales / Response Biases / Questionnaire Design /
Questionnaire Administration / Survey Data Archives
12. Data Collection / Research Participants / Research Procedures
/ Using the Internet to Collect Data
13. Interpreting Research Results / Describing Results / Interpreting
the Results / Fitting Results into the Big Picture
14. The External Validity of Research / The Concept of External
Validity / The Structural Component of External Validity / The
Functional and Conceptual Components of External Validity /
Assessing External Validity / Laboratory Research, Natural-Setting
Research, and External Validity
15. Evaluation Research / Goal Definition / Program Monitoring /
Impact Assessment / Efficiency Analysis / Information Utilization
/ Measuring Change
16. Integrative Literature Reviewing / Defining the Research
Question / Data Collection / Data Evaluation / Data Analysis /
Data Interpretation / A Sample Meta-Analysis
17. Writing Research Reports / The Research Report / Journal
Articles and Convention Presentations / Ethical Issues in
Publication
18. The Professional and Social Responsibilities of Scientists /
Malpractice in Research / Mistakes and Error in Research / Using
the Results of Research / Research and the Common Good
Statistics
– Readers
Terry F Pettijohn, Ohio State University—Marion
2007 (March 2006) / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340404-2 / MHID: 0-07-340404-7
047.mhtml
CONTENTS
Chapter 5. Learning
Chapter 9. Emotion
Chapter 14. Therapy
BEHAVIORAL STATISTICS IN ACTION,
3rd Edition
Mark Vernoy, Palomar College and Diana Kyle, Fullerton
College
2002 / Hardback / 436 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293732-9 / MHID: 0-07-293732-7
(Corrective Edition)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111361-8 / MHID: 0-07-111361-4 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/vernoy3
CONTENTS
1. An Introduction to Statistics / Features of the Book / Tips for
Doing Well in Statistics: How to Succeed in Statistics by Really
Trying / A Note About Notation and Rounding / Hypotheses
/ Variables / Scales of Measurement / Summary / Key Terms /
Problems / References
2. Frequency Distributions / Ranked Distributions / Frequency
Distributions / Grouped Frequency Distributions / Apparent Limits
and Real Limits: What You See Versus What is Meant / Midpoint:
The Center of the Class Interval / Visual Summary: Creating a
Group Frequency Distribution / Cumulative Frequency / Relative
Frequency and Cumulative Relative Frequency / Cumulative
Percent / On the Internet: Creating a Grouped Frequency
Distribution / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas / Problems
3. Graphs / Basics in Constructing a Graph / Frequency Histogram
/ Frequency Polygon / Relative Frequency Polygon / Cumulative
Frequency Polygon / Cumulative Relative Frequency Polygon /
Cumulative Percent Polygon / Stem and Leaf Diagrams / Changing
the Shape of a Graph / Summary / Key Terms / Problems
4. Measures of Central Tendency / The Mean / The Median / The
Mode / Mean, Median, or Mode: A Question of Skew / Summary
/ Key Terms / Formulas / Problems / Reference
5. Measures of Variability / The Range / Mean Deviation /
The Variance: The Mean of the Squared Deviations / Standard
Deviation: The Square Root of the Variance / Computational
Formulas / Calculating Variability from Grouped Frequency
Distributions / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas / Problems /
Reference
6. Scaled Scores and Standard Scores: How to Change Apples
into Oranges / Scales Scores / Adding or Subtracting a Constant:
No change in Variability / Multiplying or Dividing by a Constant:
A Concurrent Change in Mean and Standard Deviation / Standard
Scores (z Scores) / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas / Problems
7. The Normal Curve / Characteristics of the Normal Curve
/ Finding Proportions and Percentages / Finding Percentiles /
Summary / Key Terms / Formulas / Problems
8. Correlation / The Nature of Correlation / Types of Correlation:
How Are Variables Related? / Degree of Correlation: How
Strongly Are Variables Related? / The Correlation Coefficient
/ The Covariance / Computing the Correlation Coefficient /
Computational Formulas for the Covariance and Correlation
Coefficient / The Significance of the Correlation Coefficient /
Interpreting the Correlation Coefficient: What do the Numbers
Mean? / Using Table R / The Coefficient of Determination /
Summary / Key Terms / Formulas / Problems / References
9. Regression / Making Predictions via Linear Regression / The
Regression Line: Faster Predictions / The Standard Error of the
Estimate / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas / Problems
71
10. Probability Theory and Sampling / Probability Theory /
Sampling / The Standard Error of the Estimate / The Central
Limit Theorem / The z Test / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas
/ Problems
11. Experimental Design / Developing a Hypothesis / Identifying
Variables / Factors in Experimental Design / Important Aspects of
Experimental Design / Statistical Significance / Power / Summary
/ Key Terms / Problems / References
12. t Tests / z Tests (A Review) / t Tests / Single-Sample t Tests
/ t Tests between Two Independent Sample Means / t Tests
for Correlated Samples / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas /
Problems
13. One-Way Analysis of Variance / Analysis of Variance: One
Test is Better Than Many / Hypothesis Testing and Analysis of
Variance / Conducting an Analysis of Variance / The F Test /
Computational Formula for F / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas
/ Problems / Reference
14. Two-Way Analysis of Variance / Main Effects / Interaction
/ Computation of Sums of Squares for Two-Way Analysis of
Variance / Computation of Degrees of Freedom for Two-Way
Analysis of Variance / Computation of the Mean Squares for
Two-Way Analysis of Variance / Computation of the F Ratios for
Two-Way Analysis of Variance / Significance of the Main Effects /
Significance of the Interaction / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas
/ Problems / Reference
15. Chi-Square and Other Nonparametric Statistics / Chi-Square /
The Mann-Whitney U Test / The Wilcoxen T Test / The KruskalWallis Test / Summary / Key Terms / Formulas / Problems /
References
APPENDIX A: Tables / APPENDIX B: Solutions to Odd-Numbered
Problems
SPSS/SAS
Assignment 3 Presenting Data in Graphic Form
Assignment 4 Testing Research Hypotheses for Two Independent
Samples
Assignment 5 Testing Research Hypotheses About Two Related
Sampled
Assignment 6 Comparing Independent Samples with One-Way
ANOVA
Assignment 7 Comparing Related Samples with One-Way
ANOVA
Assignment 8 Measuring the Simple Relationship Between Two
Variables
Assignment 9 Describing the Linear Relationship Between Two
Variables
Assignment 10 Assessing the Association Between Two
Categorical Variables Appendix
Entering Data Using Programs Other Than SPSS
Tests and Measurements
NEW
PSCYHOLOGICAL TESTING AND ASSESSMENT
7th Edition
Ronald Jay Cohen, RJ Cohen Research
Mark Swerdlik, Illinois State University
2009 / 720 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312909-9 / MHID: 0-07-312909-7
READY, SET, GO! A STUDENT GUIDE TO SPSS 13.0
AND 14.0 FOR WINDOWS
2nd Edition
Thomas Pavkov and Kent Pierce of Purdue Univ-calumethammond
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312665-4 / MHID: 0-07-312665-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125297-3 / MHID: 0-07-125297-5
[IE without CD]
For only $5 net when packaged with another McGraw-Hill
text, this guide features concise instructions for accessing
and using SPSS for Windows. Ready, Set, Go! is more than
a reference book for versions 13.0 and 14.0; through ten
guided assignments, students learn about statistical analysis
of data while also learning the steps in the research process.
The students are guided through assignments such as using
frequency distributions, performing the t test, using the
one-way ANOVA procedure, computing a correlation, and
computing chi-square function.
CONTENTS
Preface
Assignment 1 Learning the Basics of SPSS
Assignment 2 Looking at Frequency Distributions and Descriptive
Statistics
72
PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTING AND ASSESSMENT: AN
INTRODUCTION TO TESTS AND MEASUREMENT
6th Edition
Ronald Jay Cohen, R.J. Cohen Research and Mark Swerdlik,
Illinois State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288767-9 / MHID: 0-07-288767-2
(Text only)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319904-7 / MHID: 0-07-319904-4
(with Exercise Workbook)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111964-1 / MHID: 0-07-111964-7
[IE with Exercise book]
Website: www.mhhe.com/cohentesting6
CONTENTS
Part I: AN OVERVIEW
1.Psychological Testing and Assessment
2. Historical, Cultural, and Legal/Ethical Considerations
Part II: THE SCIENCE OF PSYCHOLOGICAL MEASUREMENT
3. A Statistics Refresher
4. of Tests and Testing
5. Reliability
6. Validity
7. Test Development
Part III: THE ASSESSMENT OF INTELLIGENCE
8. Intelligence and Its Measurement
9. Tests of Intelligence
10. Preschool and Educational Assessment
Part IV: THE ASSESSMENT OF PERSONALITY
11. Personality Assessment: An Overview
12. Personality Assessment Methods
13. Clinical and Counseling Assessment
14. Neuropsychological Assessment
15. The Assessment of People with Disabilities
16. Assessment, Careers, and Business
Neuropsychology
PRINCIPLES OF HUMAN NEUROPSYCHOLOGY
G. Dennis Rains, Kutztown University
2002 / Hardback / 624 pages
ISBN-13: 978-1-55934-623-8 / MHID: 1-55934-623-X
(Out of Print)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113130-8 / MHID: 0-07-113130-2 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/rains
Cognitive Psychology
FUNDAMENTALS OF COGNITIVE PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
R. Reed Hunt, University of North Carolina - Greensboro
and Henry C. Ellis, University of New Mexico-Albuquerque
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-285895-2 / MHID: 0-07-285895-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121916-7 / MHID: 0-07-121916-1 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter 2: Perceptual Processes
Chapter 3: Attention
Chapter 4: Short-term Working Memory
Chapter 5: Long-term Memory
Chapter 6: Implicit Memory
Chapter 7: Forgetting and Distorted Memory
Chapter 8: Metacognition
Chapter 9: Concepts and Classification
Chapter 10: Comprehension and Knowledge
Chapter 11: Language
Chapter 12: Problem-solving and Decision Making
Chapter 13: Cognition and Emotion
CONTENTS
1. The Development of Neuropsychology / Early Attempts
at Understanding the Brain / The Beginnings of Modern
Neuropsychology: Broca / Further Discoveries: Wernicke /
Localization Versus Holism / The Psychometric Approach to
Neuropsychology / Recent Findings] / Summary / References /
Figure Captions / Figures
2. Neural Mechanisms at the Molecular and Cellular Levels / The
Adaptive Significance of the Nervous System / The Capacity for
Modulation: The Neuron and the Synapse / Neural Activity at
the Molecular and Cellular Levels / Neuronal Mechanisms of
Learning / Two Exceptions to General Rules: Receptor Potentials
and Electrical Transmission / Summary
3. Introduction to the Structure and Function of the Central
Nervous System / General Terminology / An Overview of the
Central Nervous System / The Forebrain / The Brain Stem / The
Cerebellum / The Spinal Cord / Summary / References / Figure
Citations / Figures and Tables
4. Methods in Neuropsychology / Anatomical Methods / Methods
Measuring Function / Lesion Methods / Commissurotomy / The
Sodium Amobarbital Test / Studies of People with Behavioral and
Cognitive Abnormalities / Studies of Normal People: Laterality
Studies / Summary / References / Figure and Table Captions /
Figures and Tables
5. The Visual System as a Model of Nervous System Functioning
/ The Classical Sequential-Hierarchical View of the Visual Brain
/ An Overview of Recent Advances in the Understanding of
Central Visual Processing / The Retina / Retinofugal Projections
/ Specialization Within Cortex Devoted to Vision / The
Microanatomy of the Visual Brain and the Concept of Modular
Organization / The Problem of Integration and the Construction
of a Representation of the Visual World / Summary / References /
6. Language / Characteristics of Language / The Development
of Language in Children: ‘Nature Versus Nurture’ / Language
Disorders: The Concept of Aphasia / The Disconnection Syndrome
Hypothesis Applied to Language Disorders / Major Components
of Language Functioning / Further Theoretical Considerations /
The Right Hemisphere and Language / Hemispheric Anatomical
Asymmetries / The Evolution of Human Language / Summary /
References / Figure Captions / Figures
7. Spatial Processing / General Considerations / Body Space
/ Egocentric Space / Allocentric Space / The Role of the
Hippocampus in Spatial Processing / Neglect of One Side of
Space / Spatial Thinking and Mental Imagery / The Role of the
Frontal Lobes in Spatial Processing / Summary / References /
8. Visual Recognition / A Case of Visual Agnosia / Disorders of
Visual Recognition / Problems with the Classical Model / Theories
of Visual Agnosia / Restoration of Sight in Adulthood After Early
Onset of Blindness / Summary / References / Figure Captions /
Figures
73
9. Voluntary Action / Voluntary Movement / The Components
of Voluntary Movement / Elementary Disorders of Movement /
An Overview of Higher-Order Control of Movement / The Motor
Cortex / The Premotor and Supplementary Motor Areas / The
Cerebellum / The Basal Ganglia / Apraxia and the Left Parietal
Cortex / Other Movement-Related Functions of Parietal Cortex /
The Prefrontal Cortex / Summary / References / Figure Captions
/ Figures
10. Memory Systems / An Overview of Normal Memory / Medial
Temproal-Lobe Amnesia and the Consolidation Hypothesis /
Memory Impairment After Unilateral Temporal-Lobe Lesions /
The Critical Structures Involved in Memory Loss After TempralLobe Lesions / Diencephalic Amnesia / Where in the Memory
Process is the Impairment? / Preserved Aspects of Memory in
Amnesia / Episodic Memory and Semantic Memory / Short-Term/
Working Memory Impairment / Conceptualization of Multiple
Memory Systems / The Neural Substrate of Long-Term Memory
/ Further Considerations of the Role of the Frontal Lobes in
Memory / Summary / Footnotes / References / Figure Captions /
Tables / Figures
11. Emotion / Theories of the Relationship Between Brain and
Emotion / The Neural Basis of Learned Fear as a Model System /
Emotional Memory / The Cortex and Emotion / The Interaction of
Cortex and Amygdala in the Higher-Order Mediation of Emotion
/ Emotion and Conscious Experience / Summary / References /
12. The Prefrontal Cortex and the Higher-Order Regulation of
Behavior / Toward a Working Model of Prefrontal Cortex Function
/ Impairment in Function After Prefrontal Lesions in Humans /
Theories of Prefrontal Function / Summary / References / Figure
Captions / Figures
13. Psychopathology / What Is Psychopathology? / The
Schizophrenic Disorders / Mood Disorders / Anxiety Disorders
/ Sociopathy / Dementing Diseases / Unsolved Problems /
Summary / References / Figure Captions / Figures
14. Developmental Neuropsychology / Development of the
Brain / Brain Development and the Development of HigherOrder Function / The Cortex and Emotion / Known Causes of
Developmental Abnormality / Developmental Disorders of
Unknown Cause / Autism / Summary / References / Figure
Captions / Figures
15. Recovery of Function / The Effects of Brain Damage / Functional
Recovery After Brain Damage / Neural Mechanisms of Recovery
of Function / Therapeutic Approaches to the Consequences of
Brain Lesions / Summary / References / Tables / Figure Captions
/ Figures
Epilogue / Skepticism about the Possibility of a Unified Theory
of Mind-Brain / The Possibility of Intertheoretic Reduction and a
Unified Theory of Mind-Brain / Where Are We Now and Where
Are We Going? / References
74
Perception
PERCEPTION
5th Edition
Randolph Blake, Vanderbilt University — Nashville and
Robert Sekuler, Brandeis University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-288760-0 / MHID: 0-07-288760-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111272-7 / MHID: 0-07-111272-3 [IE]
Perception, 5e, by Randolph Blake and Robert Sekuler, helps
students appreciate the complexity of perception, while
giving them a fresh perspective on their own seeing, hearing,
touching, smelling, and tasting. This thoroughly revised Fifth
Edition includes updated research on cognitive influences on
perception, two additional Chapters, and a new, contemporary
look.
CONTENTS
1: Introduction to Perception
2: The Human Eye
3: The Eye and Seeing
4: Central Visual Pathways
5: Spatial Vision and Pattern Perception
6: Object Perception: Recognizing the Things We See
7: Color Perception
8: Seeing a Three-Dimensional World
9: Action and the Perception of Events
10: The Ear and Auditory System
11: Hearing and Listening
12: Speech and Music Perception
13: Touch
14: Chemical Senses I: Smell
15: Chemical Senses II: Taste
Applied Psychology ~ Contents
Industrial Psychology – Organizational Behavior .................... 76
Sports Psychology................................................................... 76
75
Applied Psychology
Industrial Psychology –
Organizational Behavior
Sports Psychology
HUMAN FACTORS IN ENGINEERING AND DESIGN
7th Edition
Mark S. Sanders, California State University - Northridge and
Ernest J. McCormick
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-054901-2 / MHID: 0-07-054901-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-112826-1 / MHID: 0-07-112826-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
1 Human Factors and Systems / 2 Human Factors Research
Methodologies /
Part II: INFORMATION INPUT
3 Information Input and Processing / 4 Text, Graphics, Symbols,
and Codes / 5 Visual Displays of Dynamic Information / 6 Auditory,
Tactual, and Olfactory Displays / 7 Speech Communications /
Part III: HUMAN OUTPUT AND CONTROL
8 Physical Work and Manual Materials Handling / 9 Motor Skills
/ 10 Human Control of Systems / 11 Controls and Data Entry
Devices / 12 Hand Tools and Devices /
Part IV: WORKPLACE DESIGN
13 Applied Anthropometry, Work Space Design, and Seating
/ 14 Arrangement of Components within a Physical Space / 15
Interpersonal Aspects of Work Place Design /
Part V: ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
16 Illumination / 17 Climate / 18 Noise / 19 Motion /
Part VI: HUMAN FACTORS APPLICATIONS
20 Human Error, Accidents, and Safety / 21 Human Factors and
the Automobile / 22 Human Factors in Systems Design /
Appendixes / A: List of Abbreviations / B: Control Devices / C:
NIOSH Recommended Action Limit Formula for Lifting Tasks
SPORT PSYCHOLOGY
6th Edition
Richard H. Cox, University of Missouri-Columbia
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297295-5 / MHID: 0-07-297295-5
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110642-9 / MHID: 0-07-110642-1 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cox6e
This new edition provides students with a solid foundation
in the concepts of sport and exercise psychology and their
application in exercise and sport settings. New texts now come
packaged with PowerWeb: Health & Human Performance!
CONTENTS
Part 1: INTRODUCTION
1 Introduction to Sport Psychology
Part 2: MOTIVATION OF THE ATHLETE
2 Motivation and Self-confidence in Sport
3 Goal Perpective in Sport
4 Attribution in Sport
5 Developing Intrinsic Motivation
6 Goal Setting in Sport
7 Youth Sports
Part 3: AROUSAL, ATTENTION AND PERSONALITY OF THE
ATHLETE
8 Neurophysiology of Arousal
9 Attention and Concentration in Sport
10 Personality of the Athlete
Part 4: SITUATIONAL FACTORS RELATED TO ANXIETY AND
MOOD
11 Mood State and Athletic Performance
12 Anxiety, Arousal and Stress Relationships
13 Alternatives to Inverted-U Theory
Part 5: COGNITIVE AND BEHAVIORAL INTERVENTIONS
14 Coping Strategies in Sport
15 Relaxation Strategies in Sport
16 Arousal Energizing Strategies in Sport
17 Imagery and Sport Performance
18 Role of Hypnosis in Sport
19 Psychological Skills Training
Part 6: SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY OF SPORT AND EXERCISE
20 Agression and Violence in Sport
21 Audience and Crowd Effects in Sport
22 Team Cohesion in Sport
23 Leadership in Sport
Part 7: PSYCHOBIOLOGY OF SPORT AND EXERCISE
24 Exercise Psychology
25 Overtraining and Burnout
26 Psychology of Athletic Injuries
27 Drug Abuse in Sport and Exercise
76
Applied Psychology
APPLIED SPORT PSYCHOLOGY: PERSONAL
GROWTH TO PEAK PERFORMANCE
5th Edition
24 Burnout in Sport: Causes and Cures
25 Injury Risk and Rehabilitation: Psychological Considerations
26 Career Transition Among Athletes: Is there Life After Sports?
27 Exercise Psychology
Jean M. Williams, University of Arizona
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284383-5 / MHID: 0-07-284383-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125523-3 / MHID: 0-07-125523-0 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/williams5e
This is a comprehensive and practical guide to psychological
concepts and theories as well as to strategies and techniques
designed to help future coaches and sport psychologists
cultivate peak performance and personal growth through
recent advances in sport psychology. The text’s five-part
organization focuses on motivation and leadership, social
interactions, mental training, program implementation, and
issues that go beyond performance enhancement. Contributing
authors are experts in their topic, and each has been written
specifically for this collection.
CONTENTS
1 Sport Psychology: Past, Present,
Part I: LEARNING, MOTIVATION, AND EFFECTIVE
LEADERSHIP
2 Motor Skill Learning for Effective Coaching and Performance
3 Positive Reinforcement, Performance Feedback, and
Performance Enhancement of Control
4 Toward Optimal Motivation in Sport: Fostering Athletes
Competence and Sense of
5 The Self-Fulfilling Prophecy Theory: When Coaches’
Expectations Become Reality
6 Leadership Effectiveness
7 Styles of Decision Making in Coaching
Part II: SOCIAL INTERACTIONS
8 The Sport Team as an Effective Group
9 Communicating Effectively
10 Enhancing Coach-Parent Relationships in Youth Sports:
Increasing Harmony and Minimizing Hassle
Part III: MENTAL TRAINING FOR PERFORMANCE
ENHANCEMENT
11 Psychological Characteristics of Peak Performance
12 Increasing Awareness for Sport Performance
13 Goal Setting for Peak Performance
14 Arousal-Performance Relationships
15 Relaxation and Energizing Techniques for Regulation of
Arousal
16 Seeing is Believing: Understanding and Using Imagery in
Sport
17 Cognitive Techniques for Building Confidence and Enhancing
Performance
18 Concentration and Attention Control Training
19 Strategies for Training
Part IV: IMPLEMENTING TRAINING PROGRAMS
20 Integrating and Implementing a Psychological Skills Training
Program
21 Development and Implementation of Coach Training
Programs: Cognitive-Behavioral Principles and Techniques
Part V: PSYCHOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS: REFERRAL,
DRUG ABUSE, BURNOUT, INJURY, TERMINATION FROM
ATHLETICS, AND EXERCISE
22 When to Refer Athletes for Counseling or Psychotherapy
23 Drug Abuse in Sport: Causes and Cures
77
78
Psychology History & Systems
~ Contents
History and Systems ............................................................... 80
79
Psychology History and Systems
History and Systems
HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
David Hothersall, Ohio State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-284965-3 / MHID: 0-07-284965-7
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121474-2 / MHID: 0-07-121474-7 [IE]
Website: http://highered.mcgraw-hill.com/sites/00728496
57/
CONTENTS
Introduction
Chapter 1 Psychology and the Ancients
Chapter 2 Philosophical and Scientific Antecedents of
Psychology
Chapter 3 Early Studies of the Central Nervous System
Chapter 4 Wilhelm Wundt and the Founding of Psychology
Chapter 5 Edward Titchener and Hugo Munsterberg
Chapter 6 German Psychologists of the Nineteenth and Early
Twentieth Centuries
Chapter 7 Gestalt Psychology in Germany and the United States
Chapter 8 The History of Clinical Psychology and the Development
of Psychoanalysis
Chapter 9 Darwin, Galton, Cattell, James, and Hall
Chapter 10 Functionalism at the University of Chicago and
Columbia University
Chapter 11 Historical Uses and Abuses of Intelligence Testing
Chapter 12 The Research of Ivan Pavlov and the Behaviorism of
John B. Watson
Epilogue
80
A HISTORY OF PSYCHOLOGY: ORIGINAL
SOURCES AND CONTEMPORARY RESEARCH
2nd Edition
Ludy Benjamin, Jr., Texas A & M University College Station
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-005599-5 / MHID: 0-07-005599-8
(Out-of-print)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-122229-7 / MHID: 0-07-122229-4 [IE]
CONTENTS
Preface
1: The Psychology of History and the History of Psychology: A
Historiographical Introduction
2: Philosophical Roots of Psychology: Mechanism and
Empiricism
3: The Physiological Roots of Psychology
4: The French Clinical Tradition
5: The Founding of Scientific Psychology: Gustav Fechner and
Wilhelm Wundt
6: E. B. Titchener and Struturalism
7: Darwinian Influences: Adaptation and Individual Differences
8: American Antecedents to Functionalism
9: Functionalism
10: Animal Experimental Psychology
11: Behaviorism
12: Neobehaviorism
13: Psychoanalysic
14: Gestalt Psychology
15: The Beginnings of American Applied Psychology
16: American Psychology’s Social Agenda: The Issue of Race
Index
Human Sexuality ~ Contents
Human Sexuality .................................................................... 82
2008 New Title
■
KELLY
Sexuality Today, 9e .......................................................... 82
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338266-1 / MHID: 0-07-338266-3
■
TAVERNER
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 10e .... 83
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339719-1 / MHID: 0-07-339719-9
Human Sexuality – Readers .................................................... 83
81
Human Sexuality
Human Sexuality
NEW
SEXUALITY TODAY
9th Edition
Gary Kelly, Clarkson University
2008 / 672 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338266-1 / MHID: 0-07-338266-3
The ninth edition of this trusted text carefully balances the
psychological, biological/physiological, and social elements
of human sexuality, integrating the latest research findings
and social trends. The author’s balanced approach is also
evident in his ability to present various sides of controversial
topics in a neutral voice. This new edition features updated
case studies, more emphasis on cross-cultural coverage and
examples, and the new companion SexSource Online.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Over 500 new references have been added, offering the
most up-to-date facts and research available from 2002 to
2004--including new tables on the latest statistics on HIV, the
newest research findings on sexual arousal, and a comprehensive
overview of STDs.
• The text includes many new boxes of relevant material from
popular publications--including cross-cultural boxes on group
dating activities in Japan, the new interest in Tantric sex, and firstperson accounts of being HIV positive.
• SexSource Online, free with each new copy of the textbook,
gives students access to the best of multimedia materials for
sexuality courses. It includes short video clips that illustrate
key concepts in the textbook and issues important to today’s
students, as well as practice quizzes for each chapter. Through
McGraw-Hill’s exclusive licensing agreement with The Discovery
Channel™, several of the video clips are from Discovery programs
offered for the first time on a student CD.
CONTENTS
Each chapter ends with a summary and Focus on Health
questions.
Part 1 SOCIAL AND BIOLOGICAL FOUNDATIONS OF
HUMAN SEXUALITY
Chapter 1 Cultural, Historical, and Research
Chapter 2 Female Sexual Anatomy and Physiology
Chapter 3 Male Sexual Anatomy and Physiology
Chapter 4 Human Sexual Response
Chapter 5 Developmental and Social Perspectives on Gender
Part 2 UNDERSTANDING SEXUALITY IN OURSELVES AND
OUR RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter 6 Sexuality through the Life Cycle
Chapter 7 Adult Sexuality and Relationships
Chapter 8 Sexual Individuality and Sexual Values
Chapter 9 Sexuality, Communication, and Relationships
Part 3 HUMAN REPRODUCTION, CONTRACEPTION, AND
ABORTION: SEXUALITY CONFRONTS SOCIAL POLICY
Chapter 10 Reproduction, Reproductive Technology, and Birthing
Chapter 11 Decision Making about Pregnancy and Parenthood
82
Part 4 SEXUAL BEHAVIOR AND CONTEMPORARY SOCIETY
Chapter 12 Solitary Sex and Shared Sex
Chapter 13 Same-Gender Orientation and Behavior
Chapter 14 The Spectrum of Human Sexual Behavior
Chapter 15 Sex, Art, the Media, and the Law
Part 5 DEALING WITH SEXUAL PROBLEMS
Chapter 16 Sexual Consent, Coercion, Rape, and Abuse
Chapter 17 Sexually Transmitted Diseases, HIV/AIDS, and Sexual
Decisions
Chapter 18 Sexual Dysfunctions and Their Treatment
4th Edition
Rowland Miller, Sam Houston State University
Daniel Perlman
Sharon Stephens Brehm
2007 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-293801-2 / MHID: 0-07-293801-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111255-0 / MHID: 0-07-111255-3 [IE]
The fourth edition of this trusted text preserves the personal
appeal of the subject matter and vigorous standards of
scholarship that made the earlier editions so successful. It
presents the key findings on intimate relationships, the major
theoretical perspectives, and some of the current controversies
in the field. The authors illustrate the relevance of close
relationship science to readers’ everyday lives, encouraging
thought and analysis. The 4th edition contains more than 700
new references, including new coverage of online dating,
fMRI studies of love, and mate poaching. More illustrations,
tables and figures add up to a fresher, thoroughly updated,
new-and-improved text.
CONTENTS
Part 1 INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF INTIMATE
RELATIONSHIPS
1 The Building Blocks of Relationships
2 Research Methods
Part 2 GETTING TOGETHER AND BASIC PROCESSES IN
3 Attraction
4 Social Cognition
5 Communication
6 Interdependency
Part 3 FRIENDSHIP AND INTIMACY
7 Friendships
8 Love
9 Sexuality
Part 4 RELATIONSHIP ISSUES
10 Stresses and Strains
11 Power
12 Conflict and Violence
Part 5 LOSING AND ENHANCING RELATIONSHIPS
13 The Dissolution and Loss of Relationships
14 Loneliness
15 Maintaining and Repairing Relationships
Human Sexuality
HUMAN SEXUALITY: DIVERSITY IN
CONTEMPORARY AMERICA WITH SEXSOURCE CDROM AND POWERWEB
5th Edition
Bryan Strong, University of California—Santa Cruz, Christine
DeVault, Cabrillo College, Barbara Sayad, University of
California, Monterey Bay and William Yarber, Indiana
University—Bloomington
2005 / Softcover with CDROM / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297490-4 / MHID: 0-07-297490-7
(No selling rights)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111425-7 / MHID: 0-07-111425-4
[IE With CD and Powerweb]
Browse:
http://www.mhhe.com/strong5
CONTENTS
1. Perspectives on Human Sexuality
2. Studying Human Sexuality
3. Female Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response
4. Male Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response
5. Gender and Gender Roles
6. Sexuality Over the Life Span
7. Love, Intimacy, and Sexuality
8. Communicating about Sex
9. Sexual Expression
10. Variations in Sexual Behavior
11. Contraception and Birth Control
12. Conception, Pregnancy, and Childbirth
13. The Sexual Body in Health and Illness
14. Sexual Difficulties, Dissatisfaction, Enhancement and
Therapy
15. Sexually Transmitted Infections
16. HIV and AIDS
17. Sexual Coercion: Harassment, Aggression, and Abuse
18. Sexually Explicit Materials, Prostitution, and Sex Laws
DIMENSIONS OF HUMAN SEXUALITY
6th Edition
Curtis O. Byer, Mt. San Antonio College, Louis W. Shainberg,
Mt. San Antonio College, Grace Galliano, Kennesaw State
University and Sharon P. Shriver, Pennsylvania State University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-241278-9 / MHID: 0-07-241278-X
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-121276-2 / MHID: 0-07-121276-0 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/byer6
CONTENTS
Part 1: SEXUAL DIMENSIONS
1: Thinking About Human Sexuality
2: Communication and Sexuality
3: Attraction, Love, Partnerships
Part 2: PHYSICAL SEXUALITY
4: Female Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health
5: Male Anatomy, Physiology and Sexual Health
6: Sexually Transmitted Infections
7: HIV and AIDS
Part 3: SEXUAL RESPONSE AND PLEASURING
8: Sexual Response, Dyfunction and Therapy
9: Sexual Pleasuring
10: Sexuality in Disability and Illness
Part 4: DEVELOPMENTAL SEXUALITY
11: Biological Sexual Development
12: Gender Identity and Gender Roles
13: Childhood and Adolescent Sexuality
14: Adult Sexuality
Part 5: REPRODUCTIVE SEXUALITY
15: Fertility Management
16: Conception, Pregnancy, and Children
Part 6: SOCIAL ISSUES IN SEXUALITY
17: 7 Variations in Sexual Behavior
18: Commercial and Coercive Sex
Human Sexuality – Readers
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING
VIEWS IN HUMAN SEXUALITY
10th Edition
William J Taverner, Fairleigh
Dickinson University
2008 / 368 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339719-1 / MHID: 0-07-339719-9
199.mhtml
This Tenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Nature of Sex
Issue 2. Is Oral Sex Really Sex?
Issue 3. Is Masters and Johnson’s Model an Accurate Description
of Sexual Response?
Issue 4. Is the G Spot a Myth?
Issue5. Is the Testosterone Patch the Right Cure for Low Libido
in Women?
83
Human Sexuality
UNIT 2. Sex and Schools
Issue 6. Does the Availability of “Sexual Health Services” Make
Some College Campuses Healthier than Others?
Issue 7. Should Sex Ed Teach About Abstinence?
Issue 8. Should Children Have an HPV Vaccination Before they
Enroll in School?
a Gender Bias?
UNIT 3. Reproduction Technology
Issue 10. Should Parents be Allowed to Select the Sex of Their
Baby?
Issue 11. Should Emergency Contraception be Available Over the
Counter?
Issue 12. Should Federal Funding of Stem Cell be Restricted?
UNIT 4. Sex and Society
Issue 13. Should Same Sex-Marriage Be Legal?
Issue 14. Should Society Support Cohabitation Before Marriage?
Issue 15. Is Pedophilia Always Harmful?
Issue 16. Should Female Circumcision be Banned?
Issue 17. Shold the FCC Restrict Broadcast “Indecency”?
Issue 18. Should Sexual Content on the Internet be Restricted?
ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN SEXUALITY
30th Edition
Susan Bunting, Lincoln College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351618-9 / MHID: 0-07-351618-X
18X.mhtml
This THIRTIETH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN
SEXUALITY provides convenient, inexpensive access to
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Sexuality and Society
Part A. Historical and Cross-Cultural Perspectives
1. Vox Populi: Sex, Lies, and Blood Sport
2. Women’s Ideal Bodies Then and Now
3. Sex Around the World
4. The Beauty Pageant Prevails
5. How AIDS Changed America
6. Remembering Bayard Rustin
Part B. Changing Society/Changing Sexuality
7. The Magdalene Mystique: Why Her Archetype Matters
8. The Manliness of Men
10. The Gender Quotient Test
UNIT 2. Sexual Biology, Behavior, and Orientation
Part A. The Body and Its Responses
11. The New Sex Scorecard
12. Sudden Infertility
Part B. Hygiene and Sexual Health Care
13. Battling a Black Epidemic
14. Positive Thinking
15. Prison Outbreak: An Epidemic of Hepatitis C
16. When Sex Hurts
84
Part C. Human Sexualities and Orientations
17. Everyone’s Queer
18. Why Are We Gay?
19. The Battle over Gay Teens
20. The End of Gay Culture
UNIT 3. Interpersonal Relationships
Part A. Establishing Sexual Relationships
21. Great Expectations
22. In Search of Erotic Intelligence
23. 24 Things Love and Sex Experts Are Dying to Tell You
24. How to Tell Your Potential Love About Your Chronic STD
Part B. Responsible Quality Sexual Relationships
25. The Viagra Dialogues
26. Save Your Relationship
27. Be a Better Couple
28. How to Talk About Sex
UNIT 4. Reproduction
Part A. Fertility, Contraception, and Abortion
29. Access Denied
30. You Can’t Do That on Television
31. Sex, Politics, and Morality at the FDA: Reflections on the Plan
B Decision
32. A Late Decision, a Lasting Anguish
33. Condoms, Contraceptives and Nonoxynol-9: Complex Issues
Obscured by Ideology
Part B. Pregnancy, Childbirth, and Parenthood
34. Sex Without Sex? Keeping Passion Alive
35. A Tale of Two Mothers
36. The Birds and the Bees and Curious Kids
UNIT 5. Sexuality Through the Life Cycle
Part A. Youth and Their Sexuality
39. Your Turn: Give Students the Knowledge to Make Wise
Choices About Sex
Part B. Sexuality and the Adult Years
40. Sex and Love: The New World
41. Staying Up Late with Sue
UNIT 6. Old/New Sexual Concerns
Part A. Sexual Abuse and Violence
42. The Sex Offender Next Door
43. Silent No More
44. Where Girls Marry Rapists for Honor
45. A Cruel Edge
Part B. Sexual Relationship Crises
46. Sexual Heroin
47. The Secret Lives of Wives
48. My Cheatin’ Heart
49. The New “Mixed” Marriage
Part C. Focus: Valuing Sexuality
50. Good Sex: Why We Need More of It and a Lot Less of the
Bad Stuff
51. Pillow Talk
52. The Merry-Go-Round of Desire
2008–2009 NEW Sociology Titles
Sociology ~ Contents
Comparative Societies .......................................................... 139
2008 New Title
■
BADEY
Annual Editions: Homeland Security, 2e .......................... 98
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339730-6 / MHID: 0-07-339730-X
■
CHERLIN
Public and Private Families: A Reader, 5e .............. 101, 105
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352809-0 / MHID: 0-07-352809-9
■
CHERLIN
Public and Private Families: An Introduction, 5e ........... 105
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352808-3 / MHID: 0-07-352808-0
■
COX
Annual Editions: Aging 07/08, 20e ................................. 110
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339729-0 / MHID: 0-07-339729-6
■
D’ANGELO
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Race and Ethnicity,
6e ................................................................................... 113
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351506-9 / MHID: 0-07-351506-X
■
DANIEL
Annual Editions: Health 08/09, 29e ............................... 134
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339759-7 / MHID: 0-07-339759-8
■
DANIEL
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Health and Society,
8e ................................................................................... 135
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339723-8 / MHID: 0-07-339723-7
■
DEGENOVA
Intimate Relationships, Marriages and Families, 7e ....... 101
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352810-6 / MHID: 0-07-352810-2
■
DE PALMA
Annual Editions: Computers in Society 08/09, 14e ........ 138
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352848-9 / MHID: 0-07-352848-X
■
DICKINSON
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, and Bereavement 08/09
10e ................................................................................. 112
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339771-9 / MHID: 0-07-339771-7
■
DUFFY
Annual Editions: Social Psychology, 7e .......................... 121
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339739-9 / MHID: 0-07-339739-3
■
EASTON
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Science, Technology,
and Society, 8e .............................................................. 138
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351512-0 / MHID: 0-07-351512-4
■
FARGANIS
Readings In Social Theory, 5e ........................................ 116
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352813-7 / MHID: 0-07-352813-7
■
FERGUSAN
Mapping the Social Landscape: Readings in Sociology,
5e ..................................................................................... 88
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352807-6 / MHID: 0-07-352807-2
■
FINSTERBUSCH
Annual Editions: Social Problems 07/08, 35e ................... 99
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339734-4 / MHID: 0-07-339734-2
■
FINSTERBUSCH
Annual Editions: Sociology 07/08, 36e ............................. 93
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339733-7 / MHID: 0-07-339733-4
■
FINSTERBUSCH
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues,
Expanded, 14e ......................................................... 94, 100
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339716-0 / MHID: 0-07-339716-4
Criminology ......................................................................... 129
Criminology – Readers ......................................................... 130
Drugs & Society.................................................................... 125
Drugs & Society – Readers ................................................... 127
Gerontology / Sociology of Aging – Readers ......................... 110
Introductory Sociology ........................................................... 88
Introductory Sociology – Readers ........................................... 93
Juvenile Delinquency ........................................................... 125
Marriage & The Family ......................................................... 101
Marriage & The Family – Readers ......................................... 103
Medical Sociology – Readers ................................................ 109
Political Sociology ................................................................ 115
Race and Ethnicity – Readers ................................................ 113
Race, Class. Gender, and Sexuality ....................................... 108
Research Methods ................................................................ 123
Social Inequality / Social Stratification .................................. 115
Social Problems ...................................................................... 95
Social Problems – Readers ...................................................... 97
Social Psychology ................................................................. 120
Social Psychology – Readers................................................. 121
Social Work / Welfare .......................................................... 119
Sociological Theory .............................................................. 116
Sociology of Complex Organization ..................................... 140
Sociology of Death ............................................................... 111
Sociology of Death – Readers ............................................... 112
Sociology of Education – Readers ......................................... 132
Sociology of Family .............................................................. 105
Sociology of Family – Readers .............................................. 107
Sociology of Gender ............................................................. 119
Sociology of Health – Readers .............................................. 134
Sociology of Law – Readers .................................................. 131
Sociology of Sexuality .......................................................... 136
Sociology of Sexuality – Readers .......................................... 136
Sociology of Sport ................................................................ 132
Special Topics ...................................................................... 140
Special Topics – Readers ...................................................... 140
SPSS / SAS ............................................................................ 124
Statistics ............................................................................... 124
Technology & Society ........................................................... 138
Urban Sociology ................................................................... 112
85
■
GILBERT
Annual Editions: The Family 08/09, 34e ................. 103, 107
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339746-7 / MHID: 0-07-339746-6
■
RITZER
Modern Sociological Theory, 7e .................................... 117
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340410-3 / MHID: 0-07-340410-1
■
GOLDBERG
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Drugs and Society, 8e .. 127
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351511-3 / MHID: 0-07-351511-6
■
RITZER
Sociological Theory, 7e .................................................. 118
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352818-2 / MHID: 0-07-352818-8
■
GOODE
Drugs in American Society, 7e ....................................... 125
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340149-2 / MHID: 0-07-340149-8
■
SCHAEFER
Sociology, 11e ................................................................. 91
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340414-1 / MHID: 0-07-340414-4
■
GRIFFITHS
Annual Editions: Developing World 08/09, 18e ............. 115
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339756-6 / MHID: 0-07-339756-3
■
SCHAEFER
Sociology: A Brief Introduction, 7e .................................. 90
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352805-2 / MHID: 0-07-352805-6
■
HICKEY
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Crime and Criminology,
8e ................................................................................... 130
■
SCHAEFER
Sociology Matters, 3e ...................................................... 92
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352811-3 / MHID: 0-07-352811-0
■
SCHROEDER
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Family and
Personal Relationships, 7e ..................................... 104, 108
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339714-6 / MHID: 0-07-339714-8
■
SCHWALBE
The Sociologically Examined Life: Pieces of the
Conversation, 4e .............................................................. 92
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338011-7 / MHID: 0-07-338011-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339721-4 / MHID: 0-07-339721-0
■
HOWARD
Weapons of Mass Destruction and Terrorism .......... 95, 140
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337970-8 / MHID: 0-07-337970-0
■
HUGHES
Sociology: The Core, 8e ................................................... 88
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352812-0 / MHID: 0-07-352812-9
■
KATSH
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Legal Issues, 13e ......... 131
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351509-0 / MHID: 0-07-351509-4
■
KROMKOWSKI
Annual Editions: Race and Ethnic Relations, 16e ........... 114
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339745-0 / MHID: 0-07-339745-8
SCHULTZ
Classic Edition Sources: Education, 4e ........................... 134
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337974-6 / MHID: 0-07-337974-3
■
KSIR
Drugs, Society, and Human Behavior, 12e .................... 126
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352961-5 / MHID: 0-07-352961-3
SIEGEL
Annual Editions: Urban Society, 13e .............................. 112
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339743-6 / MHID: 0-07-339743-1
■
LAUER
Social Problems and the Quality of Life, 11e ................... 96
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338012-4 / MHID: 0-07-338012-1
TAVERNER
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Human Sexuality, 10e .. 136
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339719-1 / MHID: 0-07-339719-9
■
WILSON
22e ................................................................................. 128
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339742-9 / MHID: 0-07-339742-3
■
■
■
■
LEVINE
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Bioethical Issues,12e .. 109
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339718-4 / MHID: 0-07-339718-0
■
MCINTYRE
The Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts in Sociology, 4e .... 89
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340415-8 / MHID: 0-07-340415-2
■
MCINTYRE
The Practical Skeptic: Readings in Sociology, 4e ............. 89
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338003-2 / MHID: 0-07-338003-2
■
MYERS
Social Psychology, 9e..................................................... 120
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353189-2 / MHID: 0-07-353189-8
■
NOLL
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Educational Issues,
14e ................................................................................. 133
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339717-7 / MHID: 0-07-339717-2
■
OLSON
Marriage and Families: Intimacy, Diversity and
Strengths, 6e .......................................................... 102, 106
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338004-9 / MHID: 0-07-338004-0
■
RITCHEY
The Statistical Imagination, 2e ....................................... 124
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294304-7 / MHID: 0-07-294304-1
■
RITZER
Classical Sociological Theory, 5e ................................... 117
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352817-5 / MHID: 0-07-352817-X
86
2009 New Title
■
BADEY
Annual Editions: Violence and Terrorism 08/09, 11e ....... 97
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339776-4 / MHID: 0-07-339776-8
■
COX
Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21e ................................. 110
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339760-3 / MHID: 0-07-339760-1
■
DESPELDER
The Last Dance: Encountering Death and Dying, 8e ...... 111
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340546-9 / MHID: 0-07-340546-9
■
DISCH
Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural Anthology,
5e ........................................................................... 108, 119
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338006-3 / MHID: 0-07-338006-7
■
FINSTERBUSCH
Annual Editions: Social Problems 08/09, 36e ................... 97
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339768-9 / MHID: 0-07-339768-7
■
FINSTERBUSCH
Annual Editions: Sociology 08/09, 37e ............................. 93
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339767-2 / MHID: 0-07-339767-9
■
FINSTERBUSCH
Taking Sides: Clashing Views on Social Issues,
15e ............................................................................. 93, 98
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351523-6 / MHID: 0-07-351523-X
■
HOWARD
Terrorism and Counterterrorism Understanding
the New Security Environment, Readings and
Interpretations, 3e ................................................... 95, 140
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337979-1 / MHID: 0-07-337979-4
■
KERBO
Social Stratification and Inequality, 7e .......................... 115
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338007-0 / MHID: 0-07-338007-5
■
NIER
Taking Sides: Clashing Views in Social Psychology,
3e ................................................................................... 121
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351531-1 / MHID: 0-07-351531-0
■
ORE
The Social Construction of Difference and Inequality:
Race, Class, Gender and Sexuality, 4e ................... 108, 116
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338008-7 / MHID: 0-07-338008-3
■
REGOLI
Delinquency in Society, 7e ............................................ 125
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340154-6 / MHID: 0-07-340154-4
■
ROSENBLUM
The Meaning of Difference: American Constructions
of Race, Sex and Gender, Social Class, and Sexual
Orientation, 5e ...................................................... 109, 116
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338005-6 / MHID: 0-07-338005-9
■
SCHULTZ
Annual Editions: Education 08/09, 35e .......................... 132
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339748-1 / MHID: 0-07-339748-2
87
Sociology
Introductory Sociology
NEW
The Economy and Work
Religion
Health and Medicine
Education
The Family
VIII. SOCIAL CHANGE
MAPPING THE SOCIAL
LANDSCAPE: READINGS IN
SOCIOLOGY
5th Edition
Susan Fergusan, Grinnell College
2008 / 732 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352807-6 / MHID: 0-07-352807-2
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ferguson5
Drawing from a wide selection of classic and contemporary
works, the 60 selections in this best-selling reader represent a
plurality of voices and views within sociology.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• NEW classics added to this fifth edition include Andrew J.
Cherlin's "The Deinstitutionalization of American Marriage," and
Eduardo Bonilla-Silva's "'New Racism', Color-Blind Racism, and
the Future of Whiteness in America."
• More than twenty NEW selections of cutting-edge contemporary
sociological research have been added to illustrate analyses of
timely social issues and the intersections between race, social
class, and gender.
• These new selections examine street vendors in New York
City, the culture of fear, the socialization of exotic dancers, social
interaction in toy stores, the transmission of wealth, ambiguous
gender identity, globalization and business, faith in American
workplaces, male-dominated athletics and school culture,
transracial adoption, the increase in social isolation, social class
and parenting styles, the U.S. health care system, media violence
and children, and the 1995 Chicago heat wave. These selections
include an essay by Joel Best on the sociology of gloom and
an essay by Jonathan Kozol on racial segregation in American
schools.
CONTENTS
I. THE SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVE
Social Research
II. CULTURE
NEW
SOCIOLOGY: THE CORE
8th Edition
Michael Hughes, Va Poly Institute &
State University
Carolyn J Kroehler
2008 / 560 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352812-0 / MHID: 0-07-352812-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110176-9 / MHID: 0-07-110176-4 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/hughes8
Highly respected for its quality scholarship and its focused,
straightforward approach, Sociology: The Core covers the core
sociological concepts with a brief, accessible presentation
and at a very affordable price. As in previous editions, the
functionalist, conflict, and interactionist perspectives are
applied throughout the book, allowing students to develop
a solid understanding of the major sociological perspectives
and their applications to the topics covered. Completely
updated, Sociology: The Core makes sociology come alive
as a vital and exciting field, relates principles to real-world
circumstances, and attunes students to the dynamic processes
of our rapidly changing contemporary society.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The new edition incorporates new examples relevant to
students, including: Hurricane Katrina, the tsunami, the
Pakistani earthquake, stem cell research fraud, global warming,
contemporary movies, and the Bin Laden Itch.
• The global gender picture is updated with new data on labor
force participation, sexual harassment, wage parity, occupations,
and political leadership. The gender chapter presents a new
section on gender differences based on Janet Shibley Hyde’s
meta-analysis of differences.
V. DEVIANCE, CRIME, AND SOCIAL CONTROL
• In the family chapter the debate on marriage and the traditional
family is updated with new figures and data about family
arrangements in the United States, labor force participation, living
alone, divorce, age of marriage, same-sex unions, and household
income as related to race, ethnicity, and gender.
VI. SOCIAL INEQUALITY
Social Class
Gender
Race and Ethnicity
• The discussion of stratification is updated with new wealth
data from the most recent Federal Reserve Survey of Consumer
Finances and new survey information about poverty and about
the American dream.
VII. SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS
Power and Politics
Mass Media
• Other new material includes: a discussion of racial formation
as well as new data and figures in the race and ethnicity chapter,
a new section on race and crime and a new box on the extended
punishment for crime that African Americans suffer in U.S. society
III. SOCIALIZATION
IV. GROUPS AND SOCIAL STRUCTURE
88
Sociology
in the deviance and crime chapter, new data on the state of public
education in the U.S. and the TIMSS international rankings of
educational achievement, new material on urban sprawl and on
sex ratios in developing countries, the current health care crisis in
the United States with new data on the uninsured, and a revised
section on mass hysteria, updated data and figures on computer
and Internet use, and a discussion of Friedman’s “flat world” idea
in the social change chapter.
CONTENTS
Chapter One: Developing a Sociological Consciousness
Chapter Two: Culture and Social Structure
Chapter Three: Socialization
Chapter Four: Social groups and Formal Organizations
Chapter Five: Deviance and Crime
Chapter Six: Social Stratification
Chapter Seven: Inequalities of Race and Ethnicity
Chapter Eight: Gender Inequality
Chapter Nine: Political and Economic Power
Chapter Ten: The Family
Chapter Eleven: Religion, Education, and Medicine
Chapter Twelve: Population and the Environment
Chapter Thirteen: Social Change
Glossary
Review Questions
Internet Connection
References
Photo Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
• At the request of students,the author has included ,at the end
of each chapter, a list of the major concepts discussed in the
chapter.
CONTENTS
Preface
Introduction
Chapter 1: Responding to Chaos: A Brief History of Sociology
Chapter 2: The Sociological Eye
Chapter 3: Science and Fuzzy Objects: Specialization in Sociology
Chapter 4: Who’s Afraid of Sociology?
Chapter 5: The Vocabulary of Science
Chapter 6: Doing Social Research
Chapter 7: Culture
Chapter 8: Social Structure
Chapter 9: Society and Social Institutions
Chapter 10: Socialization
Chapter 11: Deviance and Social Control
Chapter 12: Stratification and Inequality
Chapter 13: Inequality and Achievement: Social Class
Chapter 14: Inequality and Ascription: Race, Ethnicity, and
Gender
References
Glossary/Index
Credits
Each chapter ends with End of Chapter Review and Stop and
Review: Answers and Discussion
NEW
NEW
THE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: CORE CONCEPTS IN
SOCIOLOGY
4th Edition
Lisa J McIntyre, Washington State University-Pullman
2008 / 288 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340415-8 / MHID: 0-07-340415-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-126367-2 / MHID: 0-07-126367-5 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/mcintyre4
The Practical Skeptic is a concise introduction to sociology
that focuses on core concepts as the central building blocks
for understanding sociology. Lisa McIntyre’s straightforward,
lively, even humorous style and her emphasis on critical
thinking make this an engaging and user-friendly text for
students of all levels. Through this conversational style
students are able to grasp key sociological concepts and learn
the essential lesson that there is much that goes on in the
social world that escapes the sociologically untrained eye.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The most up-to-date statistics have been added to this edition,
along with other updated material, to keep the text current and
relevant to today’s students.
• The option of a Zinio ebook gives students a cost-saving
alternative to their traditional printed textbook.
• New and expanded material has been added to discussion
of important topics like social structure, culture, deviance,
inequality, and more!
THE PRACTICAL SKEPTIC: READINGS IN
SOCIOLOGY
4th Edition
Lisa McIntyre, Washington State University—Pullman
2008 / 408 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338003-2 / MHID: 0-07-338003-2
The Practical Skeptic: Readings in Sociology includes classic
sociological research writings as well as recent pieces
on fascinating topics of interest to students. It is the ideal
companion to McIntyre’s text, The Practical Skeptic: Core
Concepts in Sociology or other sociology texts. Readings
in this edition challenge students to re-evaluate familiar
social arenas: the college classroom, televised sports shows,
restaurants, doctors’ offices and even public restrooms. The
readings focus around the essential message that there is much
that goes on in the social world that escapes the sociologically
untrained eye.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Emphasizes articles that provide students the opportunity to
do the activity that sociologists do; to reexamine the familiar and
to rethink conventional understandings of these.
• Students are invited to contemplate in new ways their own
participation in the social world.
CONTENTS
Part I. THE SOCIOLOGICAL IMAGINATION
1. C. Wright Mills, The Promise
2. Stephanie Coontz, How History and Sociology Can Help
Today’s Families
3. Lisa J. McIntyre, Hernando Washington
89
Sociology
Part II. THE RESEARCH CRAFT
4. Simon Davis, Men as Success Objects and Women as Sex
Objects: A Study of Personal Advertisements
*5. Gart Wyatt, Skipping Class: An Analysis of Absenteeism
Among First-Year College Students
6. Lisa J. McIntyre, Doing the Right Thing: Ethics in Social Research
7. Philip Meyer, If Hitler Asked You to Electrocute a Stranger,
Would You? Probably
Part III. CULTURE
8. Clyde Kluckhohn, Queer Customs
9. Horace Miner, Body Ritual Among the Nacirema
*10. Cheryl Laz, Act Your Age
*11. Laurie Scheuble and David R. Johnson, Marital Name
Change: Plans and Attitudes of College Students
12. Elijah Anderson, The Code of the Streets
*13. William T. Bielby, Rock in a Hard Place: Grassroots Cultural
Production in the Post-Elvis Era
Part IV. SOCIAL STRUCTURE
14. Erving Goffman, The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life
*15. Adrian F. Aventi, The Not-So-Lonely Crowd: Friendship
Groups in Collective Behavior
16. Philip G. Zimbardo, Pathology of Imprisonment
17. Greta Feoff Paules, “Getting” and “Making” a Tip
18. Natalie Adams and Pamela Bettis, Commanding the Room in
Short Skirts: Cheering as the Embodiment of Ideal Girlhood
*19. Harvey Molotch, The Rest Room and Equal Opportunity
Part V. SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND SOCIALIZATION
*20. Steven Brint, Mary F. Cntrereas, and Michael T. Matthews,
Socialization Messages in Primary School: An Organizational
Analysis
*21. Blake E. Ashford and Glen E. Kreiner, “How Can You Do It?”
Dirty Work and the Challenge of Constructing a Positive Identity
22. Gwynne Dyer, Anybody’s Son Will Do
23. Thomas J. Schmid and Richard S. Jones, Suspended Identity:
Identity Transformation in a Maximum Security Prison
*24. Lynn Zimmer, How Women Reshape the Prison Guard Role
25. Patti A. Giuffre and Christine L. Williams, Not Just Bodies:
Strategies for Desexualizing the Physical Examination of Patients
Part VI. DEVIANCE AND SOCIAL CONTROL
26. Émile Durkheim, The Normality of Crime
27. William J. Chambliss, The Saints and the Roughnecks
28. D. L. Rosenhan, On Being Sane in Insane Places
29. A. Ayres Boswell and Joan Z. Spade, Fraternities and Collegiate
Rape Culture: Why are Some Fraternities More Dangerous Places
for Women?
30. Emily E. LaBeff, Robert E. Clark, Valerie J. Haines, and George
M. Dickhoff, Situational Ethics and College Student Cheating
31. Michael L. Benson, Denying the Guilty Mind: Accounting for
Involvement in White-Collar Crime
Part VII. INEQUALITY
32. James Loewan, The Land of Opportunity
33. Barbara Ehrenreich, Nickel and Dimed: On (Not) Getting By
in America
34. Katherine Newman and Chauncy Lennon, The Job Ghetto
35. Joe R. Feagn, Racism
*36. Roxanna Harlow, “Race Doesn’t Matter, but...” The
Effect of Race on College Professors’ Experiences and Emotion
Management in the Undergraduate College Classroom
37. Robin D. G. Kelley, Confessions of a Nice Negro or Why I
Shaved My Head
38. Yin Ling Leung, The Model Minority Myth: Asian Americans
Confront Growing Backlash
39. Adriane Fugh-Berman, M.D, Tales Out of Medical School
*40. Randall Collins, The Sociological Eye and Its Blinders
90
NEW
SOCIOLOGY: A BRIEF
INTRODUCTION
7th Edition
Richard T. Schaefer, Depaul
University
2008 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352805-2 / MHID: 0-07-352805-6
(No Selling Rights)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110178-3 / MHID: 0-07-110178-0 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/schaefer7
Like its predecessors, the seventh edition of this text reflects
Rick Schaefer’s mission to bring readers a comprehensive,
up-to-date presentation that teaches them how to think
critically about society and their own lives from a wide range
of classical and contemporary perspectives. Combining
balanced coverage of theory with current research findings,
distinctive social policy sections, examples of interest to
students, and abundant learning aids and exercises, this text
will help students develop a sociological imagination. An
optional package combines Schaefer, Sociology, Seventh
Edition and Reel Society Interactive Movie 2.0 CD-ROM at
nominal extra cost.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Greatly increased coverage of globalization includes the
following: New chapter on global inequality (Chapter 9) featuring
major sections on global poverty and the global divide between
the West and developing nations; Newly titled Chapter 16,
“Globalization, the Environment, and Social Change,” featuring
expanded coverage of global issues, including global social
movements, global social change, the impact of globalization on
the environment, and a social policy section on transnationals;
New sections on thinking globally (Chapter 1), transnational
crime (7), the impact of global immigration (10), a new policy
section on offshoring service jobs (14), a new “Sociology in the
Global Community” box on the global response to the 2004
tsunami (1), and more; New “Sociology’s Global View” map on
the inside front cover that highlights globalization coverage in
the new edition.
• Five new “Social Policy” sections on the following topics: “The
Death Penalty in the United States and Worldwide,” (Chapter
7); “Universal Human Rights” (9); “Global Immigration” (10);
“Global Offshoring,” (14); and “Transnationals” (16)
• Twenty-six new boxed sections, including the following:
adolescent sexual networks (Chapter 5), road rage (7), social class
and financial aid (8), the contrast between Appalachian poverty
and Congolese affluence (8), arranged marriage (9), and Islam in
the United States (13).
• Eight new chapter-opening excerpts, drawn from sociological
writing convey the excitement and relevance of sociological
inquiry: Paradise Laborers: Hotel Work in the Global Economy
by Patricia A. Adler and Peter Adler (Chapter 2); Born to Buy: The
Commercialized Child and the New Consumer by Juliet B. Schor
(3); Growing Up Digital: The Rise of the Net Generation (6);
Sociology
The Working Poor: Invisible in America by David K. Shipler (8);
Arnold Schwarzenegger, Ally McBeal, and Arranged Marriages:
Globalization on the Ground in India, by Steve Derné (9);
Lipstick Jihad: A Memoir of Growing Up Iranian in America and
America in Iran by Azadeh Moaveni (11); Unequal Childhoods:
Class, Race, and Family Life by Annette Lareau (12); and Ruling
the Waves: Cycles of Discovery, Chaos, and Wealth from the
Compass to the Internet by Debora L. Spar (16)
• New Self-Quizzes at the end of each chapter allow students to
test their comprehension and retention of key concepts. Answers
to the questions are presented at the end of each quiz.
• New “Audio Abridgement CD Set for Study and Review” – an
abridged, spoken version of the text – helps students review core
information. Developed with today’s multitasking students and
instructors in mind, this “book on tape” is designed to serve as
a tool for review while commuting, working out, or just sitting
down to study. Each chapter runs approx. 15 minutes and focuses
on key chapter concepts. The chapter summaries from the text
served as the framework for this abridgement. This six-CD set is
free with every new copy of the text.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. Understanding Sociology
Chapter 2. Sociological Research
Chapter 3. Culture
Chapter 4. Socialization
Chapter 5. Social Interaction, Groups, and Social Structure
Chapter 6. The Mass Media
Chapter 7. Deviance and Social Control
Chapter 8. Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States
Chapter 9. Global Inequality
Chapter 10. Racial and Ethnic Inequality
Chapter 11. Stratification by Gender and Age
Chapter 12. The Family and Intimate Relationships
Chapter 13. Religion and Education
Chapter 14. Government and the Economy
Chapter 15. Population, Communities, and Health
Chapter 16. Globalization, the Environment, and Social Change
NEW
SOCIOLOGY
11th Edition
Richard Schaefer, Depaul University
2008 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340414-1 / MHID: 0-07-340414-4
Website: http://mhhe.com/schaefer11
In the eleventh edition of Sociology, Rick Schaefer continues
to provide a comprehensive, up-to-date introduction to
sociology that appeals to students with a diversity of learning
styles. This contemporary text focuses on sociology in the
global community and encourages students to think about
the world they’re living in using a sociological imagination.
With the strongest coverage of race and ethnicity, examples
of sociology’s real world applications, and in-depth coverage
of currently relevant topics like mass media and social policy,
Schaefer’s Sociology is the perfect text for today’s students.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Enhanced Online Learning Center website features interactive
quizzes, video clips with accompanying essay questions,
interactive maps, two interactive games (“Name That Sociologist”
and “What Perspective Am I?”), diagnostic midterm and final
exams, links to additional information about chapter-opening
excerpts and their authors, and SurveyMaker--software that
allows students to construct and electronically disseminate their
own polls for class research projects.
• Three new "Social Policy" sections address Internet Regulation
(Chapter 5), Media Concentration (Chapter 7) and the Death
Penalty (Chapter 8).
• Ten New Chapter-Opening Posters show students how they
are surrounded by sociological messages in their everyday lives.
• New Photo Essays on TV families (Ch. 7) and Medical Care
Around the World (Ch. 19) are visually engaging and spark
students’ interest in sociology.
• Nine New Taking Sociology to Work Boxes profile individuals
in a variety of professions who use principles of sociology in their
work and who believe their backgrounds in sociology have been
valuable to their careers.
CONTENTS
About the Author
List of Chapter-Opening Excerpts
List of Boxed Features and Photo Essays
List of Social Policy Sections
List of Maps and Summing Up tables
Preface
Visual Guide
Part 1: THE SOCIOLOGICAL PERSPECTIVE
1: Understanding Sociology
2: Sociological Research
Part 2: ORGANIZING SOCIAL LIFE
3: Culture
4: Socialization
5: Social Interaction and Social Structure
6: Groups and Organizations
7: The Mass Media
8: Deviance and Social Control
91
Sociology
Part 3: SOCIAL INEQUALITY
9: Stratification and Social Mobility in the United States
10: Global Inequality
11: Racial and Ethnic Inequality
12: Stratification by Gender
13: Stratification by Age
Part 4: SOCIAL INSTITUTIONS
14: The Family and Intimate Relationships
15: Religion
16: Education
17: Government and Politics
18: The Economy and Work
19: Health and Medicine
Part 5: CHANGING SOCIETY
20: Communities and Urbanization
21: Population and the Environment
22: Collective Behavior and Social Movements
23: Globalization, Technology, and Social Change
Glossary
References
Acknowledgements
Photo
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: The Sociological View
Chapter 2: Culture and Socialization
Chapter 3: Social Structure, Groups, and Organizations
Chapter 4: Deviance and Social Control
Chapter 5: Stratification in the United States and Worldwide
Chapter 6: Inequality by Race, Ethnicity, and Gender
Chapter 7: Inequality of Gender
Chapter 8: Family and Religion
Chapter 9: Education, Government, and the Economy
Chapter 10: Population, Community, Health, and the
Environment
Chapter 11: Social Movements, Social Change, and Technology
SUPPLEMENT
Website
NEW
THE SOCIOLOGICALLY
EXAMINED LIFE: PIECES OF THE
CONVERSATION
4th Edition
NEW
Michael Schwalbe, NC State
University—Raleigh
2008 / 288 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338011-7 / MHID: 0-07-338011-3
SOCIOLOGY MATTERS
3rd Edition
Richard T Schaefer, DePaul University
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/schwalbe4
This lively and concise text uses analyses of everyday life
to inspire students to think sociologically about society and
about themselves as social actors.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
2008 / 384 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352811-3 / MHID: 0-07-352811-0
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/schaefersm3
This is a low-cost, paperback, condensed version of Sociology:
A Brief Introduction, Sixth Edition. The conciseness,
readability, and highly focused coverage of Sociology Matters
are designed to appeal to instructors who rely on several texts
rather than on a single comprehensive textbook. Its design and
pedagogy are both straightforward and streamlined. Sociology
Matters features newly written chapter introductions and a
unifying theme--answering the question “How does sociology
matter?”
“After more than 30 years of teaching sociology to students
in colleges, adult education programs, nursing programs, an
overseas program based in London, and even a maximumsecurity prison, I am firmly convinced that the discipline
can play a valuable role in teaching critical thinking skills.
Sociology can help students to better understand the workings
of their own lives as well as of their society and other cultures.”
–-Richard T. Schaefer
92
• Updated “Related Readings” sections lead readers to the latest
research.
CONTENTS
1. Making Sense of the World Differently
2. Inventing the Social World
3. Seeing Connections
4. Relationships, Groups, and Interdependence
5. Becoming Human
6. Behavior as a Product of Interaction
7. Seeing Patterns
8. Contingency and Cause
9. Images, Representations, and Accounts
10. Understanding Power in Social Life
11. Differences and Inequalities
12. Studying and Changing the Social World
Sociology
SOCIOLOGY: DIVERSITY, CONFLICT, AND
CHANGE
Kenneth J. Neubeck, Emeritus, University of Connecticut-Storrs
Davita Silfen Glasberg, University of Connecticut-Storrs
2005 / 576 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304906-9 / MHID: 0-07-304906-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111460-8 / MHID: 0-07-111460-2 [IE]
Website: www.mhhe.com/neubeck
CONTENTS
1. The Sociological Imagination
Part One: CORE SOCIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS
2. Social Structure: Macro-Level
3. Social Structure: Mid-and Micro-Levels
4. Culture
5. Socialization
6. Systems of Inequality
7. Intersection of Race, Class, and Gender
8. Deviance, Crime, Resistance, and Social Control
9. Social Change and Social Movements
Part Two: INSTITUTIONAL SPHERES
10. The State and Capital
11. Work and Production
12. Education
13. Health
14. Families
15. Religion
Part Three: THINKING ABOUT THE FUTURE
16. Emerging Issues
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON SOCIAL
ISSUES
15th Edition
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of Maryland—College Park
2009 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351523-6 / MHID: 0-07-351523-X
This Fifteen Edition of TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES
volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN
0073343900 is also an excellent instructor resource with
NEW
Introductory Sociology – Readers
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
SOCIOLOGY 07/08
36th Edition
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIOLOGY 08/09
37th Edition
2009 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339767-2 / MHID: 0-07-339767-9
679.mhtml
This Thirty-Seventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS:
SOCIOLOGY provides convenient, inexpensive access to
Kurt Finsterbusch, University of
Maryland – College Park
2008 / 232 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339733-7 / MHID: 0-07-339733-4
334.mhtml
This Thirty-Sixth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS:
SOCIOLOGY 07/08 provides convenient, inexpensive
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Culture
Part A. Special Cultural Issues
1. The Islamists’ Other Weapon
93
Sociology
Part B. American Culture and Cultural Change
2. The Atrophy of Social Life
3. Two Cheers for Hypocrisy
Part C. Value Issues
4. Diversity within Unity: A New Approach to Immigrants and
Minorities, The Communitarian Reader: Beyond the Essentials
5. The Dubious Value of Value-Neutrality
UNIT 2. Socialization and Social Control
Part A. Influences on Personality and Behavior
6. Ambition: Why Some People Are Most Likely to Succeed
Part B. Crime, Law Enforcement, and Social Control
9. Fighting Crime
10. Parents or Prisons
11. The Aggregate Burden of Crime
UNIT 3. Groups and Roles in Transition
Part A. Marriage and the Family
12. Can Marriage Be Saved?
13. Overworked, Time Poor, and Abandoned by Uncle Sam
14. Peer Marriage, Pepper Schwartz, The Communitarian Reader:
Beyond the Essentials
Part B. Gender and Gender Roles
15. Stress and the Superdad
16. All Happy Families
Part C. City and Community
17. Ecopolis Now
18. Can Design Make Community?
UNIT 4. Stratification and Social Inequalities
Part A. Income Inequalities
19. The Rich and the Rest
20. Can Extreme Poverty Be Eliminated?
Part B. Welfare and Welfare Reform
21. Welfare Redux
Part C. Racial and Ethnic Issues and Inequalities
22. Virtual Equality, Virtual Segregation
23. Why We Hate
24. The Melting Pot, Part I: Are We There Yet?
Part D. Sex Inequalities and Issues
25. The Conundrum of the Glass Ceilin
26. Too Many Women in College?
27. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution
UNIT 5. Social Institutions: Issues, Crises, and Changes
Part A. The Political Sphere: Power, Politics, and Administration
28. Who Rules America?
29. The Great American Pork Barrel
Part B. The Economic Sphere: Changing Consumption,
Workplaces, Workforce
30. Off the Books
31. The Future of Outsourcing
32. Born to Buy
Part C. The Social Sphere: Education, Health, and Religion
33. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?
34. Medical Guesswork
35. In Search of the Spiritual
UNIT 6. Social Change and the Future
Part A. Population Issues
36. The Challenge of an Aging Society
37. Alien Nation
Part B. Environment and Safety
38. SOS: We Need a Plan B
39. By Any Measure, Earth is at the Tipping Point
Part C. Technology for Better or for Worse
40. Biotech on the Farm
41. The Secret Nuclear War
Part D. The New Crisis: Terrorism
42. Homegrown Terrorism and the Radicalization Process
94
43. EMP: America’s Achilles’ Heel
Part E. Macro Changes for the World and the United States
44. Update on the State of the Future
45. Does Globalization Help or Hurt the World’s Poor
46. Understanding Our Moment in History
NEW
VIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES,
EXPANDED
14th Edition
2008 / 464 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339716-0 / MHID: 0-07-339716-4
(Expanded)
164.mhtml
This fourteenth edition of TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES
This EXPANDED Fourteenth Edition of TAKING SIDES:
SOCIAL ISSUES provides two additional current controversial
issues.
CONTENTS
Part 1: CULTURE AND VALUES
ISSUE 1. Is America in Moral Decline?
ISSUE 2. Does the News Media Have a Liberal Bias?
ISSUE 3. Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way
of Life?
Part 2: SEX ROLES, GENDER, AND THE FAMILY
ISSUE 4. Is the Decline of the Traditional Family a National Crisis?
New! ISSUE 5. Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children?
ISSUE 6. Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized?
Part 3: STRATIFICATION AND INEQUALITY
ISSUE 7. Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem?
ISSUE 8. Is the Underclass the Major Threat to American Ideals?
ISSUE 9. Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness?
New! ISSUE 10. Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to
Girls and Women?
Part 4: POLITICAL ECONOMY AND INSTITUTIONS
ISSUE 11. Is Government Dominated by Big Business?
New! ISSUE 12. Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist
Economy?
Sociology
ISSUE 13. Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor?
New! ISSUE 14. Is Competition the Reform That Will Fix Education?
New! ISSUE 15. Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and
Enhance Humans?
NEW
Part 5: CRIME AND SOCIAL CONTROL
ISSUE 16. Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar Crime?
ISSUE 17. Should Drug Use Be Decriminalized?
ISSUE 18. Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant Curtailment of
Civil Liberties?
WEAPONS OF MASS
DESTRUCTION AND
TERRORISM
Part 6: THE FUTURE: POPULATION/ENVIRONMENT/SOCIETY
ISSUE 19. Is Mankind Dangerously Harming the Environment?
ISSUE 20. Is Globalization Good for Mankind?
EXPANDED:
ISSUE 21. Has Feminism Benefited American Society?
ISSUE 22. Will the Clash of Civilizations Be the Dominant
Struggle of the 21st Century?
Social Problems
NEW
TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM
UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY
ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND
INTERPRETATIONS
3rd Edition
Russell D Howard and Reid L Sawyer of US Military Academy
Natasha E Bajema
2009 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337979-1 / MHID: 0-07-337979-4
794.mhtml
Russell D Howard, US Military
Academy
James J F Forest, US Military Academy
2008 / 624 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337970-8 / MHID: 0-07-337970-0
700.mhtml)
In TERRORISM AND WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION
AND DISRUPTION, Brigadier General (Retired) Russell
Howard and Dr. James Forest have collected original
and previously published seminal articles and essays by
scientists, academics, government officials, and members
of the nation’s security and intelligence communities. The
editors and several of the authors write from practical field
experience in nonproliferation and counterterrorism efforts.
Others have had significant responsibility for developing
government policies to address the threat of weapons of mass
destruction and terrorism. The contributors include a majority
of the significant names in the field including Bruce Hoffman,
Brian Jenkins, Jonathan Tucker, Rohan Gunaratna, David
Franz, Richard Betts, William Rosenau, and David Albright.
Unit One of the book introduces key terms and addresses
important strategic and policy debates. Authors explain
how the new forms of terrorism affect the post-9/11 security
environment and introduce the notion that weapons of mass
destruction could give terrorists short-term, asymmetric attack
advantages over conventional military forces. Unit Two
offers detailed accounts of the characteristics, availability,
and dangers of specific types of WMD, along with four case
studies that associate theory with practice—an important
feature of this volume. Unit Three deals with past, present,
and future national and international responses to—and
defenses against—the threat of WMD terrorism. and in the
final section of the volume, authors predict future WMD
threats and seek to draw on past events and mistakes in order
to identify lessons and strategies for the future.
Appendices include a primer on bioterrorism and fact sheets
on chemical, biological, nuclear and radiological terrorism.
CONTENTS
Part I. INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1.1 Definitions, Trends, and the Concept of “New
Terrorism”
Chapter 1.2 The Nature of the Post-9/11 WMD Terrorism Threat
Chapter 1.3 The WMD Terrorism Hype
Chapter 1.4 The Terrorist WMD of Choice
Part II. UNDERSTANDING THE THREAT
Chapter 2.1 Different “Faces” of Nuclear Terrorism
Chapter 2.2 Radiological Dispersal Devices
Chapter 2.3 Sabotage of Nuclear Facilities and other Critical
Infrastructure
95
Sociology
Chapter 2.4 Bioterrorism
Chapter 2.5 Chemical Terrorism
Chapter 2.6 Food Security and Agricultural and Terrorism
Chapter 2.7 Cyberterrorism
Chapter 2.8 Case Study #1: Ricin Plot in London 2003
Chapter 2.9 Case Study #2: Jemaah Islamiyah
Chapter 2.10 Case Study #3: Aum Shinrikyo
Chapter 2.11 Case Study #4: al Qaeda
Chapter 2.12 Case Study #5: A.Q. Khan Network
Chapter 2.13 Case Study #6: Iraq as an Example of State-Directed
WMD Terrorism
Part III. RESPONDING TO THE THREAT
Chapter 3.1 Deterrence and Preemption
Chapter 3.2 Intelligence and WMD
Chapter 3.3 WMD Detection Technology
Chapter 3.4 Nonproliferation Regimes
Chapter 3.5 Interdiction and Law Enforcement
Chapter 3.6 Case Study #1: The Public Health Response to the
2001 Anthrax Attacks
Chapter 3.7 Case Study #2: Hurricane Katrina and Emergency
Response
Chapter 3.8 Case Study #3: The Response to the 1995 Attack in
Tokyo, Japan
Part IV. LESSONS LEARNED AND FUTURE THREATS
Chapter 4.1 The Need for a Comprehensive, Multidimensional
Strategy
Chapter 4.2 Gaps in the International Framework for Combating
Terrorism
Chapter 4.3 Future Threats
Chapter 4.4 Conclusion
Appendix
NEW
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Coverage of Domestic Terrorism has been added to the chapter
on violence.
• "Public Policy and Private Action" boxes are now included
at the end of each chapter. These boxes suggest ways that social
problems can be ameliorated from the ground up.
• New material on the media and its affect on quality of life has
been added throughout the text.
• "Fallacy" icons in the margins show students how people come
to mistaken conclusions about social problems.
SOCIAL PROBLEMS: A CRITICAL APPROACH
5th Edition
Kenneth J. Neubeck, University of Connecticut – Storrs,
Mary Alice Neubeck and Davita Silfen Glasberg of
University of Connecticut-Storrs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296804-0 / MHID: 0-07-296804-4
This critical approach to the analysis of social problems facing
the world today examines both the causes of those problems
and their human implications. The fifth edition has been
reorganized into four types of social problems: Four chapters
look at large societal problems involving arrangements of
social structures that have a vast impact how societies operate,
and the effect of this on the life chances of millions of people;
five chapters focus on group problems created by social
arrangements and relations; four chapters focus on institutional
problems that derive from the way that social institutions are
arranged to address the basic needs of social survival that
often benefit some members of society more than others; and
the final three chapters focus on individual problems such as
criminal behavior, mental illness, and substance abuse.
CONTENTS
SOCIAL PROBLEMS AND THE
QUALITY OF LIFE
11th Edition
Robert Lauer, Alliant International
University
2008 / 576 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338012-4 / MHID: 0-07-338012-1
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lauersp11
Focusing on quality of life, this text defines what a social
problem is and then addresses specific issues—for example,
how can one gain a sociological understanding of social
problems? What kinds of critical thinking should one engage in
and what kinds should one avoid in attempting to understand
social problems? How is the quality of one’s life affected by
particular problems? What causes these problems and how
can we resolve them? Part One establishes key approaches
to social problems; the remaining parts discuss the social
problems that most acutely impact the quality of our lives.
96
Part One: SOCIETAL PROBLEMS
Chapter 2. Concentration of Political and Economic Power
Chapter 3. Militarism and War
Chapter 4. The Global Context: Population and Underdevelopment
Chapter 5. Environmental Abuse
Part Two: GROUP PROBLEMS
Chapter 6. Economic Inequality and Poverty
Chapter 7. Racism
Chapter 8. Sexism
Chapter 9. Heterosexism
Chapter 10. Ageism
Part Three: INSTITUTIONAL PROBLEMS
Chapter 11. The Changing World of Work
Chapter 12. Schooling and Unequal Educational Opportunity
Chapter 13. Health Care
Chapter 14. Family-Related Problems
Part Four: INDIVIDUAL PROBLEMS
Chapter 15. Criminal Behavior
Chapter 16. Mental Illness
Chapter 17. Suicide
Chapter 18. Substance Abuse
Sociology
TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM:
ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS
2nd Edition
Russell D Howard, US Military Academy
Reid L Sawyer, US Military Academy
2006 / 624 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352771-0 / MHID: 0-07-352771-8
Website: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/00735
27718.mhtml
In this new edition of TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM: UNDERSTANDING THE NEW SECURITY
ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND INTERPRETATIONS,
Brigadier General (Retired) Russell Howard and Major Reid
Sawyer have collected original and previously published
seminal articles and essays by political scientists, government
officials, and members of the nation’s armed forces. The
experience in the nation’s war on terrorism. Others have
had significant responsibility for planning government policy
and responses. The contributors include a majority of the
significant names in the field including General (Retired)
Wayne Downing (former Deputy National Security Advisor),
General (Retired) Barry McCaffrey, Martha Crenshaw, Bruce
Hoffman, Barry Posen, Jessica Stern. Part One of the book
analyzes the philosophical, political, and religious roots of
terrorist activities around the world and discusses the national,
regional, and global effects of historical and recent acts of
terrorism. In addition to material on the threats from suicide
bombers, as well as chemical, biological, radiological, and
nuclear weapons, there are also important contributions
analyzing new and growing threats: narco-terrorism, cyberterrorism, genomic terrorism, and agro-terrorism. Part Two
deals with past, present, and future national and international
responses to--and defenses against--terrorism. Essays and
articles in this section analyze and debate the practical,
political, ethical, and moral questions raised by military and
non-military responses (and pre-emptive actions) outside of
the context of declared war. The two detailed Appendices
are: Background Information on Designated Foreign Terrorist
Organizations; Chronology of Significant Terrorist Incidents,
2002-2004.
CONTENTS
Social Problems – Readers
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: VIOLENCE AND TERRORISM
08/09
11th Edition
Thomas J Badey, Randolph-Macon College
2009 (February 2008) / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339776-4 / MHID: 0-07-339776-8
768.mhtml
This Eleventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: VIOLENCE
AND TERRORISM provides convenient, inexpensive access
to current articles selected from the best of the public press.
CLASSROOM, ISBN 0073301906 is offered as a practical
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL PROBLEMS 08/09
36th Edition
2009 / 256 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339768-9 / MHID: 0-07-339768-7
Part I. DEFINING THE THREAT
Chapter 1. Defining the Threat
Chapter 2. Why Terrorism?
Chapter 3. The New Terrorism
Chapter 4. Religion and the Intersection with Terrorism
Chapter 5. Weapons of Mass Destruction
Chapter 6. The Threat of Other Forms of Terrorism
Part II. COUNTERING THE TERRORIST THREAT
Chapter 7. The Challenges of Terrorism to a Free Society
Chapter 8. Strategies and Approaches for Combating Terrorism
Chapter 9. Organizing to Fight Terrorism
Appendices
Appendix A Background Information on Designated Foreign
Terrorist Organizations
Appendix B Chronology of Significant Terrorist Incidents, 20022004
97
Sociology
New! 3. Lethal Fantasies
New! 4. Why We Don’t Prepare
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON SOCIAL
ISSUES
15th Edition
2009 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351523-6 / MHID: 0-07-351523-X
This Fifteen Edition of TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES
volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE CLASSROOM, ISBN
0073343900 is also an excellent instructor resource with
UNIT 3. The Federal Government and Homeland Security
New! 9. The Doom Boom
New! 10. Immigration and National Security
New! 11. Senators Say Scrap FEMA and Start Over
UNIT 4. State and Local Governments and Homeland Security
New! 12. Terrorism’s Impact on State Law Enforcement
New! 13. State of Readiness
New! 14. New York State of Mind
New! 15. Blame Amid the Traged
UNIT 5. First Responders
New! 16. Antiterrorist Policing in New York City After 9/11:
Comparing Perspectives on a Complex Process
New! 17. Community Policing and Terrorism
New! 18. D.C. Deploys Wireless Net for First Responders
New! 19. The Front Line in Training for Disasters
UNIT 6. New Technologies in Homeland Security
New! 20. Guarding Against Missiles
New! 21. Modernizing Homeland Security
New! 22. Hesitation at Homeland Security
New! 23. Thanks, Dubai!
UNIT 7. Vulnerabilities and Threats
New! 24. Thwarting Nuclear Terrorism
New! 25. Bioterrorism—Preparing to Fight the Next War
New! 26. These Chemicals Are So Deadly
New! 27. Port Security Is Still a House of Cards
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS:
HOMELAND SECURITY
2nd Edition
Thomas J Badey, Randolph-Macon
College
2008 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339730-6 / MHID: 0-07-339730-X
30x.mhtml
This Second Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: HOMELAND
SECURITY provides convenient, inexpensive access to
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Concept of Homeland Security
New! 1. Homeland Security
New! 2. Terrorism: How Much Are We Willing to Take?
98
UNIT 2. The Department of Homeland Security
New! 5. Are We Ready for the Next 9/11?
New! 6. Revisiting Homeland Security
New! 7. Shifting Priorities: Congressional Incentives and the
Homeland Security Granting Process
New! 8. Airport Security Screening: Privatize or Federalize?
UNIT 8. Civil Liberties and Civil Rights
New! 28. Island Mentality
New! 29. The Truth about Torture
New! 30. Civil Liberties and Homeland Security
31. Homeland Security and the Lessons of Waco
32. Heading in the Wrong Direction
33. Mining Personal Data
UNIT 9. Intelligence and Homeland Security
New! 34. U.S. Intelligence: A Losing Proposition
New! 35. In Defence of the Intelligence Services
New! 36. Can Spies Be Made Better?
New! 37. We Have Not Correctly Framed the Debate on
Intelligence Reform
UNIT 10. The Future of Homeland Security
New! 38. Department of Homeland Security: Charting a Path
Forward
New! 39. The Terrorism Index
New! 40. Building an Agile Homeland Security Establishment
New! 41. Fighters, Not First Responders
Sociology
New! 21. All Happy Families
New! 22. The Conundrum of the Glass Ceiling
New! 23. Too Many Women in College?
NEW
PROBLEMS 07/08
35th Edition
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339734-4 / MHID: 0-07-339734-2
342.mhtml
This Thirty-Fifth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL
PROBLEMS provides convenient, inexpensive access to
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Introduction: The Nature of Social Problems and
General Critiques of American Society
1. Social Problems: Definitions, Theories, and Analysis
2. The Fragmentation of Social Life
3. How to Re-Moralize America
UNIT 4. Institutional Problems
Part A. The Family
24. Can Marriage Be Saved?
25. Overworked, Time Poor, and Abandoned by Uncle Sam
New! 26. Peer Marriage
Part B. Education
New! 27. Against School: How Public Education Cripples Our
Kids, and Why
New! 28. Can the Center Find a Solution That Will Hold?
Part C. Health
New! 29. Fixing Hospitals
New! 30. Medical Guesswork
UNIT 5. Crime, Law Enforcement, and Terrorism
Part A. Crime
31. Fighting Crime
32. The Aggregate Burden of Crime
Part B. Law Enforcement
34. Causes and Consequences of Wrongful Convictions
New! 35. Reforming Juvenile Justice
Part C. Terrorism
36. EMP: America’s Achilles’ Heel
New! 37. Homegrown Terrorism and the Radicalization Process
UNIT 6. Problems of Population, Environment, Technology, and
the Future
Part A. Population and Environment Issues
38. The Challenge of an Aging Society
New! 39. SOS: We Need a Plan B
40. By Any Measure, Earth Is at the Tipping Point
Part B. Technological Issues
41. The Secret Nuclear War
Part C. The Future
New! 42. Update on the State of the Future
43. Embracing Today’s Global Economy
44. Understanding Our Moment in History
UNIT 2. Problems of the Political Economy
Part A. The Polity
4. Who Rules America?
5. Sugar Daddies
New! 6. Our Incompetent Government
7. Rights, Liberties, and Security: Recalibrating the Balance After
Sept. 11
Part B. The Economy
8. Evaluating Economic Change
New! 9. The New Rules
10. Born to Buy
Part C. Problems of Place
New! 11. Ecopolis Now
New! 12. Alien Nation
UNIT 3. Problems of Poverty and Inequality
Part A. Inequality and the Poor
13. The Rich and the Rest
New! 14. Can Extreme Poverty Be Eliminated?
Part B. Welfare
New! 15. The Great American Pork Barrel
New! 16. Welfare Redux
Part C. Racial and Ethnic Inequality and Issues
New! 17. Virtual Equality
18. Why We Hate
New! 19. Arab America’s September 11
Part D. Gender Inequalities and Issues
20. Human Rights, Sex Trafficking, and Prostitution
99
Sociology
Part 5: CRIME AND SOCIAL CONTROL
ISSUE 16. Is Street Crime More Harmful Than White-Collar
Crime?
ISSUE 17. Should Drug Use Be Decriminalized?
ISSUE 18. Does the Threat of Terrorism Warrant Curtailment of
Civil Liberties?
NEW
VIEWS ON SOCIAL ISSUES,
EXPANDED
14th Edition
Part 6: THE FUTURE: POPULATION/ENVIRONMENT/SOCIETY
ISSUE 19. Is Mankind Dangerously Harming the Environment?
ISSUE 20. Is Globalization Good for Mankind?
EXPANDED:
ISSUE 21. Has Feminism Benefited American Society?
ISSUE 22. Will the Clash of Civilizations Be the Dominant
Struggle of the 21st Century?
2008 / 464 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339716-0 / MHID: 0-07-339716-4
(Expanded)
164.mhtml
This fourteenth edition of TAKING SIDES: SOCIAL ISSUES
SOCIAL ISSUES provides two additional current controversial
issues.
CONTENTS
Part 1: CULTURE AND VALUES
ISSUE 1. Is America in Moral Decline?
ISSUE 2. Does the News Media Have a Liberal Bias?
ISSUE 3. Is Third World Immigration a Threat to America’s Way
of Life?
Part 2: SEX ROLES, GENDER, AND THE FAMILY
ISSUE 4. Is the Decline of the Traditional Family a National
Crisis?
New! ISSUE 5. Should Mothers Stay Home with Their Children?
ISSUE 6. Should Same-Sex Marriages Be Legally Recognized?
Part 3: STRATIFICATION AND INEQUALITY
ISSUE 7. Is Increasing Economic Inequality a Serious Problem?
ISSUE 8. Is the Underclass the Major Threat to American Ideals?
ISSUE 9. Has Affirmative Action Outlived Its Usefulness?
New! ISSUE 10. Are Boys and Men Disadvantaged Relative to
Girls and Women?
Part 4: POLITICAL ECONOMY AND INSTITUTIONS
ISSUE 11. Is Government Dominated by Big Business?
New! ISSUE 12. Should Government Intervene in a Capitalist
Economy?
ISSUE 13. Has Welfare Reform Benefited the Poor?
New! ISSUE 14. Is Competition the Reform That Will Fix
Education?
New! ISSUE 15. Should Biotechnology Be Used to Alter and
Enhance Humans?
100
ANNUAL EDITIONS: VIOLENCE AND TERRORISM
07/08
10th Edition
Thomas J. Badey, Randolph-Macon College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351619-6 / MHID: 0-07-351619-8
198.mhtml
This TENTH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: VIOLENCE
AND TERRORISM provides convenient, inexpensive access
to current articles selected from the best of the public press.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Concept of Terrorism
1. Ghosts of Our Past
2. An Essay on Terrorism
3. The Origins of the New Terrorism
UNIT 2. Tactics of Terrorism
New! 4. Terrorists’ New Tactic: Assassination
New! 5. Paying for Terror
New! 6. The Moral Logic and Growth of Suicide Terrorism
UNIT 3. State-Sponsored Terrorism
7. Iran: Confronting Terrorism
New! 8. The Growing Syrian Missile Threat: Syria after Lebanon
New! 9. Terrorists Don’t Need States
New! 10. Guerrilla Nation
UNIT 4. International Terrorism
11. Extremist Groups in Egypt
12. Colombia and the United States: From Counternarcotics to
Counterterrorism
New! 13. Root Causes of Chechen Terror
New! 14. End of Terrorism?
UNIT 5. Terrorism in America
15. Homegrown Terror
New! 16. Speaking for the Animals, or the Terrorists?
New! 17. Women and Organized Racial Terrorism in the United
States
New! 18. José Padilla and the War on Rights
Sociology
UNIT 6. Terrorism and the Media
19. Terrorism as Breaking News: Attack on America
New! 20. A Violent Episode in the Virtual World
New! 21. Terror’s Server
New! 22. High Anxiety
UNIT 7. Terrorism and Religion
23. Holy Orders: Religious Opposition to Modern States
New! 24. The Madrassa Scapegoat
UNIT 8. Women and Terrorism
25. Cross-Regional Trends in Female Terrorism
26. Explosive Baggage: Female Palestinian Suicide Bombers and
the Rhetoric of Emotion
New! 27. Girls as “Weapons of Terror” in Northern Uganda and
Sierra Leonean Rebel Fighting Forces
UNIT 9. Government Response
New! 28. Port Security Is Still a House of Cards
New! 29. Are We Ready Yet?
New! 30. The Double-Edged Effect in South Asia
UNIT 10. Future Threats
31. The Changing Face of Al Qaeda and the Global War on
Terrorism
32. The Terrorism to Come
CONTENTS
Preface
Part One: INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1: Public and Private Families
Chapter 2: The History of the Family
Part Two: GENDER, CLASS, AND RACE-ETHNICITY
Chapter 3: Gender and Families
Chapter 4: Social Class and Families
Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and Families
Part Three: SEXUALITY, PARTNERSHIP, AND MARRIAGE
Chapter 6: Sexualities
Chapter 7: Cohabitation and Marriage
Chapter 8: Work and Families
Part Four: LINKS ACROSS THE GENERATIONS
Chapter 9: Children and Parents
Chapter 10: The Elderly and Their Families
Part Five: CONFLICT, DISRUPTION, AND RECONSTITUTION
Chapter 11: Domestic Violence
Chapter 12: Divorce
Chapter 13: Remarriage and Stepfamilies
Part Six: FAMILY AND SOCIETY
Chapter 14: The Family, the State, and Social Policy
Chapter 15: Social Change and Families
References
Marriage & The Family
NEW
PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER
5th Edition
Andrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University
2008 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352809-0 / MHID: 0-07-352809-9
This reader examines the family through two lenses--the
familiar private family, in which we live our personal lives,
and the public family, in which we deal with broader societal
issues, such as raising the next generation, and the care of the
elderly. Consequently, these readings look both at intimate,
personal concerns, such as whether to marry, as well as
societal concerns, such as governmental policies that affect
families. The reader corresponds exactly to and is published
concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and Private
Families: An Introduction; both the textbook and the reader
have 15 same-named chapters.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Almost half of the readings (13of 29) are new to this edition.
New readings include: articles by Stephanie Coontz, author of
Marriage, A History, and Kathryn Edin and Maria Kefalas, authors
of Promises I Can Keep, summarizing the arguments in their
recent books; an excerpt from Jason DeParle’s acclaimed book,
American Dream: Three Women, Ten Kids, and a Nation’s Drive
to End Welfare; Judith Stacey on gay fathers and on the frontier
of parenthood; and Frank Furstenberg and co-authors on the new
life stage of "early adulthood."
NEW
INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS,
MARRIAGES AND FAMILIES
7th Edition
Mary Kay DeGenova, University of of
New Hampshire
F Philip Rice (deceased)
2008 / 544 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352810-6 / MHID: 0-07-352810-2
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/degenova7
This comprehensive introduction to marriage and the family
combines the most current research base with an emphasis
on family background and diversity. It presents a positive
perspective on families and focuses on the importance of
public and social policy in the lives of families. Each chapter
concludes with a section on public policy and critical thinking
questions. The text makes research and statistics easy for
students to follow and understand, and it integrates cultural
diversity throughout.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• More cultural diversity has been woven throughout the text
and, whenever possible, research was used that represents
diverse sample bases.
• To present a realistic picture of how many families across
America are struggling, this edition includes a stronger emphasis
on stress and family life. This is reflected in topics such as
101
Sociology
economics, homelessness, work-family balance, the rising cost of
healthcare, and depression.
• In each chapter, a new piece entitled "Personal Perspective"
presents an interview from an individual who has experience in a
particular topic of discussion. The interviews are designed to help
students connect real lives, and possibly their own lives, to issues.
• A new companion website offers resources for students and
instructors--including quizzes, Internet activities, relevant links,
chapter outlines, and key terms, as well as PowerPoint outlines
and an Instructor’s Resource Guide.
• On CD-ROM is a unique, interactive movie that helps students
master course concepts more completely by looking at how
families are defined and and how those definitions have changed
over the last century.
• Increased coverage addresses definition of marriage; culture
and values; media’s influence on gender roles; gender and the
division of household labor; steroid use among females; sexuality;
single parenthood; adult children living with parents; dating and
the internet; the newlywed years; social support over the life
course; financial needs of families; communication in families;
surrogate parenting; cultural differences in childrearing; social
competence, socialization, and discipline of children; statistics
and probability of divorce; SES and divorce; economics and
divorce; stepparenting; and stepchild-stepparent relationships.
• Other new material includes increased coverage of Race,
Class, and Gender; fatherhood and the life course; interracial,
interethnic, and interfaith marriages; gender and brain differences;
gender and depression; eldercare and elder abuse; jealousy
and infidelity; love and attachment; discipline and behavioral
problems; fictive kin; foster care; parenting a child with special
needs; adult sibling relationships; family relationships from a
previous marriage; grandparents raising grandchildren; emerging
adulthood; abstinence; parent-adolescent relationships; and the
lavish wedding.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Intimate Relationships, Marriages, and Families in the
Twenty-First Century
Chapter 2: Family Backgrounds and How They Influence Us
Chapter 3: Gender: Identity and Roles
Chapter 4: Being Single
Chapter 5: Attraction and Dating
Chapter 6: Love and Mate Selection
Chapter 7: Qualities of a Successful Marriage
Chapter 8: Marital Relationships over The Family Life Cycle
Chapter 9: Work, Family Roles, and Material Resources
Chapter 10: Power, Decision Making, and Communication
Chapter 11: Family Planning and Parenting
Chapter 12: Pregnancy and Childbirth
Chapter 13: Parent-Child Relationships
Chapter 14: Parents and Extended Family Relationships
Chapter 15: Conflict, Family Crises, and Crisis Management
Chapter 16: The Family and Divorce
Chapter 17: Coming Together: Remarriage and Stepparenting
Glossary
References
Credits
Index
NEW
MARRIAGE AND FAMILIES
INTIMACY, DIVERSITY AND STRENGTHS
6th Edition
David H Olson, University of Minnesota--Minneapolis
John DeFrain, University of Nebraska—Lincoln
Linda Skogrand, Utah State University-Logan
2008 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338004-9 / MHID: 0-07-338004-0
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson6
This introduction to marriages and families accentuates the
positive aspects of relationships and focuses on enriching
students’ knowledge and experience in building strong,
successful couple and family relationships. The authors, both
seasoned family scholars and therapists, integrate research,
theory, and practical application with an interdisciplinary
perspective on marriage and family.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Updated throughout to include the most current statistics and
cutting-edge research studies. Since the previous edition, every
new issue of 13 major marriage and family, child development,
family therapy, psychology, sociology, and social work journals
have been studied intensively in the search for the latest research
and thinking on critical issues.
• Increased focus on intimacy, diversity, sexuality, and systems.
Topics covered in greater depth include the social environment
and how it influences couples and families, cultural diversity,
cohabitation, parenting, the couple and family map, and
techniques for building stronger marriages and families.
• Responding to interest from college teachers, the authors have
strengthened resource sections on sexuality, and now include indepth and updated discussions of sexual anatomy and response,
contraception, abortion, and sexually transmissible diseases.
• Emphasis on diversity of ethnic and cultural groups as well
as the types of family structures and intimate relationships that
are common today (e.g., single parent, and stepparent families,
couples without children, unmarried couples, and so forth).
CONTENTS
Brief Contents
Boxed Features
About the Authors
Preface
A Visual Preview
Part One: THE SOCIAL CONTEXT OF INTIMATE
RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter One. Perspectives on Intimate Relationships
Chapter Two. Cultural Diversity: Family Strengths and Challenges
Chapter Three. Understanding Marriage and Family Dynamics
Part Two: DYNAMICS OF INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter Four. Communication and Intimacy
Chapter Five. Conflict and Conflict Resolution
Chapter Six. Sexual Intimacy
Chapter Seven. Gender Roles and Power In the Family
Chapter Eight. Managing Economic Resources
Part Three. STAGES OF INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter Nine. Friendship, Intimacy, and Singlehood
102
Sociology
Chapter Ten. Dating, Mate Selection, and Living Together
Chapter Eleven. Marriage: Building a Strong Foundation
Chapter Twelve. Parenthood: Choices and Challenges
Chapter Thirteen. Midlife and Older Couples
Part Four. CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES
Chapter Fourteen. Stress, Abuse, and Family Problems
Chapter Fifteen. Divorce, Single-Parent Families, and Stepfamilies
Chapter Sixteen. Strengthening Marriages and Families
Appendices
Appendix A. Couple and Family Scales
Appendix B. Family Science and Family Research Methods
Appendix C. Contraception and Abortion Options
appendix D. Pregnancy and Childbirth
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
Part 5: CHALLENGES TO INTIMACY
17. Family Crises
18. Separation and Divorce
19. Remarriage and Stepfamilies
Marriage & The Family – Readers
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE
FAMILY 08/09
34th Edition
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY: THE QUEST FOR
INTIMACY
6th Edition
Robert Lauer & Jeanette C. Lauer, Alliant International Univ/
Usi
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312925-9 / MHID: 0-07-312925-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327133-0 / MHID: 0-07-327133-0
(With PowerWeb)
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf5
Combining a positive and practical approach to the study
of marriage and family life with a manageable amount of
sociological theory and research citations, this text is centered
on the theme of enhancing intimacy within marriage and the
family. While providing a comprehensive overview of the
progression from dating to marriage and family, the authors
systematically draw out principles that students can use to
protect and nurture their own intimate relationships, making
this text a practical guide as well.
CONTENTS
Part 1: THE CONTEXT OF INTIMACY
1. American Myths and Dreams
2. Diversity In Families
3 Gender Roles: Foundation for Heterosexual Intimacy
4. Sexuality
Part 2: SEEKING INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
5. Getting to Know Someone Else
6. Getting Involved
7. Falling In Love
8. Selecting A Life Partner
9. The Single Option
Part 3: THE INTIMATE COUPLE
10. Getting Married
11. The Challenge of Communication
12. Power and Conflict in Marriage
13. Work and Home
Part 4: INTIMACY IN FAMILIES
14. Becoming A Parent
15. The Family Life Cycle
16. Family Life As Management
Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana UniversityBloomington
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339746-7 / MHID: 0-07-339746-6
This Thirty-Fourth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE FAMILY
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Evolving Perspectives on the Family
New! 1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience
New! 2. Interracial Families
3. Children as a Public Good
4. Families and Family Study in International Perspective
New! 5. The World Historical Transformation of Marriage
UNIT 2. Exploring and Establishing Relationships
Part A. Love and Sex
6. This Thing Called Love
7. Pillow Talk,Nina Utne (Editor in chief)
8. How to Talk about Sex
9. Reinventing Sex
Part B. Choosing a Mate
10. Great Expectations,
11. New Technologies and Our Feelings
New! 12. Go Ahead, Kiss Your Cousin
Part C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation
13. A New Fertility Factor
14. Brave New Babies
New! 15. Breeder Reaction
16. And Now, the Hard Part
17. Adopting a New American Family
New! 18. After the Bliss
New! 19. Who’s Raising Baby
103
Sociology
Part A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships
New! 20. Three ‘Rules’ That Don’t Apply
New! 21. Two Mommies and a Daddy
22. Marriage at First Sight
Part B. Relationships Between Parents and Children
24. Spanking Children: Evidence and Issue
25. What About Black Fathers?
26. Adoption by Lesbian Couples
New! 27. Are Married Parents Really Better for Children?
Part C. Other Family Relationships
28. Being a Sibling
29. Budding Friendships Fill Out the Family Tree
30. Aunties and Uncles
31. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural
Crisis
32. Aging Japanese Pen Messages to Posterity
UNIT 4. Challenges and Opportunities
Part A. Family Violence and Chaos
33. Hitting Home
New! 34. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse
35. The Myths and Truths of Family Abduction,
Part B. Infidelity
37. Love But Don’t Touch
Part C. Economic Concerns
New! 38. Becoming Financial Grown-Ups
Part D. Illness and Death
New! 39. Partners Face Cancer Together
40. Death of One’s Partner: The Anticipation and the Reality
41. The Hispanic Way of Dying
Part E. War and Terror
42. Terrorism, Trauma, and Children: What Can We Do?
43. Children of the Fallen
Part F. Marriage and Divorce American Style
44. Marriage and Divorce American Style
45. Managing a Blended Family
46. Stepfamily Success Depends on Ingredients
UNIT 5. Families, Now and Into the Future
New! 47. The 3rd National Family History Initiative: Thanksgiving
2006
48. Get a Closer Look: 12 Tips for Successful Family Interviews
New! 49. Spirituality and Family Nursing: Spiritual Assessment
and Intervention for Families
50. Examining Family Rituals
New! 51. The Joy of Rituals
NEW
VIEWS IN FAMILY AND
PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS
7th Edition
Elizabeth Schroeder
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339714-6 / MHID: 0-07-339714-8
Available: May 2007
148.mhtml
This Seventh Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN
FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS presents current
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Parental Decision-Making: What’s Best for Children…
Or What’s Best for Parents
Issue 1. Is It Ever Appropriate to Spank A Child?
Issue 2. Should Adoptive Parents Only Adopt within Their Own
Racial/Ethnic Group?
Children?
Issue 4. Should Parents Homeschool Their Children?
Issue 5. Do Mothers Who Work Outside the Home Have a
Negative Effect on Their Children?
UNIT 2. How Much Control Should Parents Have Over Their
Children?
Issue 6. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Message
for Teens?
Issue 7. Should Parents Routinely Vaccinate Their Children?
Issue 8. Should Parents be Able to Select the Biological Sex of
Their Children?
Issue 9. Should Parents Surgically Alter Their Intersex Infants
Issue 10. Should Minors Be Required to Get Their Parents’
Permission in Order to Obtain an Abortion?
UNIT 3. Revisiting Ozzie and Harriet: Same-Sex Couples and
Their Families Fit In
Issue 11. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Allowed to Marry?
Issue 12. Should the U.S. Constitution Be Amended to Define
Marriage?
Issue 13. Should Lesbians and Gay Individuals be Allowed to
Adopt Children?
Issue 14. Is Cybersex “Cheating”?
Issue 15. Are Open Relationships Healthy?
Issue 16. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?
104
Sociology
Issue 17. Should Men Who Have Sex with Men Be Allowed to
Donate Blood?
Issue 18. Are Statutory Rape Laws Effective at Protecting Minors?
Sociology of Family
Part II: GENDER, CLASS, AND RACE-ETHNICITY
Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity, and Families
Part III: SEXUALITY, PARTNERSHIP, AND MARRIAGE
Part IV: LINKS ACROSS THE GENERATIONS
NEW
Part V: CONFLICT, DISRUPTION, AND RECONSTITUTION
Chapter 12: Divorce
PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES
AN INTRODUCTION
5th Edition
Andrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins
University
2008 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352808-3 / MHID: 0-07-352808-0
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/cherlin5
Nationally recognized for its sound scholarship and balanced
approach and written by one of the leading authorities in the
field, this text examines the family through two lenses: the
familiar private family in which we live most of our personal
lives, and the public family in which we, as adults, deal with
broader societal issues such as the care of the elderly, the
increase in divorce, and childbearing outside of marriage. The
book looks at intimate personal concerns, such as whether
to marry, as well as societal concerns, such as governmental
policies that affect families. Distinctive chapters – Chapter 9,
“Children and Parents;” Chapter 10, “The Elderly and Their
Families;” and Chapter 14, “The Family, the State and Social
Policy” – examine issues of great current interest, such as
income assistance to poor families, the effects of out-of-home
childcare, and the costs of the Social Security and Medicare
programs.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New material addresses current topics and issues such as the
emergence of “early adulthood” as a new life stage between
adolescence and full adulthood (Chapter 2); the diverging
demographics of family life, with improvement for the besteducated and deterioration for the least-educated (4 and 12); the
changing meaning of marriage, as its practical value declines but
its symbolic value increases (7); and marriage as a political issue:
should it be promoted among low-income families, and should it
be extended to same-sex couples (14).
• New photo essays dramatize Hurricane Katrina (Chapter
4), grandparents caring for grandchildren (10), and same-sex
marriage (14).
CONTENTS
Part VI: FAMILY AND SOCIETY
NEW
PUBLIC AND PRIVATE FAMILIES: A READER
5th Edition
Andrew J Cherlin, Johns Hopkins University
2008 / 416 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352809-0 / MHID: 0-07-352809-9
This reader examines the family through two lenses--the
familiar private family, in which we live our personal lives,
and the public family, in which we deal with broader societal
issues, such as raising the next generation, and the care of the
elderly. Consequently, these readings look both at intimate,
personal concerns, such as whether to marry, as well as
societal concerns, such as governmental policies that affect
families. The reader corresponds exactly to and is published
concurrent with Cherlin’s textbook Public and Private
Families: An Introduction; both the textbook and the reader
have 15 same-named chapters.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Almost half of the readings (13of 29) are new to this edition.
New readings include: articles by Stephanie Coontz, author of
Marriage, A History, and Kathryn Edin and Maria Kefalas, authors
of Promises I Can Keep, summarizing the arguments in their
recent books; an excerpt from Jason DeParle’s acclaimed book,
American Dream: Three Women, Ten Kids, and a Nation’s Drive
to End Welfare; Judith Stacey on gay fathers and on the frontier
of parenthood; and Frank Furstenberg and co-authors on the new
life stage of "early adulthood."
CONTENTS
Preface
Part One: INTRODUCTION
Part Two: GENDER, CLASS, AND RACE-ETHNICITY
Chapter 5: Race, Ethnicity and Families
105
Sociology
Part Three: SEXUALITY, PARTNERSHIP, AND MARRIAGE
Part Four: LINKS ACROSS THE GENERATIONS
Part Five: CONFLICT, DISRUPTION, AND RECONSTITUTION
Chapter 12: Divorce
Part Six: FAMILY AND SOCIETY
References
NEW
MARRIAGE AND FAMILIES
INTIMACY, DIVERSITY AND STRENGTHS
6th Edition
David H Olson, University of Minnesota--Minneapolis
John DeFrain, University of Nebraska—Lincoln
Linda Skogrand, Utah State University-Logan
2008 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338004-9 / MHID: 0-07-338004-0
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/olson6
This introduction to marriages and families accentuates the
positive aspects of relationships and focuses on enriching
students’ knowledge and experience in building strong,
successful couple and family relationships. The authors, both
seasoned family scholars and therapists, integrate research,
theory, and practical application with an interdisciplinary
perspective on marriage and family.
CONTENTS
Brief Contents
Boxed Features
About the Authors
Preface
A Visual Preview
Part One: THE SOCIAL CONTEXT OF INTIMATE
RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter One. Perspectives on Intimate Relationships
Chapter Two. Cultural Diversity: Family Strengths and Challenges
Chapter Three. Understanding Marriage and Family Dynamics
Part Two: DYNAMICS OF INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter Four. Communication and Intimacy
Chapter Five. Conflict and Conflict Resolution
Chapter Six. Sexual Intimacy
Chapter Seven. Gender Roles and Power In the Family
Chapter Eight. Managing Economic Resources
Part Three. STAGES OF INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
Chapter Nine. Friendship, Intimacy, and Singlehood
Chapter Ten. Dating, Mate Selection, and Living Together
Chapter Eleven. Marriage: Building a Strong Foundation
Chapter Twelve. Parenthood: Choices and Challenges
Chapter Thirteen. Midlife and Older Couples
Part Four. CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES
Chapter Fourteen. Stress, Abuse, and Family Problems
Chapter Fifteen. Divorce, Single-Parent Families, and Stepfamilies
Chapter Sixteen. Strengthening Marriages and Families
Appendices
Appendix A. Couple and Family Scales
Appendix B. Family Science and Family Research Methods
Appendix C. Contraception and Abortion Options
appendix D. Pregnancy and Childbirth
Glossary
References
Credits
Name Index
Subject Index
MARRIAGE AND FAMILY: THE QUEST FOR
INTIMACY
6th Edition
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Robert Lauer & Jeanette C. Lauer, Alliant International Univ/
Usi
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312925-9 / MHID: 0-07-312925-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327133-0 / MHID: 0-07-327133-0
(With PowerWeb)
• Increased focus on intimacy, diversity, sexuality, and systems.
Topics covered in greater depth include the social environment
and how it influences couples and families, cultural diversity,
cohabitation, parenting, the couple and family map, and
techniques for building stronger marriages and families.
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/lauermf5
• Updated throughout to include the most current statistics and
cutting-edge research studies. Since the previous edition, every
new issue of 13 major marriage and family, child development,
family therapy, psychology, sociology, and social work journals
have been studied intensively in the search for the latest research
and thinking on critical issues.
• Responding to interest from college teachers, the authors have
strengthened resource sections on sexuality, and now include indepth and updated discussions of sexual anatomy and response,
contraception, abortion, and sexually transmissible diseases.
• Emphasis on diversity of ethnic and cultural groups as well
as the types of family structures and intimate relationships that
are common today (e.g., single parent, and stepparent families,
couples without children, unmarried couples, and so forth).
106
Combining a positive and practical approach to the study
of marriage and family life with a manageable amount of
sociological theory and research citations, this text is centered
on the theme of enhancing intimacy within marriage and the
family. While providing a comprehensive overview of the
progression from dating to marriage and family, the authors
systematically draw out principles that students can use to
protect and nurture their own intimate relationships, making
this text a practical guide as well.
CONTENTS
Part 1: THE CONTEXT OF INTIMACY
1. American Myths and Dreams
2. Diversity In Families
Sociology
3 Gender Roles: Foundation for Heterosexual Intimacy
4. Sexuality
Part 2: SEEKING INTIMATE RELATIONSHIPS
5. Getting to Know Someone Else
6. Getting Involved
7. Falling In Love
8. Selecting A Life Partner
9. The Single Option
Part 3: THE INTIMATE COUPLE
10. Getting Married
11. The Challenge of Communication
12. Power and Conflict in Marriage
13. Work and Home
Part 4: INTIMACY IN FAMILIES
14. Becoming A Parent
15. The Family Life Cycle
16. Family Life As Management
Part 5: CHALLENGES TO INTIMACY
17. Family Crises
18. Separation and Divorce
19. Remarriage and Stepfamilies
Sociology of Family – Readers
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE
FAMILY 08/09
34th Edition
Kathleen R Gilbert, Indiana UniversityBloomington
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339746-7 / MHID: 0-07-339746-6
This Thirty-Fourth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: THE FAMILY
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Evolving Perspectives on the Family
New! 1. Marriage and Family in the Scandinavian Experience
New! 2. Interracial Families
3. Children as a Public Good
4. Families and Family Study in International Perspective
New! 5. The World Historical Transformation of Marriage
UNIT 2. Exploring and Establishing Relationships
Part A. Love and Sex
6. This Thing Called Love
7. Pillow Talk,Nina Utne (Editor in chief)
8. How to Talk about Sex
9. Reinventing Sex
Part B. Choosing a Mate
10. Great Expectations,
11. New Technologies and Our Feelings
New! 12. Go Ahead, Kiss Your Cousin
Part C. Pregnancy and the Next Generation
13. A New Fertility Factor
14. Brave New Babies
New! 15. Breeder Reaction
16. And Now, the Hard Part
17. Adopting a New American Family
New! 18. After the Bliss
New! 19. Who’s Raising Baby
Part A. Marriage and Other Committed Relationships
New! 20. Three ‘Rules’ That Don’t Apply
New! 21. Two Mommies and a Daddy
22. Marriage at First Sight
Part B. Relationships Between Parents and Children
24. Spanking Children: Evidence and Issue
25. What About Black Fathers?
26. Adoption by Lesbian Couples
New! 27. Are Married Parents Really Better for Children?
Part C. Other Family Relationships
28. Being a Sibling
29. Budding Friendships Fill Out the Family Tree
30. Aunties and Uncles
31. Roles of American Indian Grandparents in Times of Cultural
Crisis
32. Aging Japanese Pen Messages to Posterity
UNIT 4. Challenges and Opportunities
Part A. Family Violence and Chaos
33. Hitting Home
New! 34. Recognizing Domestic Partner Abuse
35. The Myths and Truths of Family Abduction,
Part B. Infidelity
37. Love But Don’t Touch
Part C. Economic Concerns
New! 38. Becoming Financial Grown-Ups
Part D. Illness and Death
New! 39. Partners Face Cancer Together
40. Death of One’s Partner: The Anticipation and the Reality
41. The Hispanic Way of Dying
Part E. War and Terror
42. Terrorism, Trauma, and Children: What Can We Do?
43. Children of the Fallen
Part F. Marriage and Divorce American Style
44. Marriage and Divorce American Style
45. Managing a Blended Family
46. Stepfamily Success Depends on Ingredients
UNIT 5. Families, Now and Into the Future
New! 47. The 3rd National Family History Initiative: Thanksgiving
2006
48. Get a Closer Look: 12 Tips for Successful Family Interviews
New! 49. Spirituality and Family Nursing: Spiritual Assessment
and Intervention for Families
50. Examining Family Rituals
New! 51. The Joy of Rituals
107
Sociology
Issue 16. Does Pornography Reduce the Incidence of Rape?
Issue 17. Should Men Who Have Sex with Men Be Allowed to
Donate Blood?
Issue 18. Are Statutory Rape Laws Effective at Protecting Minors?
NEW
VIEWS IN FAMILY AND
PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS
7th Edition
Elizabeth Schroeder
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339714-6 / MHID: 0-07-339714-8
Available: May 2007
148.mhtml
This Seventh Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN
FAMILY AND PERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS presents current
mhcls.com/online.
Race, Class. Gender, and
Sexuality
NEW
RECONSTRUCTING GENDER: A MULTICULTURAL
ANTHOLOGY
5th Edition
Estelle Disch, University of Mass-Boston
2009 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338006-3 / MHID: 0-07-338006-7
Website: http://mhhe.com/disch5
NEW
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Parental Decision-Making: What’s Best for Children…
Or What’s Best for Parents
Issue 1. Is It Ever Appropriate to Spank A Child?
Issue 2. Should Adoptive Parents Only Adopt within Their Own
Racial/Ethnic Group?
Children?
Issue 4. Should Parents Homeschool Their Children?
Issue 5. Do Mothers Who Work Outside the Home Have a
Negative Effect on Their Children?
THE SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION OF DIFFERENCE
AND INEQUALITY: RACE, CLASS, GENDER AND
SEXUALITY
4th Edition
UNIT 2. How Much Control Should Parents Have Over Their
Children?
Issue 6. Should “Abstinence-Until-Marriage” Be the Only Message
for Teens?
Issue 7. Should Parents Routinely Vaccinate Their Children?
Issue 8. Should Parents be Able to Select the Biological Sex of
Their Children?
Issue 9. Should Parents Surgically Alter Their Intersex Infants
Issue 10. Should Minors Be Required to Get Their Parents’
Permission in Order to Obtain an Abortion?
UNIT 3. Revisiting Ozzie and Harriet: Same-Sex Couples and
Their Families Fit In
Issue 11. Should Same-Sex Couples Be Allowed to Marry?
Issue 12. Should the U.S. Constitution Be Amended to Define
Marriage?
Issue 13. Should Lesbians and Gay Individuals be Allowed to
Adopt Children?
Issue 14. Is Cybersex “Cheating”?
Issue 15. Are Open Relationships Healthy?
108
Tracy E Ore, St Cloud State University
2009 / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338008-7 / MHID: 0-07-338008-3
Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4
Sociology
NEW
THE MEANING OF DIFFERENCE: AMERICAN
CONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE, SEX AND GENDER,
SOCIAL CLASS, AND SEXUAL ORIENTATION
5th Edition
Karen E Rosenblum, George Mason University
Toni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University
2009 / 544 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338005-6 / MHID: 0-07-338005-9
Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5
Medical Sociology – Readers
UNIT 2. Death and Dying
Issue 4 Are Some Advance Directives Too Limiting of Patients
Rights?
Issue 5 Do Standard Medical Ethics Apply in Disaster
Conditions??
Issue 6 Should Physicians Be Allowed to Assist in Patient
Suicide?
Issue 7 Should Doctors Be Able to Refuse Demands for “Futile”
Treatment?
UNIT 3. Choices in Reproduction
Issue 8 Is Abortion Immoral?
Issue 9 Should a Pregnant Woman Be Punished for Exposing Her
Fetus to Risk?
UNIT 4. Children and Bioethics
Issue 10 Should Adolescents Be Allowed to Make Their Own
Life-and-Death Decisions?
Issue 11 Do Parents Harm Their Children When They Refuse
Medical Treatment on Religions Grounds?
UNIT 5. Genetics
Issue 12 Is the Ban on Federal Funding of Human Stem Cell
Research Justifiable?
Issue 13 Is Genetic Enhancement an Unacceptable Use of
Technology?
UNIT 6. Human and Animal Experiementation
Issue 14 Should Animal Experimentation Be Permitted?
Issue 15 Should Prisoners be Allowed to Participate in Research?
NEW
VIEWS ON BIOETHICAL ISSUES
12th Edition
Carol Levine, United Hospital Fund
UNIT 7. Bioethics and Public Policy
Issue 16 Should Federally Funded Healthcare be Tied to Following
Doctors’ Orders?
Issue 17 Does Military Necessity Override Medical Ethics?
Issue 18 Should Performance-Enhancing Drugs Be Banned from
Sports?
Issue 19 Should There be a Free Market in Body Parts?
Issue 20 Should Pharmacists Be Allowed to Deny Prescriptions
on Grounds of Conscience?
Issue 21 Should Public Health Override Powers Over Individual
Liberty in Combating Bioterrorism?
2008 / 400 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339718-4 / MHID: 0-07-339718-0
180.mhtml
This Twelfth Edition of TAKING SIDES: BIOETHCIAL ISSUES
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Medical Decision Making
Issue 1 Is Informed Consent Still Central to Medical Ethics?
Issue 2 Should Truth-Telling Depend on the Patient’s Culture?
Issue 3 Does Direct-to-Consumer Drug Advertising Enhance
Patient Choice?
109
Sociology
Gerontology / Sociology of
Aging – Readers
NEW
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING
07/08
20th Edition
ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 08/09
21st Edition
Harold Cox, Indiana State University—Terre Haute
2009 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339760-3 / MHID: 0-07-339760-1
601.mhtmlf
This Twenty-First Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING
Harold Cox, Indiana State UniversityTerre Haute
2008 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339729-0 / MHID: 0-07-339729-6
Website: http://www .mhcls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397
296.mhtml
This Twentieth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: AGING 07/08
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Phenomenon of Aging
1. Elderly American
2. The Economic Conundrum of an Aging Population
New! 3. Living Longer
4. Puzzle of the Century
5. The Demographic Drivers of Aging
6. Will You Live to Be 100?
New! 7. The 2005 White House Conference on Aging
UNIT 2. The Quality of Later Life
8. Women’s Sexuality as They Age: The More Things Change, the
More They Stay the Same
New! 9. As Good As It Gets
New! 10. Cohabitation Among Older Adults: A National Portrait
11. We Can Control How We Age
UNIT 3. Societal Attitudes Toward Old Age
12. Society Fears the Aging Process
13. Ageism in America
New! 14. The Secret Lives of Single Women
15. The Under-Reported Impact of Age Discrimination and Its
Threat to Business Vitality
UNIT 4. Problems and Potentials of Aging
16. Primary Care for Elderly People: Why Do Doctors Find It So
Hard?
17. Breakthrough
New! 18. Marital History and the Burden of Cardiovascular
Disease in Midlife
19. The Disappearing Mind
New! 20. The Extent and Frequency of Abuse in the Lives of
Older Women and Their Relationship With Health Outcomes
UNIT 5. Retirement: American Dream or Dilemma?
21. How to Survive the First Year
110
Sociology
New! 22. The Big Squeeze
23. Old. Smart. Productive
New! 24. The Broken Promise
25. Work/Retirement Choices and Lifestyle Patterns of Older
Americans
UNIT 6. The Experience of Dying
26. More Hospice Patients Forgoing Sustenance
New! 27. The Grieving Process
28. Start the Conversation
New! 29. Mind Frames Towards Dying and Factors Motivating
Their Adoption by Terminally Ill Elders
UNIT 7. Living Environment in Later Life
30. (Not) the Same Old Story
31. A Home for the Rest of Your Life
New! 32. Nursing Homes: Business As Usual
New! 33. Declaration of Independents
UNIT 8. Social Policies, Programs, and Services for Older
Americans
34. Have Seniors Been Dealt a Bad Hand? Medicare’s Drug
Discount Cards
New! 35. Social Security’s 70th Anniversary: Surviving 20 Years
of Reform
36. Universalism Without the Targeting: Privatizing the Old-Age
Welfare State
New! 37. Coverage For All
38. Riding Into the Sunset
Sociology of Death
• A new chapter on end-of-life issues and decisions includes
discussion of informed consent, caregiver-patient relationships,
physician-assisted suicide, euthanasia, advance directives, and
financial planning.
• A new section on Celtic and Northern European cultural
traditions complements discussion of other cross-cultural
perspectives on death and dying.
• A new section on terrorism, including discussion of the impact
and aftermath of the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks.
• Expanded discussion of the role of biological and genetic
factors in suicide risk.
• Integrated discussion of developmental theories and the impact
of sociocultural influences on socialization and learning about
death.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 – Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change
Chapter 2 – Learning About Death: The Influence of Sociocultural
Forces
Chapter 3 – Perspectives on Death: Cross-Cultural and Historical
Chapter 4 – Health Care Systems: Patients, Staff, and Institutions
Chapter 5 – Death Systems: Matters of Public Policy
Chapter 6 – Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening Illness
Chapter 7 – End-of-Life Issues and Decisions
Chapter 8 – Survivors: Understanding the Experience of Loss
Chapter 9 – Last Rites: Funerals and Body Disposition
Chapter 10 – Death in the Lives of Children and Adolescents
Chapter 11 – Death in the Lives of Adults
Chapter 12 – Suicide
Chapter 13 – Risks of Death in the Modern World
Chapter 14 – Beyond Death / After Life
Chapter 15 – The Path Ahead: Personal and Social Choices
NEW
THE LAST DANCE: ENCOUNTERING DEATH AND
DYING
8th Edition
Lynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College and Albert Lee
Strickland
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340546-9 / MHID: 0-07-340546-9
The best-selling textbook in the field, The Last Dance offers
an interdisciplinary approach to the study of death and dying.
Integrating the experiential, scholarly, social, individual,
emotional, and intellectual dimensions of death and dying,
the eighth edition of this acclaimed text has been thoroughly
revised to offer cutting-edge and comprehensive coverage of
death studies. Together with its companion volumes, this new
edition of The Last Dance provides solid grounding in theory
and research, as well as practical application to students’
lives.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new companion text, A Journey Through the Last Dance,
helps students reexamine their attitudes and behaviors toward
death and dying, through activities, new ideas, terms, and
references to many resources.
• A new chapter on death systems highlights important public
policy issues.
111
Sociology
Sociology of Death – Readers
NEW
BEREAVEMENT 08/09
10th Edition
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339771-9 / MHID: 0-07-339771-7
27. When Students Kill Themselves, Colleges May Get the Blame
34. Six Feet Under
717.mhtml
Urban Sociology
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: URBAN
SOCIETY
13th Edition
CONTENTS
New! 4. Moving Toward Peace,
5. Technology and Death Policy
New! 7. How Much Is More Life Worth?,
New! 11. Knowledge of Sudden Infant Death Syndrome Prevention
Strategies in a Multicultural, Disadvantaged Community
16. Palliative Care
18. Spirituality and Religion in the “Art of Dying”,
Suicide
112
Fred Siegel, The Cooper Union for
Science and Art—New York
Harry Siegel
2008 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339743-6 / MHID: 0-07-339743-1
431.mhtml
This Thirteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: URBAN
SOCIETY provides convenient, inexpensive access to
website, www.dushkin.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Urban Frame
1. Fear of the City, 1783 to 1983
2. The Death and Life of America’s Cities
New! 3. Interview with Jane Jacobs
4. Broken Windows
UNIT 2. The Inner Life: City Stories
New! 5. Back to the Fortress of Solitude and the Millions of
Destroyed Men Who Are My Brothers
New! 6. My L.A.
Sociology
New! 7. Chicago, City of Champions
New! 8. A Play at Contrition
Race and Ethnicity – Readers
UNIT 3. Selling the New City: The Fight to Attract the Young
and the Restless
9. The Rise of the Creative Class
10. Too Much Froth
11. Packaging Cities
12. Urban Warfare
13. The Geography of Cool
14. The Best of Mates
NEW
UNIT 4. Urban Revival, Gentrification and the Changing Face
of the City
Part A. Urban Revival
15. Return to Center
16. The Fall and Rise of Bryant Park
17. Ground Zero in Urban Decline
18. Saving Buffalo From Extinction
New! 19. Movers and Shakers
Part B. Gentrification
20. The Gentry, Misjudged as Neighbors
New! 21. Red Hook—Wounded by Good Intentions
22. The Essence of Uptown
New! 23. In Parts of U.S. Northwest, a Changing Face
24. Rocking-Chair Revival
25. In New York City, Fewer Find They Can Make It
UNIT 5. Urban Economies, Politics and Policies
New! 26. Winds of Change—Tale of a Warehouse Shows How
Chicago Weathers a Decline
27. Bloomberg So Far
28. Mayors and Morality: Daley and Lindsay Then and Now
UNIT 6. Sprawl: Challenges to the Metropolitan Landscape
29. Patio Man and the Sprawl People
30. Downtown Struggles While Neighbor Thrives
31. Is Regional Government the Answer?
32. Unscrambling the City
33. Are Europe’s Cities Better?
UNIT 7. Urban Problems: Crime, Education, and Poverty
34. How an Idea Drew People Back to Urban Life
35. Windows Not Broken
36. Murder Mystery
37. Police Line—Do Cross
New! 38. The Black Family—40 Years of Lies
New! 39. Big Cities Balk Over Illegal Migrants
40. Segregation in New York Under a Different Name
41. An Inner-City Renaissance
42. The Rise, Fall, and Rise Again of Public Housing
UNIT 8. Cities and Disasters: Viewing 9/11 and Katrina, and
Preparing for What’s Next
43. A View From the South
New! 44. Debunking the Myths of Katrina
New! 45. The Gathering Storm
VIEWS IN RACE AND
ETHNICITY
6th Edition
Raymond D’Angelo, St Joseph’s
College and Herbert Douglas, Rowan
University
2008 / Softcover / 432 pgs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351506-9 / MHID: 0-07-351506-X
60x.mhtml
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN RACE AND
ETHNICITY, 6/e presents current controversial issues in a
CONTENTS
Part 1: CLASSICAL ISSUES IN RACE, ETHNICITY, AND
IMMIGRATION
New! ISSUE 1. Do Americans Need a Common Identity?
ISSUE 2. Does Immigration Contribute to a Better America?
ISSUE 3. Race Relations in the Nineteenth Century: Will
Accommodation Insure Progress?
ISSUE 4. Do Recent Immigration Trends Challenge Existing Ideas
of America’s White Identity?
ISSUE 5. Is Race Prejudice a Product of Group Position?
Part 2: RACE STILL MATTERS: PREJUDICE, DISCRIMINATION,
AND RACIAL MINORITIES
ISSUE 6. Do Minorities and Whites Engage in Self-Segregation?
ISSUE 7. Are Asian Americans a Model Minority?
New! ISSUE 8. Did Hurricane Katrina Expose Racism in New
Orleans?
New! ISSUE 9. Is the Emphasis on a Color-Blind Society an
Answer to Racism?
Part 3: SOCIAL AND POLITICAL ISSUES OF EDUCATION AND
MULTICULTURALISM
ISSUE 10. Are America’s Schools and Neighborhoods
Resegregating?
ISSUE 11. Should Race Be Included Among the Many Factors
Considered for Admission to Selective Colleges?
ISSUE 12. Is Affirmative Action Necessary to Achieve Racial
Equality in the United States Today?
New! ISSUE 13. Is Multiculturalism Compatible with Democratic
Values?
113
Sociology
Part 4: ISSUES FOR THE TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY
New! ISSUE 14. Is Today’s Immigration Debate Anti-Latino
(Racist)?
New! ISSUE 15. Does White Skin Privilege Still Exist in American
Society?
ISSUE 16. Is Racism a Permanent Feature of American Society?
ISSUE 17. Is Now the Time for Reparations for African
Americans?
ISSUE 18. Is Racial Profiling Defensible Public Policy?
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: RACE AND
ETHNIC RELATIONS
16th Edition
John A Kromkowski, Catholic
University of America
2008 / 256 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339745-0 / MHID: 0-07-339745-8
458.mhtml
This Sixteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: RACE AND
ETHNIC RELATIONS provides convenient, inexpensive
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Local Experiences of Racial and Ethnic Identity,
Communities, and Diversity in America
New! 1. Ethnic Goes Exurban
2. It’s Blarney Meets Chutzpah, over Red Wine and Green Beer
New! 3. A Shift in the Income Divide in Queens Puts Blacks
Ahead of Whites
4. `New Brooklyns’ Replace White Suburbs
5. Parishes in Transition: Holding on While Letting Go
6. In New York, Gospel Resounds in African Tongues
New! 7. In Brooklyn, an Evolving Ethnicity
New! 8. Mélange Cities
9. Greektown’s Rise No Myth
UNIT 2. Echoes from the Past and Pieces of Our Ambiguous
Legacies
10. The Slave History You Don’t Know
11. Paying for Jefferson’s Sins
New! 12. How the GOP Conquered the South
UNIT 3. Demography and Diversity
13. Racial Restrictions in the Law of Citizenship
New! 14. Ancestry 2000: Census 2000 Brief
114
New! 15. Forces That Shape Ethnic Opinion in What Ethnic
Americans Really Think
16. Zooming in on Diversity
New! 17. Intermarriage in the Second Generation: Choosing
Between Newcomers and Natives
UNIT 4. Immigration and the American Tradition
18. New Americans Fresh Off the Presses
19. The Diversity Visa Lottery—A Cycle of Unintended
Consequences in, Anna O. Law
New! 20. Immigration and America’s Future: A New Chapter
New! 21. More Muslims are Coming to U.S. after a Decline in
Wake of 9/11
New! 22. A True Believer in Immigrants
New! 23. The Hotel Africa
UNIT 5. Indigenous Ethnic Groups
New! 24. Who Is a Native American?
25. Guiding Spirit: American Indian Museum Curators Look
Beyond the Objects to the Power Within
26. Playing Indian at Halftime
UNIT 6. African Americans
New! 27. Who Is an African American?
New! 28. Cracking the Genomics Code
New! 29. Why I Gave Up on Hip-Hop
UNIT 7. Hispanic/Latina/o Americans
New! 30. The GOP’s Brownout
31. Inventing Hispanics: A Diverse Minority Resists Being Labeled
32. The Changing Face of Arlanadria
New! 33. 15 Years on the Bottom Rung
UNIT 8. Asian Americans
New! 34. To Be Asian in America
New! 35. Lands of Opportunity: Chinese Immigration
New! 36. Incarceration, Redress, Reconsiderations: Reviewing
the Story of the Japanese-Americans
New! 37. Thirty Years Later: Reviewing the Vietnamese-American
Experience
New! 38. Our Lady of La Vang Parish Turns 25
UNIT 9. Eastern European and Mediterranean Ethnics
New! 39. Miracle: American Polonia, Karol Wojtyla and the
Election of Pope John Paul II
40. Our Polish American Self Image: Responding to Its Detractors
New! 41. ‘Bursting with Pride’ in Little Italy
New! 42. Where We Stand on Issues
43. American Jewish History: A Chance to Reflect
New! 44. Young U.S. Muslims Strive for Harmony
New! 45. For ‘Borat’ Audience, First Come the Gasps, then the
Laughs
UNIT 10. Understanding Race and Ethnic Relations: Exploring
Challenges
New! 46. The Trouble with Tolerance
47. American Self-Interest and the Response to Genocide
48. Ethnic, Religious Fissures Deepen in Iraqi Society
49. Never Underestimate the Power of Ethnicity in Iraq
50. Correlated Conflicts: The Independent Nature of Ethnic
Strife
51. The Geometer of Race
New! 52. Trading Left Jabs
New! 53. Colorblind to the Reality of Race in America
Sociology
Political Sociology
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DEVELOPING WORLD 08/09
18th Edition
Robert J Griffiths, University of NC – Greensboro
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339756-6 / MHID: 0-07-339756-3
563.mhtml
This Eighteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS:
DEVELOPING WORLD provides convenient, inexpensive
29. Bringing the Wicked to the Dock
UNIT 4 Political Change
30. The 2005 Freedom House Survey
New! 31. Whose Iran?
New! 32. Turkey Face West
New! 33. Thailand’s Elusive Equilibrium
New! 34. Big Men, Big Fraud, Big Trouble
New! 35. Congo’s Peace
New! 36. Africa: How We Killed Our Dreams of Freedom
New! 37. The Year of the Ballot
New! 38. The Lost Continent
UNIT 5 Population, Resources, Environment and Health
New! 39. Booms, Busts, and Echoes
New! 40. Poor Nations to Bear Brunt as World Warms
41. Why We Owe So Much to Victims of Disaster
New! 42. The Challenge of Global Health
New! 43. A Lifelong Struggle for a Generation
44. Reversal of Fortune
45. Ten Years’ Hard Labour
46. Educating Girls, Unlocking Development
47. Women, Islam and the New Iraq
48. Women and Warlords,
New! 49. The Meaning of Freedom
New! 50. Let Women Rule
Social Inequality /
Social Stratification
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Understanding the Developing World
1. How to Help Poor Countries
2. The Utopian Nightmare
New! 3. Africa’s Village of Dreams
4. Today’s Golden Age of Poverty Reduction
5. Development as Poison: Rethinking the Western Model of
Modernity
New! 6. Why God is Winning
UNIT 2 International Political Economy
7. Climbing Back
New! 8. The India Model
New! 9. Industrial Revolution 2.0
New! 10. In the Twilight of Doha
11. Social Justice and Global Trade
12. Cotton: The Huge Moral Issue
New! 13. We Need Trade Justice, Not Free Trade
New! 14. Ranking the Rich
New! 15. Foreign Aid II
16. Making Aid Work
17. Food Sovereignty: Ending World Hunger in Our Time
18. The Ten-Cent Solution
New! 19. Millions for Millions
NEW
SOCIAL STRATIFICATION AND INEQUALITY
7th Edition
Harold R Kerbo, California Polytechnic State University
2009 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338007-0 / MHID: 0-07-338007-5
UNIT 3 Conflict and Instability
20. The End of War?
New! 21. Iraq’s Civil War
New! 22. When the Shiites Rise
New! 23. Letter From Afghanistan
New! 24. Pakistan and the Islamists
25. In Villages Across India, Maoist Guerrillas Widen ‘People’s War’
New! 26. A Hopeful Wind of Change
New! 27. Anatomy of an Unending Conflict
New! 28. Call in the Blue Helmets
115
Sociology
Sociological Theory
NEW
THE SOCIAL CONSTRUCTION OF DIFFERENCE
AND INEQUALITY: RACE, CLASS, GENDER AND
SEXUALITY
4th Edition
NEW
Tracy E Ore, St Cloud State University
2009 / 736 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338008-7 / MHID: 0-07-338008-3
READINGS IN SOCIAL THEORY
5th Edition
Website: http://mhhe.com/ore4
James Farganis, Vassar College
NEW
THE MEANING OF DIFFERENCE: AMERICAN
CONSTRUCTIONS OF RACE, SEX AND GENDER,
SOCIAL CLASS, AND SEXUAL ORIENTATION
5th Edition
Karen E Rosenblum, George Mason University
Toni-Michelle C Travis, George Mason University
2009 / 544 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338005-6 / MHID: 0-07-338005-9
Website: http://mhhe.com/rosenblum5
2008 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352813-7 / MHID: 0-07-352813-7
This highly regarded anthology of primary readings in
sociological theory covers the major theorists and schools
from classic to contemporary, modernist, and postmodernist,
in a chronological organization. Its comprehensive coverage
and excellent introductions make this book appealing as a
main text for professors who want to encourage students to
read and interpret original sources, or as a supplement for
those who use a traditional main text.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New readings include Talcott Parsons, The System of Modern
Societies, Ch. 7; Peter Berger, The Sacred Canopy; Candace
West and Don Zimmerman, “Doing Gender,” Ch. 10; Arlie
Hochschild, “Exploring the Managed Heart,” Ch.11; Patricia
Hill Collins: “Is the Personal Still Political?,” Ch.12; and Jurgen
Habermas, “Religion in the Public Sphere,” Ch. 13.
• Selections by Dahrendorf, Mead, and Schutz have been
condensed, making them more accessible to students.
• Readings by Parsons, Berger, and Habermas have been replaced
by alternative selections by the same authors.
• The selection by Zweigenhaft and Domhoff, "The Ironies of
Diversity," has been revised and updated.
CONTENTS
Introduction: The Classic Tradition To Post-Modernism: An
Overview
Part One: THE CLASSIC TRADITION
1. Karl Marx: Alienation, Class Struggle, and Class Consciousness
2. Émile Durkheim: Anomie and Social Integration Introduction
3. Max Weber: The Iron Cage
4. Georg Simmel: Dialectic of Individual and Society
6. W.E.B. Du Bois: Double Consciousness and The Public Intellectual
Part Two: CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
7. Functionalism
8. Conflict Theory
9. Exchange Theory and Rational Choice
10. Phenomenological Sociology and Ethnomethodology
11. Symbolic Interaction
12. Feminist Theory
Part Three: MODERNITY AND POST-MODERNITY
13: Critical Theory
14. Post-Modernism
116
Sociology
References
Permissions Acknowlegments
Index
NEW
CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL
THEORY
5th Edition
NEW
George Ritzer, University of
Maryland—College Park
MODERN SOCIOLOGICAL
THEORY
7th Edition
2008 / 552 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352817-5 / MHID: 0-07-352817-X
The fifth edition of Classical Sociological Theory by George
Ritzer, one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory,
gives readers a comprehensive overview of the major classical
theorists and schools of sociological thought. Key theories are
integrated with biographical sketches of theorists, and theories
are placed in their historical and intellectual context. This helps
students to better understand the original works of classical
authors as well as to compare and contrast classical theories.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• The chapter on Marx includes more examples and historical
context, and focuses more on exploitation and on Marx’s
materialist conception of history.
• All chapters have been updated to include current research on
classical and contemporary theory and theorists. Myriad entries
have been added to the References that reflect the most recent
thinking in the field.
• A new Chapter 3 on Alexis de Tocqueville gives Tocqueville the
credit he deserves for his work revolving around the interrelated
issues of equality, centralization, and freedom. Issues of great
contemporary concern in sociology and social theory, including
individualism and civil society, are examined thoroughly.
CONTENTS
George Ritzer, University of Maryland--College Park
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340410-3 / MHID: 0-07-340410-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110177-6 / MHID: 0-07-110177-2 [IE]
Available: May 2007
The seventh edition of Modern Sociological Theory by
George Ritzer, one of the foremost authorities on sociological
theory, gives readers a comprehensive overview of the major
contemporary schools of sociological thought. Key theories
are integrated with biographical sketches of theorists, and
theories are placed in their historical and intellectual context.
This helps students to better understand the original works and
helps them appreciate the diversity of contemporary theory.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new section in Chapter 1 on Alexis de Tocqueville gives
Tocqueville the credit he deserves for his work revolving around
the interrelated issues of equality, centralization, and freedom.
Biographical and Autobiographical Sketches
Preface
• A new Chapter 10 combines micro-macro and agency-structure
integration in a more compact discussion of these synthetic efforts.
Part I. INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
Chapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early
Years
Chapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later
Years
• A new Chapter 12 on globalization covers the rise of
globalization theories in the early twenty-first century. It discusses
the major economic, political, and cultural theories.
Part II: CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
Chapter 3. Alexis de Tocqueville
Chapter 4. August Comte
Chapter 5. Herbert Spencer
Chapter 6. Karl Marx
Chapter 7. Emile Durkheim
Chapter 8. Max Weber
Chapter 9. Georg Simmel
Chapter 10. Early Women Sociologists and Classical Sociological
Theory, 1830-1930
Chapter 11. W.E.B. DuBois
Chapter 12. Thorstein Veblen
Chapter 13. Karl Mannheim
Chapter 14. George Herbert Mead
Chapter 15. Alfred Schutz
Chapter 16. Talcott Parsons
• A new Chapter 14, on the cutting edge developments in
contemporary theory, discusses actor-network theory, practice
theory, queer theory, and critical theories of race and racism.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early
Years
Chapter 2. A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later
Years <BR
Part II: MODERN SOCIOLOGIAL THEORY: THE MAJOR
SCHOOLS
Chapter 3. Structural Functionalism, Neofunctionalism, and
Conflict Theory
Chapter 4. Varieties of Neo-Marxian Theory
Chapter 5. Systems Theory
Chapter 6. Symbolic Interactionism
Chapter 7. Ethnomethodology
117
Sociology
Chapter 8. Exchange, Network, and Rational Choice Theories
Chapter 9. Modern Feminist Theory
Part III: RECENT INTEGRATIVE DEVELOPMENTS
SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
Chapter 10. Micro-Macro and Agency-Structure Integration
IN
Part IV: FROM MODERN TO POSTMODERN SOCIAL THEORY
Chapter 11. Contemporary Theories of Modernity
Chapter 12. Globalization Theory
Chapter 13. Structuralism, Poststructuralism, and the Emergence
of Postmodern Social Theory
Chapter 14. Cutting Edge Developments in Contemporary Theory
Appendix: Sociological Metatheorizing and a Metatheoretical
Schema for Analyzing Sociological Theory
Part II: MODERN SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY: THE MAJOR
SCHOOLS
Chapter 6: A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Later
Years
Chapter 7: Structural Functionalism, Neofunctionalism, and
Conflict Theory
Chapter 8: Varieties of Neo-Marxian Theory
Chapter 9: Systems Theory
Chapter 10: Symbolic Interactionism
Chapter 11: Ethnomethodology
Chapter 12: Exchange, Network, and Rational Choice Theories
Chapter 13: Contemporary Feminist Theory
Part III: RECENT INTEGRATIVE DEVELOPMENTS IN SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
Chapter 14: Micro-Macro Integration and Agency-Structure
Integration
NEW
SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
7th Edition
George Ritzer, University of MarylandCollege Park
2008 / 816 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352818-2 / MHID: 0-07-352818-8
The seventh edition of Sociological Theory by George Ritzer,
one of the foremost authorities on sociological theory, gives
readers a comprehensive overview of the major theorists and
schools of sociological thought. Key theories are integrated
with biographical sketches of theorists, and theories are
placed in their historical and intellectual context. This helps
students to better understand the original works of classical
and modern theorists as well as to compare and contrast the
latest substantive theories.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• A new section in Chapter 1 on Alexis de Tocqueville gives
Tocqueville the credit he deserves for his work revolving around
the interrelated issues of equality, centralization, and freedom.
• A new Chapter 14 combines micro-macro and agency-structure
integration in a more compact discussion of these synthetic
efforts.
• A new Chapter 16 on globalization covers the rise of globalization
theories in the early twenty-first century and discusses the major
economic, political, and cultural theories.
• A new Chapter 18 on the cutting edge developments in
contemporary theory discusses actor-network theory, practice
theory, queer theory, and critical theories of race and racism.
CONTENTS
Part I: CLASSICAL SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY
Chapter 1: A Historical Sketch of Sociological Theory: The Early Years
118
Chapter 2: Karl Marx
Chapter 3: Emile Durkheim
Chapter 4: Max Weber
Chapter 5: Georg Simmel
Part IV: FROM MODERN TO POSTMODERN SOCIAL THEORY
(AND BEYOND)
Chapter 15: Contemporary Theories of Modernity
Chapter 16: Globalization Theory
Chapter 17: Structuralism, Poststructuralism, and the Emergence
of Postmodern Social Theory
Appendix: Sociological Metatheorizing and a Metatheoretical
Schema for Analyzing Sociological Theory
CONTEMPORARY SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY AND
ITS CLASSICAL ROOTS: THE BASICS
2nd Edition
George Ritzer, University of Maryland—College Park
2007 / 320 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-299759-0 / MHID: 0-07-299759-1
(No Selling Rights)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110732-7 / MHID: 0-07-110732-0 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ritzer2
This text is the teaching solution for instructors who need a
brief, accessible text for sociological theory. An affordable
alternative to a standard text, this volume still includes a range
of pedagogical features; it is concise yet comprehensive,
informative, and engaging for a wide range of students.
CONTENTS
Chapter 2. Classical Theories-I
Chapter 3. Classical Theories-II
Chapter 4. Contemporary Grand Theories-I
Chapter 5. Contemporary Grand Theories-II
Chapter 6. Contemporary Theories of Everyday Life
Chapter 7. Contemporary Integrative Theories
Chapter 8. Contemporary Feminist Theories (by Patricia Madoo
Lengermann and Jill Niebrugge)
Chapter 9. Postmodern Grand Theories
Chapter 10. Globalization Theory
Sociology
Sociology of Gender
NEW
RECONSTRUCTING GENDER: A MULTICULTURAL
ANTHOLOGY
5th Edition
Estelle Disch, University of Mass-Boston
2009 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-338006-3 / MHID: 0-07-338006-7
Website: http://mhhe.com/disch5
Social Work / Welfare
SOCIAL POLICY WITH CASE STUDY CD AND
ETHICS PRIMER
Rosemay K Chapin, University of Kansas—Lawrence
2007
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-327497-3 / MHID: 0-07-327497-6
CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE
WITH ETHICS PRIMER, CASE STUDY CD AND
POWERWEB
Martha P Dewees, University of Vermont
2007
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319575-9 / MHID: 0-07-319575-8
The second of five books in McGraw-Hill’s new series NEW
DIRECTIONS IN SOCIAL WORK, this text helps translate
the guiding theoretical perspectives of social justice, human
rights, and critical social construction into purposeful social
work practice. Each new copy of the text is packaged free
with a companion interactive CD-ROM offering case studies
based on actual practice situations, as well as a concise ethics
primer!
CONTENTS
Understanding Social Work Practice
Exploring the Practice Purpose
Applying Values and Ethics to Practice
Engaging in Relationship: Making the Connection
Assessing and Planning: Deepening the Dialogue
Intervening in Context: Initiating the Plan
Social Work with Groups: Tapping the Power of Connection
Exploring the Family Story
Working in and with the Organization
Working in and with the Community
Negotiating Troubling Contexts
Ending the Work, Consolidating the Gains, and Evaluating
Practice
References
Credits
Glossary/Index
Website: http://mhhe.com/chapin1
The fourth of five innovative texts in McGraw-Hill’s new
series NEW DIRECTIONS IN SOCIAL WORK, this book
examines the process of defining need, analyzing social
policy, and developing new policy. A clear philosophical
base and a common theoretical framework underlie the
discussion of each component of the policy process. Four
themes are interwoven throughout the book: the importance
of thinking critically about social policy, the benefits of using
the strengths perspective in policy analysis and development,
the critical role social policy plays in all areas of practice, and
the absolute responsibility of every social worker to engage
in policy practice.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Social Work and Social Policy: A Strengths
Perspective
Chapter 2: The Historical Context: Basic Concepts and Early
Influences
Chapter 3: The Historical Context: Development of Our Current
Welfare System
Chapter 4: The Economic and Political Context
Chapter 5: Tools for Determining Need and Analyzing Social
Policy
Chapter 6: Social Policy Development and Policy Practice
Chapter 7: Civil Rights
Chapter 8: Income and Asset-Based Social Policies and
Programs
Chapter 9: Policies and Programs For Children and Families
Chapter 10: Health and Mental Health Policies and Programs
Chapter 11: Elder Policy
Chapter 12: Focus on Our Future: Policy Challenges
119
Sociology
Social Psychology
NEW
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
9th Edition
2008 / Hardcover / 864 pgs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353189-2 / MHID: 0-07-353189-8
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-331026-8 / MHID: 0-07-331026-3
(with Social Sense Student CD)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-128670-1 / MHID: 0-07-128670-5
[IE with CD]
David Myers’ Social Psychology continues to set the standard
by which other Social Psychology texts are judged. Its
renowned author’s engaging writing style and unique, intimate
voice make the text compelling without being simplistic. The
organization logically moves the student through the study of
how people think about, influence, and relate to one another,
with an appropriate balance of basic research and application.
This edition features additional contemporary research,
supplemented by video clips and vignettes that demonstrate
social psychology’s relevance.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• An increased emphasis on research and the story behind it,
including extensive revision of Chapter 1 (Research Methods)
and new "Research Close-Up" boxes.
• The Ninth Edition has been edited for conciseness and clarity
which will make this edition nearly 10% shorter than the previous
edition.
• PrepCenter helps instructors build classroom presentations whenever, where-ever, and how-ever they want. In one convenient
to use as is, or to drop into a PowerPoint slideshow or a course
webpage. Instructors can search for individual assets the way they
want to search—by chapter, by concept, or by type of media.
• "Focus On" boxes have been updated to emphasize news and
current events related to topics in social psychology, as well as
the real life role of social psychology.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introducing Social Psychology
Part 1: SOCIAL THINKING
Chapter 2: The Self in a Social World
Chapter 3: Social Beliefs and Judgments
Chapter 4: Behavior and Attitudes
120
Chapter 5: Genes, Culture, and Gender
Chapter 6: Conformity
Chapter 7: Persuasion
Chapter 8: Group Influence
Chapter 9: Prejudice: Disliking Others
Chapter 10: Aggression: Hurting Others
Chapter 11: Attraction and Intimacy: Liking and Loving Others
Chapter 12: Helping
Chapter 13: Conflict and Peacemaking
Part 4: APPLYING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Chapter 14: Social Psychology in the Clinic
Chapter 15: Social Psychology in Court
Chapter 16: Social Psychology and the Sustainable Future
Epilogue
Glossary
References
Acknowledgments
Name Index
Subject Index
EXPLORING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
2007
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-322887-7 / MHID: 0-07-322887-7
(with PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-353187-8 / MHID: 0-07-353187-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110300-8 / MHID: 0-07-110300-7 [IE]
This brief, modular introduction to social psychology offers
streamlined focus on issues such as belief and illusion,
prejudice and diversity, and love and hate. The brevity of
each of the book’s 31 stand-alone modules makes this the
perfect text for covering the core concepts in the field. The
new edition includes expanded coverage of cultural diversity
and the most current research from the 21st century.
CONTENTS
Part One: INTRODUCING SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Module 1 Doing Social Psychology
Module 2 Did You Know It All Along?
Part Two: SOCIAL THINKING
Module 3 Self Concept: Who Am I?
Module 4 Self-Serving Bias
Module 5 The Power of Positive Thinking
Module 6 The Fundamental Attribution Error
Module 7 Intuition: The Power and Limits of Our Inner Knowing
Module 8 Reasons For Unreason
Module 9 Behavior and Belief
Module 10 Clinical Intuition: The Perils of Psychologizing
Module 11 Clinical Therapy: The Powers of Social Cognition**
Part Three: SOCIAL INFLUENCE
Module 12 Human Nature and Cultural Diversity
Module 13 Gender, Genes, and Culture
Module 14 How Nice People Get Corrupted
Module 15 Two Routes To Persuasion
Module 16 Indoctrination and Inoculation
Sociology
Module 17 The Mere Presence of Others
Module 18 Many Hands Make Diminished Responsibility
Module 19 Doing Together What We Would Never Do Alone
Module 20 How Groups Intensify Decisions
Module 21 Power To The Person
Part Four: SOCIAL RELATIONS
Module 22 The Dislike of Diversity
Module 23 The Roots of Prejudice
Module 24 The Nature and Nurture of Aggression
Module 25 Do The Media Influence Social Behavior?
Module 26 Who Likes Whom?
Module 27 The Ups and Downs of Love
Module 28 Causes of Conflict
Module 29 Blessed Are The Peacemakers
Module 30 When Do People Help?
Module 31 The Social Psychology of Sustainability
Social Psychology – Readers
NEW
PSYCHOLOGY
3rd Edition
Jason A Nier, Connecticut College
2009 / 448 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351531-1 / MHID: 0-07-351531-0
SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
4th Edition
Stephen L. Franzoi, Marquette University
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-296747-0 / MHID: 0-07-296747-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-319183-6 / MHID: 0-07-319183-3
(with Social Sense CD and PowerWeb)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-321345-3 / MHID: 0-07-321345-4
(with OLC)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111934-4 / MHID: 0-07-111934-5
[IE with CD and PowerWeb]
This distinctive, theory-driven text uses “The Self” as a theme
to give students a meaningful context for exploring the key
concepts of social psychology. New “Applications” sections
have been incorporated into most chapters, and new “Featured
Study” sections at the end of every chapter summarize the
purpose, method, and results of recently published scientific
articles. Retaining the emphasis on methodology, the fourth
edition also continues the tradition of strong gender coverage,
while expanding the coverage of social cognition and social
neuroscience and introducing the new SocialSense CDROM.
CONTENTS
1. Introducing Social psychology
2. Research Methods in Social Psychology
3. The Self
4. Self-Presentation and Person Perception
5. Thinking About Our Social World
6. Attitudes
7. Persuasion
8. Prejudice and Discrimination
9. Social Influence
10. Group Behavior
11. Interpersonal Attraction
12. onships
13. Aggression
14. Prosocial Behavior: Helping Others
NEW
PSYCHOLOGY
7th Edition
Karen G Duffy, State University
College – Geneseo
Gary Krolikowski, Empire State
College – Saratoga Spg
2008 / 208 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339739-9 / MHID: 0-07-339739-3
393.mhtml
This Seventh Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: SOCIAL
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Research Issues
New! 1. How to Be a Wise Consumer of Psychological Research
New! 2. Ethnic and Racial Health Disparities Research: Issues
and Problems
UNIT 2. The Self
New! 3. Self-Esteem Development Across the Lifespan
4. Self-Concordance and Subjective Well-Being in Four Cultures
UNIT 3. Social Cognition and Social Perception
Part A. Social Cognition
121
Sociology
6. How Social Perception Can Automatically Influence Behavior
New! 7. Flashbulb Memories: How Psychological Research Shows
That Our Most Powerful Memories May Be Untrustworthy
New! 8. Culture Affects Reasoning, Categorization
Part B. Social Perception
New! 9. The Social Nature of Perception and Action
New! 10. Perception of Faces and Bodies
UNIT 4. Attitudes
New! 11. Implicit Discrimination
12. The Science and Practice of Persuasion
New! 13. In Search of Pro-Americanism
UNIT 5. Social Influence
New! 14. “Thin Slices” of Life
15. Abu Ghraib Brings A Cruel Reawakening
16. Persuasion: What Will It Take to Convince You?
UNIT 6. Social Relationships
Part A. Interpersonal Relationships
New! 17. Contagious Behavior
New! 18. Competent Jerks, Lovable Fools, and the Formation of
Social Networks
Part B. Intimate Relationships
19. Isn’t She Lovely?
20. If It’s Easy Access That Really Makes You Click, Log On Here
New! 21. Brokeback Mountain: A Gay and a Universal Love Story
UNIT 7. Social Biases
Part A. Prejudice
22. The Self-Protective Properties of Stigma: Evolution of a
Modern Classic
New! 23. Leaving Race Behind
Part B. Stereotyping
New! 24. Lowered Expectations
25. Change of Heart
26. Thin Ice: “Stereotype Threat” and Black College Students
UNIT 8. Violence and Aggression
New! 27. A Bicultural Perspective on Worldviews
New! 28. Anger on the Road
29. Bullying: It Isn’t What It Used To Be
30. Influencing, Negotiating Skills, and Conflict-Handling: Some
Additional Research and Reflections
UNIT 9. Altruism, Helping and Cooperation
New! 31. The Compassionate Instinct
New! 32. Gift Giving’s Hidden Strings
33. Trends in the Social Psychological Study of Justice
UNIT 10. Group Processes
Part A. Leadership
New! 34. Seven Transformations of Leadership
35. When Followers Become Toxic
Part B. Groups
New! 36. To Err Is Human
37. Senate Intelligence Report: Groupthink Viewed as Culprit in
Move to War
New! 38. Sports Complex: The Science Behind Fanatic Behavior
122
PSYCHOLOGY
2nd Edition
Jason A. Nier, Connecticut College
2007 / Softcover / 432 pgs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351503-8 / MHID: 0-07-351503-5
035.mhtml
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
CONTENTS
Part 1: ETHICAL ISSUES IN SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
ISSUE 1. Is Deception of Human Participants Ethical?
ISSUE 2. Should Social Psychologists Try to Solve Social
Problems?
Part 2: SOCIAL COGNITION
ISSUE 3. Are Our Social Perceptions Often Inaccurate?
ISSUE 4. Does Cognitive Dissonance Explain Why Behavior Can
Change Attitudes?
New! ISSUE 5. Applying Social Psychology: Are Self-Esteem
Programs Misguided?
ISSUE 6. Do Positive Illusions Lead to Healthy Behavior?
ISSUE 7. Can People Accurately Detect Lies?
ISSUE 8. Are Repressed Memories Real?
New! ISSUE 9. Can Social Psychological Research Help Explain
the Abu Ghraib Prison Scandal?
ISSUE 10. Do Milgram’s Obedience Experiments Help Explain
the Nature of the Holocaust?
ISSUE 11. Does the Stanford Prison Experiment Help Explain the
Effects of Imprisonment?
ISSUE 12. Is Subliminal Persuasion a Myth?
ISSUE 13. Can People Really Be Brainwashed?
New! ISSUE 14. Is Stereotyping Inevitable?
New! ISSUE 15. Does the Implicit Association Test (IAT) Measure
Racial Prejudice?
New! ISSUE 16. Can Stereotypes Lead to Accurate Perceptions
of Others?
ISSUE 17. Does True Altruism Exist?
ISSUE 18. Does Media Violence Cause Aggression?
Sociology
Research Methods
NEED TO KNOW: SOCIAL SCIENCE RESEARCH
METHODS
Lisa J. McIntyre, Washington State University — Pullman
2005 / 400 pages / Softcover
ISBN-13: 978-0-7674-1317-6 / MHID: 0-7674-1317-2
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-123258-6 / MHID: 0-07-123258-3 [IE]
CONTENTS
Chapter One: Why You Need to Know
Chapter Two: The Nature of the Scientific Enterprise
Chapter Three: The Logic of Inquiry
Chapter Four The Vocabulary of Science
Chapter Five: Doing the Right Thing Ethics in Social Research
Chapter Six: Sampling
Chapter Seven: Elements of Research Design
Chapter Eight: Experiments
Chapter Nine: Survey Research: Part 1: The Art of Asking Questions
Chapter Ten: Survey Research: Part 2: Design and Implementation
Chapter Eleven: Unobtrusive Methods
Chapter Twelve: Qualitative Research Methods
Appendix A: Using the Internet
Appendix B: American Sociological Association, Ethical Prnciples
Appendix C: Tables and Figures
Appendix D: Statistics
Appendix E: Writing Research Reports
Index/Glossary
Bibliography
QUALITATIVE METHODS IN SOCIAL RESEARCH
Kristin Esterberg, University of Massachusetts-Lowell
ISBN-13: 978-0-7674-1560-6 / MHID: 0-7674-1560-4
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-113129-2 / MHID: 0-07-113129-9 [IE]
CONTENTS
1. What Is Social Research? Some Practical and Theoretical
Concerns
/ What Is Social Research? / Why Do Research? / Developing
a Sociological Imagination / The Research Process: Moving
Between Theories and Data / Paradigms / Traditional Approaches
to Social Research (Positivism) / Challenges to Traditional Ways
of Doing Social Science / You Are Here: Locating the Self
in Social Research / Naturalism / Social Constructionist and
Interpretive Approaches / Feminist and Other Critical Approaches
/ Postmodernism / Questions for Thought / Exercises / Suggestions
for Further Reading
Research / Feminist Approaches to Research Ethics / Institutional
Review Boards / Ethical Concerns in Qualitative Research /
Practical Concerns in Protecting Privacy / Conclusion / Questions
for Thought / Exercises / Suggestions for Further Reading
4. Observation: Participant and Otherwise
/ Participating and Observing / The Self as Instrument / Thinking
About Settings: Selecting a Site / Getting In, Gaining Access /
Emotions in The Field / Writing Field Notes / Leaving the Field
/ Focusing / Questions for Thought / Exercises / Suggestions for
Further Reading
5. Interviews
/ Interviewing as a Relationship / Types of Interviews / Closeness
and Distance In Interview Situations / Developing Relationships /
Getting Ready to Begin: Preparing For The Interview / Before the
Interview / During the Interview / After The Interview / Group
Interviews / Making Meaning / Questions for Thought / Exercises
/ Suggestions for Further Reading
6. Unobtrusive Measures: Analyzing Texts And Material
Artifacts
/ Physical Traces / Material Artifacts / Documents and Records /
Electronic Texts / Historical Research / Questions for Thought /
Exercises / Suggestions for Further Reading 7. Action Research /
Varieties of Action Research / Research for Whom? / Empowerment
/ The Process of Action Research: Look, Think, Act / Identifying
Stakeholders / Formulating a Collective Problem / Think:
Exploring the Problem / Act: Defining an Agenda for Action /
Sharing the Results / Some Problems and Opportunities in Action
Research / Questions for Thought / Exercises / Suggestions for
Further Reading
8. Making Sense of Data / Making Sense of Qualitative Data: A
Process of Making Meaning
/ Managing Data / Getting Intimate With Your Data / Coding /
Memos / Asking Questions / Developing an Analysis / Content
Analysis / Semiotic Analysis / Grounding the Analysis / ComputerAssisted Data Analysis / Questions for Thought / Exercises /
Suggestions for Further Reading
9. Narrative Analysis
/ What Is a Narrative? / The Structure of Stories / Other Structures
of Stories / Structure, Story, and Social Context / Some Practical
Advice / Evaluating Narratives / Questions for Thought / Exercises
/ Suggestions for Further Reading
10. Writing
/ Writing as a Process / Audiences and Venues / Useful Ways
to Structure Qualitative Research / Making Writing Vivid /
Other Genres of Qualitative Research / Questions for Thought /
Exercises / Suggestions for Further Reading
Appendix A American Sociological
Association Code of Ethics
Appendix B Sample Informed Consent
Form
References
2. Strategies for Beginning Research
/ Getting Started: Where to Begin? / Where Do Ideas Come
From? / A Problem Is Always a Problem for Someone / Deciding
What to Research / Developing a Research Strategy / Reading the
Literature / Summary: The Research Process in View / Questions
for Thought / Exercises / Additional Readings
3. Ethical Issues
/ Sleeping Well at Night: A Practical Ethics / Ethical Codes /
Confidentiality and Informed Consent / Controversies in Social
123
Sociology
Statistics
NEW
THE STATISTICAL IMAGINATION
2nd Edition
Ferris J. Ritchey, University of Alabama At Birmingham
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-294304-7 / MHID: 0-07-294304-1
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-333160-7 / MHID: 0-07-333160-0
(w/SPSS 14.0)
This basic social science statistics text uses illustrations and
exercises for sociology, social work, political science, and
criminal justice. Praised for a writing style that takes the
anxiety out of statistics courses, the author explains basic
statistical principles through a variety of engaging exercises,
each designed to illuminate the unique theme of examining
society both creatively and logically. In an effort to make the
study of statistics relevant to students of the social sciences,
the author encourages readers to interpret the results of
calculations in the context of more substantive social issues,
while continuing to value precise and accurate research. The
text includes computer-based assignments with over 10 data
sets for use with the free Student Version SPSS 14.0 CD-ROM
that accompanies each new copy of the book.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• Treating statistics as a skill learned best by doing, all chapters
have additional pencil-and-paper exercises with complete grading
keys. Four complete sets of 6 to 8 exercises in each chapter. More
exercises are referenced to research literature.
• "How to" and "Solution" boxes provide students with guides for
working chapter exercises.
• Illustrations and exercises referenced to U.S. Government
documents and data, such as from the U.S. Census Bureau
population data and Department of Justice crime statistics, are
updated to the most recently available data.
• Additional real-life and research-based illustrations introduce
chapters and concepts, such as data from the Environmental
Protection Agency (Chapter 3) and stress among persons displaced
by Hurricane Katrina (10).
• To provide a smoother transition for Chapters 6 through 10, the
t-distribution table, degrees of freedom, and critical t-scores was
moved from Chapters 6 and 7 to Chapter 10, where the small
sample means test is presented.
• The web site includes Chapter Extensions with slightly advanced
materials (such as calculation of statistical power, multiple
correlation and regression, and N-Way ANOVA with interaction
terms)to accommodate first-level graduate courses.
• Chapter 2 contains a new section entitled: "Distinguishing Level
of Measurement and Unit of Measure," and Chapter 14 has a new
section entitled: "Understanding the Pearson's r Formulation."
CONTENTS
1. The Statistical Imagination
2. Statistical Analysis: Error Management and Control
3. Charts and Graphs: A Picture Says A Thousand Words
4. Measuring Averages
124
5 Measuring Dispersion or Spread in a Distribution of Scores
6. Probability Theory and the Normal Probability Distribution
7. Using Probability Theory to Produce Sampling Distributions
8. Parameter Estimation Using Confidence Intervals
9. Hypothesis Testing
10. Single Sample Hypothesis Tests: Establishing the Representativeness of Samples
11. Bivariate Relationships: T-Test for Comparing the Means of
Two Groups
12. Analysis of Variance: Differences Among Means of Three or
More Groups
13. Nominal Variables: The Chi-Square and Binomial
Distributions
14. Correlation and Regression Part 1: Concepts and
Calculations
15. Correlation and Regression Part 2: Hypothesis Testing and
Aspects of a Relationship
16. Rank Order Correlation Between Two Ordinal Variables
Appendices:
Appendix A--Review of Basic Mathematical Operations
Appendix B--Statistical Probability Tables
Appendix C--Answers to Selected Chapter Exercises
Appendix D--Guide to SPSS for Windows
SPSS / SAS
READY, SET, GO! A STUDENT GUIDE TO SPSS®
13.0 AND 14.0 FOR WINDOWS®
2nd Edition
Thomas Pavkov, Purdue Univ-Calumet-Hammond
2007 / 96 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312665-4 / MHID: 0-07-312665-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125297-3 / MHID: 0-07-125297-5
[IE - without CD]
This guide features concise instructions for accessing and
using SPSS for Windows. Ready, Set, Go! is more than a
reference book for versions 13.0 and 14.0; through ten
guided assignments, students learn about statistical analysis
of data while also learning the steps in the research process.
The students are guided through assignments such as using
frequency distributions, performing the t test, using the
one-way ANOVA procedure, computing a correlation, and
computing chi-square function.
CONTENTS
Preface
Assignment 1 Learning the Basics of SPSS
Assignment 2 Looking at Frequency Distributions and Descriptive
Statistics
Assignment 3 Presenting Data in Graphic Form
Assignment 4 Testing Research Hypotheses for Two Independent
Samples
Assignment 5 Testing Research Hypotheses About Two Related
Sampled
Assignment 6 Comparing Independent Samples with One-Way
ANOVA
Assignment 7 Comparing Related Samples with One-Way ANOVA
Assignment 8 Measuring the Simple Relationship Between Two
Variables
Sociology
Assignment 9 Describing the Linear Relationship Between Two
Variables
Assignment 10 Assessing the Association Between Two
Categorical Variables Appendix
Entering Data Using Programs Other Than SPSS
Juvenile Delinquency
NEW
Chapter 7. Sociological Theory: Labeling and Conflict Explanations
Chapter 8. Developmental Theories
Chapter 9. Female Delinquency Theories
Chapter 10. The Family and Delinquency
Chapter 11. Schools and Delinquency
Chapter 12. Peer Group and Gang Delinquency
Chapter 13. Police and Delinquency
Chapter 14. The Juvenile Court
Chapter 15. Juvenile Corrections
Appendix
Constitutional Due Process: Selected Amendments to the United
States Constitution
References
Glossary
Indexes
Name Index
Subject Index
Photo Credits
DELINQUENCY IN SOCIETY
7th Edition
Robert M Regoli, University of
Colorado-Boulder
John D Hewitt, Grand Valley State
University
2009 / 608 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340154-6 / MHID: 0-07-340154-4
Drugs & Society
NEW
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/regoli7
DRUGS IN AMERICAN SOCIETY
7th Edition
This conversational text makes delinquency interesting to read
about. Delinquency in Society provides a critical look at a very
serious problem through a clear and thorough presentation
of the theories of delinquency. In accessible, student-friendly
language the authors prepare their readers to understand
all facets of delinquency, including the history, institutional
context, and societal reactions to delinquent behavior, the
major biological, psychological, and sociological theories of
behavior, and the variety of policy implications derived from
those theories.
2008 / 512 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-340149-2 / MHID: 0-07-340149-8
Available: May 2007
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Website: www.mhhe.com/goode7
• Window on Delinquency boxes have been updated or added
in almost every chapter and discuss topics of current relevance
such as: school crime, gang homicides, improving programming
for girls, the dark history of biological criminology, juvenile
delinquents behind bars, and more. These boxes personalize
the story of delinquincy and bring into focus the different life
situations of victims and offenders
• Theories of Delinquency and the associated Policy Implications
have been expanded to include those of psychology, human
development, neuropsychology, and behavioral genetics in
addition to those of sociology, criminology, and criminal justice.
CONTENTS
Preface
Introduction
Chapter 1. Defining Delinquency
Chapter 2. Measuring Delinquency
Chapter 3. Violent Youth Crime
Chapter 4. Illegal Drug Use and Delinquency
Chapter 5. Individual Theories of Delinquency: Choice and Trait
Explanations
Chapter 6. Sociological Theory: Cultural Deviance, Strain, and
Social Control
Erich Goode, University of
Goode’s Drugs in American Society 7/e is a well-respected,
brief investigation of the full range of psychoactive drug
use; from legal, medical and perscription use to criminal,
recreational use and from casual use to addiction. Objective
pro and con accounts on important issues like treatment,
education, rehabilitation, and legalization give students
a thorough understanding of the topics. The new seventh
edition continues to provide the most balanced and up-todate coverage in an accessible, engaging style.
NEW TO THIS EDITION
• New Resources for Instructors include PowerPoint lecture
presentations on the instructor’s portion of the text-specific
website.
• The Most Up-to-Date Statistics from the National Survey
on Drug Use and Health(NSDUH), the Drug Abuse Warning
Network (DAWN), and the Arrestee Drug Abuse Monitoring
Program (ADAM) keep this edition current and relevant.
125
Sociology
CONTENTS
NEW TO THIS EDITION
Preface
Part 1: INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1: Drugs: A Sociological Perspective
Chapter 2: Drugs: A Pharmacological Perspective
Chapter 3: Theories of Drug Use
Chapter 4: Controlling Drugs: The Historical Context
Chapter 5: Drugs In The News
Part 2: DRUG USE: METHODS AND DATA
Chapter 6: How Do We Know It’s True: Methods of Research
Chapter 7: Historical Trends In Drug Consumption: From Past To
Current Use
Part 3: DRUGS AND THEIR USE
Chapter 8: Legal Drugs: Alcohol, Tobacco, and Psychotherapeutic
Drugs
Chapter 9: Marijuana, LSD, and Club Drugs
Chapter 10: Stimulants: Amphetamine, Methamphetamine,
Cocaine, and Crack
Chapter 11: Heroin and The Narcotics
Part 4: DRUGS, CRIME, AND DRUG CONTROL
Chapter 12: Drugs and Crime: What’s The Connection?
Chapter 13: The Illicit Drug Industry
Chapter 14: Drug Control: Law Enforcement, Drug Courts, Drug
Treatment
Chapter 15: Legalization, Decriminalization, and Harm
Reduction
Summary
Key Terms
References
Appendix: Drug-Related Websites
Author Index
Subject Index
NEW
DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND HUMAN
BEHAVIOR
12th Edition
Charles J. Ksir, University of Wyoming
– Laramie, Carl L. Hart, Columbia
University and Oakley S. Ray,
Vanderbilt U-sch of Medicine
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352961-5 / MHID: 0-07-352961-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110175-2 / MHID: 0-07-110175-6 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ksir12e
Designed for the introduction to drugs and substance
abuse course as taught in departments of health education,
psychology, biology, sociology, and criminal justice, this
full-color market-leading text provides the latest information
on drugs and their effects on society and human behavior.
For over thirty years, instructors and students have relied
on it to examine drugs and behavior from the behavioral,
pharmacological, historical, social, legal, and clinical
perspectives.
126
• Online Learning Center features updated and expanded
supplements, including a completely revised test bank (more
and better questions), a new image bank, expanded PowerPoint
slides, additional online study tools for students (quizzes, key
terms flashcards, links), audio chapter summaries, HealthQuest
Activities, and Web Activities.
• Provides updated coverage of key topics, such as medical
marijuana, steroids and nutritional ergogenic aids, prevention
programs, smoking in film, abuse of legal pharmaceuticals,
methamphetamine use, and treatment of bipolar disorder,
insomnia, and ADHD
• Significantly expands the photo program.
• Includes updated information on statistics and trends for drug
use and effects (Monitoring the Future, National Survey on Drug
Use and Health, DAWN, SAMHSA treatment info), costs of drug
control, and the prison population.
CONTENTS
Part I: DRUG USE IN MODERN SOCIETY
1: Drug Use: An Overview
2: Drug Use as a Social Problem
3: Drug Production and Regulation
Part II: HOW DRUGS WORK
4: The Nervous System
5: The Actions of Drugs
Part III: UPPERS AND DOWNERS
6: Stimulants
7: Depressants
8: Psychotherapeutic Drugs
Part IV: ALCOHOL
9: Alcohol
Part V: FAMILIAR DRUGS
10: Tobacco
11: Caffeine
12: Herbals, Dietary Supplements, and Over-the-Counter Drugs
Part VI: RESTRICTED DRUGS
13: Opioids
14: Hallucinogens
15: Marijuana and Hashish
16: Performance-Enhancing Drugs
Part VII: INTERVENTION STRATEGIES
17: Preventing Drug Misuse and Abuse
18: Treating Substance Dependence
Sociology
DRUGS IN PERSPECTIVE
6th Edition
Richard Fields, Private Practice Tuscon AZ and Redmond
Washington
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304747-8 / MHID: 0-07-304747-3
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-325202-5 / MHID: 0-07-325202-6
(With Powerweb)
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/fields5e
Drugs in Perspective is written for the drug and substance
abuse counseling course designed to prepare future health
professionals to work with patients, clients, and families of
abusers. It is designed to provide perspective on the aspects
and problems associated with addiction as well as provide
the fundamentals on the dynamics of chemical dependency.
This edition improves topic flow for easier understanding and
brings the research base into the 21st century.
CONTENTS
SECTION I: UNDERSTANDING SUBSTANCE ABUSE
1 Etiology: A Better Understanding of Drug Dependence and
Addiction
2 Alcohol/Drugs and Our American Society—Major Problems
and Perspectives
3 Drug Specific Information: Drugs on the Street Where You
Live
4 Screening and Assessment of Alcohol/Drug Problems
SECTION II: FAMILY
5 Substance Abuse and Family Systems
6 Parenting: Impact on Alcohol/Drug Use and Abuse
7 Growing Up in an Alcoholic Family System
SECTION III: PREVENTION, INTERVENTION AND TREATMENT
8 Prevention of Substance Abuse Problems
9 Motivation and Intervention for Substance Abuse Problems
10 Co-occurring Disorders with Substance Abuse
11 Alcohol/Drug Treatment & Relapse Prevention on
Drugs & Society – Readers
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN DRUGS AND
SOCIETY
8th Edition
Raymond Goldberg, State University of NY – Cortland
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351511-3 / MHID: 0-07-351511-6
116.mhtml
This Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: DRUGS AND SOCIETY
CONTENTS
Part 1 DRUGS AND PUBLIC POLICY
Issue 1. Should Laws Against Drug Use Remain Restrictive?
Issue 2. Should the United States Put More Emphasis on Stopping
the Importation of Drugs?
Issue 3. Are Drinking Age Laws Effective?
Issue 4. Are the Dangers of Ecstasy (MDMA) Overstated?
Issue 5. Should Pregnant Drug Users Be Prosecuted?
Issue 6. Should Drug Addiction Be Considered a Disease?
Issue 7. Should the Federal Government Play a Larger Role in
Regulating Steroid Use?
Part 2 DRUGS AND SOCIAL POLICY
Issue 8. Are the Adverse Effects of Smoking Exaggerated?
Issue 9. Should Laws Prohibiting Marijuana Use Be Relaxed?
Issue 10. Are Psychotherapeutic Drugs Over-Prescribed for
Treating Mental Illness?
Issue 11. Do the Consequences of Caffeine Outweigh Its Benefits?
Issue 12. Should School-age Children with Attention Deficit/
Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD) Be Treated with Ritalin and
Other Stimulants?
Issue 13. Do Consumers Benefit When Prescription Drugs Are
Advertised?
Part 3 DRUG PREVENTION AND TREATMENT
Issue 14. Does Secondhand Smoke Endanger the Health of
Nonsmokers?
Issue 15. Is Alcoholism Hereditary?
Issue 16. Should Marijuana Be Approved for Medical Use?
Issue 17. Should Schools Drug Test Students?
Issue 18. Does Drug Abuse Treatment Work?
Issue 19. Is Abstinence an Effective Strategy for Drug Education?
127
Sociology
24. Pot Farms Ravaging Park Land
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: DRUGS,
SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR 07/08
22nd Edition
Hugh T Wilson, California State
University-Sacramento
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339742-9 / MHID: 0-07-339742-3
This Twenty-Second Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS:
DRUGS, SOCIETY, AND BEHAVIOR 07/08 provides
convenient, inexpensive access to current articles selected
from the best of the public press. Organizational features
include: an annotated listing of selected World Wide Web
sites; an annotated table of contents; a topic guide; a general
introduction; brief overviews for each section; a topical index;
and an instructor’s resource guide with testing materials.
USING ANNUAL EDITIONS IN THE CLASSROOM is offered
as a practical guide for instructors. ANNUAL EDITIONS titles
are supported by our student website, www.dushkin.com/
online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Living with Drugs
1. Hey, You Don’t Look So Good
2. Living the High Life: The Role of Drug Taking in Young
People’s Lives
3. Methamphetamine Across America: Misconceptions, Realities
and Solutions
4. Balding, Wrinkled and Stoned
6. With Scenes of Blood and Pain
7. My Mother: The Narc
8. Pass the Weed, Dad
9. Did Prohibition Really Work?: Alcohol Prohibition as a Public
Health Innovation
UNIT 2. Understanding How Drugs Work—Use, Dependency,
and Addiction
10. Addiction Is a Brain Disease
11. Predicting Addiction
12. Staying Sober
13. The Effects of Alcohol on Physiological Processes and
Biological Development
14. The Toxicity of Recreational Drugs
15. Structural Differences Found in Brains of Heavy Marijuana
Users
16. Does Cannabis Cause Psychosis or Schizophrenia?
UNIT 3. The Major Drugs of Use and Abuse
17. A More Addictive Meth Emerges as States Curb Homemade
Type
18. Just Say No? No Need Here
19. A Harvest of Treachery
20. An End to ‘Power Hour’
21. Helping Students Stay Clean and Sober
22. The Power of Potent Steroids
23. Cannabis-Related Problems and Their Management
128
UNIT 4. Other Trends in Drug Use
25. Resurgence of Teen Inhalant Use
26. New Study Shows 1.8 Million Youth Use Inhalants
27. The Changing Face of Teenage Drug Abuse—The Trend
28. OxyContin Acting as Pathway Drug for Adolescent Heroin
Addiction
29. Club Drugs: Study Explores Reasons for Use by Young Adults
30. Rx for Trouble
31. Studies Identify Factors Surrounding Rise in Abuse of
Prescription Drugs by College Students
32. The Best High They’ve Ever Had
34. Facing an Uncertain Twilight
UNIT 5. Measuring the Social Costs of Drugs
35. Meth Addicts’ Other Habit: Online Theft
36. Mothers Addicted to Meth Face Losing Their Children
37. The Role of Substance Abuse in U.S. Juvenile Justice Systems
and Populations
38. My Spirit Lives
39. When Drinking Kills
40. What Alcohol Does to a Child
41. The Problem With Drinking
42. ADHD Drugs and Cardiovascular Risk
43. High on the Job
UNIT 6. Creating and Sustaining Effective Drug Control Policy
44. Administration Announces Anti-Methamphetamine Plan
45. Court Upholds Federal Authority to Reject ‘Medical
Marijuana’
46. Medical Marijuana, Compassionate use, and Public Policy:
Expert Opinion or Vox Populi?
47. Is Drug Testing of Athletes Necessary?
48. Meth Madness
49. How to Stand Up to Big Tobacco
50. Cigarette Trafficking: Expanding Criminal Activity Attracts
Law Enforcement Attention
51. Battles Won, A War Still Lost
52. The War on Thugs
53. Arresting the Drug Laws
54. State’s Evidence
UNIT 7. Prevention, Treatment, and Education
55. How to Quit the Cure
56. Drug Treatment and Reentry for Incarcerated Women
57. Combination Treatment of One Year Doubles Smokers’ Quit
Rate
58. Medication & Counseling: The ‘New Paradigm’ in Alcoholism
Treatment
59. A Teen Health Gap
60. Teens Caught in the Middle: Juvenile Justice System and
Treatment
61. No Longer Theory: Correctional Practices That Work
62. Parent Power
63. What to Say When Your Child Asks: Did You Ever Do Drugs?
64. Exercise and Drug Detoxification
Sociology
Criminology
CRIMINOLOGY
6th Edition
Freda Adler and Gerhard O. W. Mueller of Rutgers Univnewark and William S. Laufer, University of Pennsylvania
2007 / Softcover with access card / 407 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312446-9 / MHID: 0-07-312446-X
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/adlercrim6
This leading text for courses in Criminology is known for its
lucid style, student-oriented approach, and interdisciplinary
global perspective. The text comes in two versions--with or
without coverage of the criminal justice system. For schools
that retain the traditional criminology course, which includes
coverage of criminal justice, Criminology and the Criminal
Justice System is the ideal text. For schools that offer a separate
introductory course in criminal justice, Criminology is the
appropriate version.
CONTENTS
Part I: UNDERSTANDING CRIMINOLOGY
Chapter 1. The Reach of Criminology
Chapter 2. Counting Crime and Measuring Criminal Behavior
Patterns
Chapter 3. Schools of Thought throughout History
Part II: EXPLANATIONS OF CRIME AND CRIMINAL
BEHAVIOR
Chapter 4. Psychological and Biological Perspectives
Chapter 5. Strain and Cultural Deviance Theories
Chapter 6. The Formation of Subcultures
Chapter 7. Social Control Theory
Chapter 8. Labeling, Conflict, and Radical Thoeries
Chapter 9. Environmental Theory
Part III: TYPES OF CRIME
Chapter 10. Violent Crimes
Chapter 11. Crimes Against Property
Chapter 12. White Collar and Corporate Crime
Chapter 13. Public Order Crimes
Chapter 14. International and Comparative Criminology
CRIMINOLOGY AND THE CRIMINAL JUSTICE
SYSTEM, WITH POWERWEB
6th Edition
Freda Adler and Gerhard O. W. Mueller of Rutgers Univnewark and William S. Laufer, University of Pennsylvania
2007 / Softcover with access card / 559 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-312447-6 / MHID: 0-07-312447-8
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/adlercrim6
This leading text for courses in Criminology is known for its
lucid style, student-oriented approach, and interdisciplinary
global perspective. The text comes in two versions--with or
without coverage of the criminal justice system. For schools
that retain the traditional criminology course, which includes
coverage of criminal justice, Criminology and the Criminal
Justice System is the ideal text. For schools that offer a separate
introductory course in criminal justice, Criminology is the
appropriate version.
CONTENTS
Part 1: UNDERSTANDING CRIMINOLOGY
Chapter 1. The Reach of Criminology
Chapter 2. Measuring Crime and
Criminal Behavior Problems
Chapter 3. Schools of Thought throughout History
Part II: EXPLANATIONS OF CRIME AND CRIMINAL
BEHAVIOR
Chapter 4. Psychological and Biological Perspectives
Chapter 5. Strain and Cultural Deviance Theories
Chapter 6. The Formation of Subcultures
Chapter 7. Social Control Theory
Chapter 8. Labeling, Conflict, and Radical Theories
Chapter 9. Environmental Theory
Part III: TYPES OF CRIMES
Chapter 10. Violent Crimes
Chapter 11. Crimes Against Property
Chapter 12. White Collar and Corporate Crime
Chapter 13. Public Order Crimes
Chapter 14. International and Comparative Criminology
Part IV: A CRIMINOLOGICAL APPROACH TO THE CRIMINAL
JUSTICE SYSTEM
Chapter 15. Processes and Decisions
Chapter 16. Enforcing the Law: Practice and Research
Chapter 17. The Nature and Functioning of Courts
Chapter 18. A Research Focus on Corrections
129
Sociology
Criminology – Readers
NEW
VIEWS IN CRIME AND
CRIMINOLOGY
8th Edition
Thomas J Hickey, University of Tampa
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339721-4 / MHID: 0-07-339721-0
210.mhtml
This Eighth Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN
CRIME AND CRIMINOLOGY presents current controversial
issues in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student
interest and develop critical thinking skills. Each issue is
thoughtfully framed with an issue summary, an issue introduction,
and a postscript. An instructor’s manual with testing material
is available for each volume. USING TAKING SIDES IN THE
practical suggestions on incorporating this effective approach in
the classroom. Each TAKING SIDES reader features an annotated
listing of selected World Wide Web sites and is supported by our
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Definitions and Explanations of Crime
Issue 1. Is Crime Beneficial to Society?
Issue 2. Is Criminal Behavior Determined Biologically?
Issue 3. Does IQ Contribute Significantly to Crime?
UNIT 2 Justice Issues and Contemporary Public Policy
Issue 4. Does the United States Have a Right to Torture Suspected
Terrorists?
Issue 5. Is Racial Profiling an Acceptable Law Enforcement
Strategy?
Issue 6. Should Serious Sex Offenders be Castrated?
Issue 7. Should Juvenile Courts Be Abolished?
Issue 8. Are the Dangers of Internet Child Pornography Exaggerated?
UNIT 5 Future Trends in Criminology and Criminal Justice
Issue 16. Should Marijuana be Legalized?
Issue 17. Do Three Strikes Sentencing Laws and Other “Get
Tough” Approaches Really Work?
Issue 18. Should Juries Be Able to Disregard the Law and Free
“Guilty” Persons in Racially Charged Cases?
Issue 19. Should Behavior Modification Techniques Be Used to
Brainwash Criminals?
ANNUAL EDITIONS: CRIMINAL JUSTICE 06/07
30th Edition
Joseph Victor and Joanne Naughton of Mercy College-Dobbs
Ferry
ISBN-13: 978-07-351596-0 / MHID: 07-351596-5
Website: http://www.dushkin.com/textdata/catalog/007351
5965.mhtml
This thirtieth edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: CRIMINAL
JUSTICE provides convenient, inexpensive access to
website, www.dushkin.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Crime and Justice in America
1. What Is the Sequence of Events in the Criminal Justice System?
2. The Road to September 11
New! 3. Arraigning Terror
4. Global Trends in Crime
5. The FBI’s Cyber-Crime Crackdown
6. Toward a Transvaluation of Criminal ‘Justice’: On Vengeance,
Peacemaking, and Punishment
7. Enough Is Enough
New! 8. Counting Corporate Crooks
9. Trust and Confidence in Criminal Justice
UNIT 2. Victimology
10. Ordering Restitution to the Crime Victim
11. Telling the Truth About Damned Lies and Statistics
12. Violence and the Remaking of a Self
New! 13. The Counselor
14. Strengthening Antistalking Statutes
New! 15. The Cybersex Offender and Children
UNIT 3 Prison Programs and Alternatives
Issue 9. Is it Ethical to Segregate HIV-Positive Inmates?
Issue 10. Are Supermax (Control Unit) Prisons an Appropriate
Way to Punish Hardened Criminals?
Issue 11. Should Serial Killers and Violent Sexual Predators be
Quarantined for Life?
Issue 12. Should Private “For-Profit” Corporations Be Allowed to
Run U.S. Prisons?
UNIT 3. The Police
16. The NYPD’s War On Terror
17. Racial Profiling and Its Apologists
18. Ethics and Criminal Justice: Some Observations on Police
Misconduct
19. Community Policing: Exploring the Philosophy
20. The Blue Plague of American Policing
New! 21. Talking With the Police
New! 22. Suicide by Cop
UNIT 4 Criminal Justice Research, Evaluation, and Policy
Analysis
Issue 13. Is Capital Punishment a Bad Public Policy?
Issue 14. Will Strict Gun Control Laws Reduce the Number of
Homicides in the United States?
Issue 15. Should the Police Enforce Zero-Tolerance Laws?
UNIT 4. The Judicial System
23. Jury Consulting on Trial
24. Jury Duty: When History and Life Coincide
25. Looking Askance at Eyewitness Testimony
26. Justice & Antonin Scalia
27. When Prosecutors Err, Others Pay the Price
130
Sociology
New! 28. United States Supreme Court: “Three Strikes and You’re
Out!”
UNIT 5. Juvenile Justice
29. A Century of Revolutionary Changes in the United States
Juvenile Court Systems
30. DARE Program: Sacred Cow or Fatted Calf?
31. The Peer Court Experience
New! 32. Juvenile Injustice
New! 33. Youth Gangs in Rural America
UNIT 6. Punishment and Corrections
34. Kicking Out the Demons by Humanizing the Experience—An
Interview With Anthony Papa
35. The Results of American Incarceration
36. Correctional Boot Camps: Lessons From A Decade of Research
37. Do We Need the Death Penalty?
New! 38. Incarceration, Inc.
New! 39. Stress on the Job: No Easy Training Solutions
New! 40. The Yoga of Redemption
New! 41. The Unforgiven
42. The Unique Brutality of Texas, Why the Lone Star State Leads
the Nation in Executions
New! 43. Uncaptive Minds
Sociology of Law – Readers
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS ON LEGAL
ISSUES
13th Edition
M Ethan Katsh, University of Mass—Amherst
William Rose, Albion College
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351509-0 / MHID: 0-07-351509-4
094.mhtml
This Thirteenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS
ON LEGAL ISSUES presents current controversial issues in
a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Law and Terrorism
Issue 1. Should Persons Who Are Declared to Be “Enemy
Combatants” Be Able to Contest Their Detention Before a
Judge?
Issue 2. Does the President Possess Constitutional Authority to
Order Wiretaps on U.S. Citizens?
Issue 3. Is the Geneva Convention Irrelevant to Members of al
Qaeda Who Are Held Prisoner at Guantanamo Bay?
Issue 4. Should Someone Held by the CIA and Interrogated in a
Foreign Country Be Allowed to Sue the U.S. Government?
UNIT 2 Law and the Individual
Issue 5. Is It Constitutional to Ban Partial-Birth Abortions Without
Providing for an Exception to Protect the Health of the Mother?
Issue 6. Are Restrictions on Physician-Assisted Suicide
Constitutional?
Issue 7. Does the Sharing of Music Files Through the Internet
Violate Copyright Law?
Issue 8. Can the Police Require Individuals to Identify
Themselves?
UNIT 3 Law and the State
Issue 9. Do Religious Groups Have a Right to Use Public School
Facilities After Hours?
Issue 10. Does the Use of High-Technology Thermal Imaging
Devices Violate the Fourth Amendment Search and Seizure
Guarantee?
Issue 11. Are Laws Requiring Schools and Public Libraries to
Filter Internet Access Constitutional?
Issue 12. Does the “Cruel and Unusual Punishment “Clause of
the Eighth Amendment Bar the Imposition of the Death Penalty
on Juveniles?
Issue 13. Is a Sentence of Life in Prison for Stealing $150 Worth
of Videotapes Constitutional?
131
Sociology
Issue 14. Is Drug Use Testing of Students Who Participate
in Extracurricular Activities Permitted Under the Fourth
Amendment?
UNIT 4 Law and the Community
Issue 15. Should the United States Require a Secure Identification
System for Citizens?
Issue 16. Are Blanket Prohibitions on Cross Burnings Unconstitutional?
Issue 17. Should Same-Sex Couples Receive Constitutional
Protection?
Issue 18. Should Children With Disabilities Be Provided With
Extraordinary Care in Order to Attend Regular Classes in Public
Schools?
Issue 19. Do Race-Conscious Programs in Public University
Admissions Policies Violate the Fourteenth Amendment’s
Guarantee of Equal Protection Under the Law?
Sociology of Sport
SPORTS IN SOCIETY: ISSUES AND
CONTROVERSIES
9th Edition
Jay Coakley, University of Colorado at Colorado Springs
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-304727-0 / MHID: 0-07-304727-9
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-328366-1 / MHID: 0-07-328366-5
(W/OLC)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-110436-4 / MHID: 0-07-110436-4 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/ coakley8e
SPORT IN SOCIETY is the definitive text for the sport
sociology course. Taking a global, issues-oriented approach
to study the role of sport in society, this text encourages the
discussion of current sports-related controversies and helps
students develop critical thinking skills.
CONTENTS
1. The Sociology of Sport: What is it and why study it?
2. Using Social Theories: How can they help us study sports in society?
3. Studying the Past: Does it help us understand sports today?
4. Sports and Socialization: Who plays and what happens to them?
5. Sports and Children: Are organized programs worth the effort?
6. Deviance in Sports: Is it out of your control?
7. Violence in Sports: How does it affect our lives?
8. Gender and Sports: Does equity require ideological changes?
9. Race and Ethnicity: Are They Important in Sports?
10. Social Class: Do Money and Power Matter in Sports?
11. Sports and the Economy: What Are the Characteristics of
Commercial Sports?
12. Sports and the Media: Could They Survive Without Each Other?
13. Sports and Politics: How Do Governments and Globalization
Influence Sports?
14. Sports in High School and College: Do Varsity Sport Programs
Contribute to Education?
15. Sports and Religion: Is It a Promising Combination?
16. Sports in the Future: What Can We Expect?
Sociology of Education –
Readers
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATION 08/09
35th Edition
Fred Schultz, University of Akron
2009 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339748-1 / MHID: 0-07-339748-2
482.mhtml
This Thirty-Fifth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: EDUCATION
mhcls.com/online.
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. How Others See Us and How We See Ourselves
New! 1. Five Trends for Schools
2. Squeeze Play
New! 3. Testing 1, 2, 3
New! 4. The 38th Annual Phi Delta Kappan/Gallup Poll of the
Public Attitudes Toward the Public Schools
UNIT 2. Rethinking and Changing the Educative Effort
New! 5. Where Have All the Strong Poets Gone?
New! 6. George’s Complaint
New! 7. Qualities of Democracy
8. Friendly Competition
New! 9. A Coming Crisis in Suburban Schooling?
New! 10. Affecting Social Change
New! 11. The Agony of American Education
UNIT 3. Striving for Excellence: The Drive For Quality
New! 12. Why We Can’t Always Get What We Want
New! 13. Bridging the Gap Between Research and Practice
14. What Colleges Forget to Teach
New! 15. Assessing Applied Skills
New! 16. Help for Stressed Students
New! 17. Searching for an Answer
New! 18. When Momma Can’t Read
UNIT 4. Values, Society, and Education
New! 19. Putting a Stop to Slave Labor
New! 20. Creating Moral Schools
21. Promoting Altruism in the Classroom
22. In the End You Are Sure to Succeed
23. Character and Academics
24. Should We Teach Patriotism
UNIT 5. Managing Life in Classrooms
New! 25. Discipline
New! 26. School Resource Officer Programs
132
Sociology
New! 27. Are Public Schools Successful?
New! 28. A Uniform Look
29. Dealing with Rumors, Secrets, and Lies
UNIT 6. Cultural Diversity and Schooling
New! 30. As Diversity Grows, So Must We
New! 31. What Families Want
New! 32. Where Is Equity in the National Standards?
New! 33. Researching Historical Black Colleges
New! 34. “Not Writing It Out But Writing It Off”
New! 35. The Hotel Africa
New! 36. Melange Cities
UNIT 7. Serving Special Needs and Concerns
New! 37. Self-Regulation
38. City’s Pupils Get More Hype than Hope
New! 39. Disparate Access
New! 40. Revisiting the Common Myths about Homeschooling
41. Acting White
UNIT 8. The Profession of Teaching Today
New! 42. The Essential Cognitive Backpack
New! 43. Why Teacher Networks (Can) Work
New! 44. Uncovering Teacher Leadership
New! 45. Respect, Reciprocity, and Reflection in the Classroom
New! 46. Drop Everything and Read--But How?
New! 47. Teacher Dispositions as Predictors of Good Teaching
48. The Boss in the Classroom
UNIT 9. For Vision and Hope: Alternative Visions of Reality
New! 49. Becoming Citizens of the World
New! 50. Charting a New Course for Schools
51. Deja Vu: All Over Again?
52. An Emerging Culture
NEW
EDUCATIONAL ISSUES presents two additional current
CONTENTS
Part 1: BASIC THEORETICAL ISSUES
ISSUE 1. Should Schooling Be Based on Social Experiences?
ISSUE 2. Should the Curriculum Be Standardized for All?
ISSUE 3. Should Behaviorism Shape Educational Practices?
New! ISSUE 4. Is Constructivism the Best Philosophy of
Education?
Part 2: CURRENT FUNDAMENTAL ISSUES
ISSUE 5. Can the Public Schools Produce Good Citizens?
ISSUE 6. Has Resegregation Diminished the Impact of Brown?
ISSUE 7. Have Public Schools Adequately Accommodated
Religion?
ISSUE 8. Can Federal Initiatives Rescue Failing Schools?
ISSUE 9. Do High-Stakes Assessments Improve Learning?
New! ISSUE 10. Should “Public Schooling” Be Redefined?
Part 3: CURRENT SPECIFIC ISSUES
ISSUE 11. Has the Supreme Court Reconfigured American
Education?
ISSUE 12. Can Charter Schools Revitalize Public Education?
New! ISSUE 13. Is Home Schooling a Danger to American Society?
ISSUE 14. Is Full Inclusion of Disabled Students Desirable?
ISSUE 15. Is Size Crucial to School Improvement?
ISSUE 16. Should Bilingual Education Programs Be Abandoned?
ISSUE 17. Does School Violence Warrant a Zero-Tolerance Policy?
ISSUE 18. Should Homework Be Abolished?
New! ISSUE 19. Do Computer Negatively Affect Student Growth?
ISSUE 20. Can Merit Pay Accelerate School Improvement?
ISSUE 21. Should Alternative Teacher Training Be Encouraged?
EXPANDED
Issue 22. Is “Intelligent Design” a Threat to the Curriculum?
Issue 23. Is There a Crisis in the Education of Boys?
VIEWS ON EDUCATIONAL
ISSUES
14th Edition
James Wm Noll, University of
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339717-7 / MHID: 0-07-339717-2
(Expanded)
Website: http://www.dushkin.com/text-data/catalog/00735
14977.mhtml
This fourteenth edition of TAKING SIDES: EDUCATIONAL
ISSUES presents current controversial issues in a debate-style
format designed to stimulate student interest and develop
critical thinking skills. Each issue is thoughtfully framed with
an issue summary, an issue introduction, and a postscript. An
133
Sociology
Sociology of Health – Readers
NEW
NEW
CLASSIC EDITION SOURCES:
EDUCATION
4th Edition
Fred Schultz, University of Akron
2008 / 352 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337974-6 / MHID: 0-07-337974-3
743.mhtml
This volume brings together over 40 selections of enduring
intellectual value--classic articles, book excerpts, and research
studies--that have shaped the study of education and our
contemporary understanding of it.This title is supported by
www.mhclsdushkin.com, a student Web site that provides
study support tools and links to links to related Web sites.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Postmodernism, Liberation Pedagogy, and the
Conservative/Moderate Traditions in Educational Thought: An
Introductory Comparison
Chapter 2 The Conservative Tradition in Educational Thought
Chapter 3 Student Experience-Centered “Progressive” Education
Chapter 4 Critical Perspectives in Educational Thought
Chapter 5 Schooling
Chapter 6 Curriculum Theory and Practice
Chapter 7 Curriculum Development and the Language of
Educational Debate
Chapter 8 The Struggle for Freedom in Education
Chapter 9 Perspectives on the Struggle for Freedom in Education
Chapter 10 Women and Education
Chapter 11 The Political Economy of American Education
Chapter 12 The Struggle for Civil Liberty in the Schools
Chapter 13 Testing and the Critical Response to It
Chapter 14 The Cognitive Revolution in Learning
Chapter 15 Social Change
Chapter 16 Culture and Education
Chapter 17 Renewed Alternative Visions for the Future of
Education: Rudolph Steiner and Maria Montessori Revisited (A
Plan for Education Which Can Fit Any Ideological Model)
ANNUAL EDITIONS: HEALTH 08/09
29th Edition
Eileen L Daniel, SUNY- Brockport
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339759-7 / MHID: 0-07-339759-8
598.mhtml
This Twenty-Ninth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: HEALTH
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 Promoting Healthy Behavior Change
1. The Perils of Higher Education
2. Is Health Promotion Relevant Across Cultures and the
Socioeconomic Spectrum?
3. Putting a Premium on Health
New! 4. Health: The New Sex Symbol
New! 5. On the Road to Wellness
UNIT 2 Stress and Mental Health
6. Love is Real Medicine
New! 7. Stressed out Nation
New! 8. Seasonal Affective Disorder
9. Attention Deficit Disorder: Old Questions, New Answers
10. Dealing with Demons
New! 11. Attacking the Myth
UNIT 3 Nutritional Health
New! 12. Fat City
13. When It Pays to Buy Organic
New! 14. This Package May Say Healthy, But This Grocer Begs
to Differ
New! 15. Suck on This
16. Food News Blues
UNIT 4 Exercise and Weight Management
New! 17. Exercise Abuse: Too Much of a Good Thing
18. How Sleep Affects Your Weight
19. Fat Chance
UNIT 5 Drugs and Health
20. Rx for Fraud
22. Drinking Too Much: Too Young
23. The Changing Face of Teenage Drug Abuse--The Trend
24. The Price of Pain
134
Sociology
UNIT 6 Sexuality and Relationships
25. You, Me and Porn Make Three
26. Sex Ed for the Stroller Set
27. It’s Just Mechanics
New! 28. Love at the Margins
New! 29. Girl or Boy? As Fertility Technology Advances, So Does
an Ethical Debate
UNIT 7 Preventing and Fighting Disease
30. ‘Diabesity,’ a Crisis in an Expanding Country
New! 31. Sex, Drugs, Prisons, and HIV
32. Why We Are Still Losing the Winnable Cancer War
New! 34. Mandate in Texas
UNIT 8 Health Care and the Health Care System
35. Pharmacist Refusals: A Threat to Women’s Health
New! 36. A System in Crisis
37. Medicine’s Turf Wars
New! 38. The Silent Epidemic--The Health Effects of Illiteracy
UNIT 9 Consumer Health
39. Dentists Frown at Overuse of Whiteners
New! 40. Cracking Down on Health Fraud
41. How to Ease Your Pain
42. Deep into Sleep
New! 43. Why Teens Are Obsessed with Tanning
UNIT 10 Contemporary Health Hazards
44. Avian Flu: The Uncertain Threat
45. ‘Vintage’ Bugs Return: Mumps? Whooping Cough? Rickets?
What Year Is It?
46. In Katrina’s Wake
New! 47. Facing an Uncertain Future
New! 48. Killer Spinach
New! 49. HIV Apathy
NEW
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 The Health Care Industry
Issue 1. Should Purchasing Health Insurance Be Mandatory?
Issue 2. Should Life Sustaining Medical Care Be Rationed Based
on Age?
Issue 3. Is Medical Debt a Major Contributor to Personal
Bankruptcy?
Issue 4. Is the Pharmaceutical Industry Responsible for the High
Cost of Prescription Drugs?
UNIT 2 Health and Society
Issue 5. Is Drug Testing Vital to the Workplace?
Issue 6. Should Doctors Ever Help Terminally Ill Patients to
Commit Suicide?
Issue 7. Should the Government Regulate the Sale, Advertisement,
and Distribution of Junk Food?
Issue 8. Should Race Play a Role in the Treatment and Study of
Disease?
Issue 9. Should Embryonic Stem Cell Research Be Permitted?
UNIT 3 Mind/Body Relationship
Issue 10. Should Addiction to Drugs Be Labeled a Brain Disease?
Issue 11. Do Religion and Prayer Benefit Health?
UNIT 4 Sexuality and Gender Issues
Issue 12. Is it Necessary for Pregnant Women to Completely
Abstain from All Alcoholic Beverages?
Issue 13. Should Pro-Life Health Providers Be Allowed to Deny
Prescriptions on the Basis of Conscience?
PART 5 Public Health Issues
Issue 14. Should Parents Be Allowed to Opt Out of Vaccinating
Their Children?
Issue 15. Does Anabolic Steroid Use Cause Serious Health
Problems for Athletes?
Issue 16. Will Global Warming Negatively Impact Human Health?
UNIT 6 Consumer Health
Issue 17. Is it Safe to Consume Genetically Engineered Foods?
Issue 18. Does Obesity Cause a Decline in Life Expectancy?
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN HEALTH AND
SOCIETY
8th Edition
Eileen L Daniel, SUNY – Brockport
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339723-8 / MHID: 0-07-339723-7
Website: http://www.mchls.com/text-data/catalog/0073397
237.mhtml
HEALTH AND SOCIETY presents current controversial issues
in a debate-style format designed to stimulate student interest
135
Sociology
Sociology of Sexuality
Sociology of Sexuality – Readers
NEW
HUMAN SEXUALITY
DIVERSITY IN CONTEMPORARY AMERICA WITH
SEXSOURCE CD-ROM AND POWERWEB
5th Edition
Bryan Strong, University of California – Santa Cruz
Christine DeVault, Carbrillo College
Barbara Sayad, California State University—Monterey Bay
William Yarber, Indiana University and Senior Research
Fellow, The Kinsey Institute
2005 / 704 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-297490-4 / MHID: 0-07-297490-7
(No Selling Rights)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-111425-7 / MHID: 0-07-111425-4 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/strong5
CONTENTS
1. Perspectives on Human Sexuality
2. Studying Human Sexuality
3. Female Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response
4. Male Sexual Anatomy, Physiology, and Response
5. Gender and Gender Roles
6. Sexuality Over the Life Span
7. Love, Intimacy, and Sexuality
8. Communicating about Sex
9. Sexual Expression
10. Variations in Sexual Behavior
11. Contraception and Birth Control
12. Conception, Pregnancy, and Childbirth
13. The Sexual Body in Health and Illness
14. Sexual Difficulties, Dissatisfaction, Enhancement and Therapy
15. Sexually Transmitted Infections
16. HIV and AIDS
17. Sexual Coercion: Harassment, Aggression, and Abuse
18. Sexually Explicit Materials, Prostitution, and Sex Laws
VIEWS IN HUMAN SEXUALITY
10th Edition
William J Taverner, Fairleigh
Dickinson University
2008 / 368 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-339719-1 / MHID: 0-07-339719-9
199.mhtml
This Tenth Edition of TAKING SIDES: HUMAN SEXUALITY
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. The Nature of Sex
Issue 2. Is Oral Sex Really Sex?
Issue 3. Is Masters and Johnson’s Model an Accurate Description
of Sexual Response?
Issue 4. Is the G Spot a Myth?
Issue5. Is the Testosterone Patch the Right Cure for Low Libido
in Women?
UNIT 2. Sex and Schools
Issue 6. Does the Availability of “Sexual Health Services” Make
Some College Campuses Healthier than Others?
Issue 7. Should Sex Ed Teach About Abstinence?
Issue 8. Should Children Have an HPV Vaccination Before they
Enroll in School?
a Gender Bias?
UNIT 3. Reproduction Technology
Issue 10. Should Parents be Allowed to Select the Sex of Their
Baby?
Issue 11. Should Emergency Contraception be Available Over the
Counter?
Issue 12. Should Federal Funding of Stem Cell be Restricted?
UNIT 4. Sex and Society
Issue 13. Should Same Sex-Marriage Be Legal?
Issue 14. Should Society Support Cohabitation Before Marriage?
Issue 15. Is Pedophilia Always Harmful?
Issue 16. Should Female Circumcision be Banned?
136
Sociology
Issue 17. Shold the FCC Restrict Broadcast “Indecency”?
Issue 18. Should Sexual Content on the Internet be Restricted?
ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN SEXUALITY
30th Edition
Susan Bunting, Lincoln College
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351618-9 / MHID: 0-07-351618-X
18X.mhtml
This THIRTIETH EDITION of ANNUAL EDITIONS: HUMAN
SEXUALITY provides convenient, inexpensive access to
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Sexuality and Society
Part A. Historical and Cross-Cultural Perspectives
1. Vox Populi: Sex, Lies, and Blood Sport
2. Women’s Ideal Bodies Then and Now
3. Sex Around the World
4. The Beauty Pageant Prevails
6. Remembering Bayard Rustin
Part B. Changing Society/Changing Sexuality
7. The Magdalene Mystique: Why Her Archetype Matters
8. The Manliness of Men
10. The Gender Quotient Test
UNIT 4. Reproduction
Part A. Fertility, Contraception, and Abortion
29. Access Denied
30. You Can’t Do That on Television
31. Sex, Politics, and Morality at the FDA: Reflections on the Plan
B Decision
32. A Late Decision, a Lasting Anguish
33. Condoms, Contraceptives and Nonoxynol-9: Complex Issues
Obscured by Ideology
Part B. Pregnancy, Childbirth, and Parenthood
34. Sex Without Sex? Keeping Passion Alive
35. A Tale of Two Mothers
36. The Birds and the Bees and Curious Kids
UNIT 5. Sexuality Through the Life Cycle
Part A. Youth and Their Sexuality
39. Your Turn: Give Students the Knowledge to Make Wise
Choices About Sex
Part B. Sexuality and the Adult Years
40. Sex and Love: The New World
41. Staying Up Late with Sue
UNIT 6. Old/New Sexual Concerns
Part A. Sexual Abuse and Violence
42. The Sex Offender Next Door
43. Silent No More
44. Where Girls Marry Rapists for Honor
45. A Cruel Edge
Part B. Sexual Relationship Crises
46. Sexual Heroin
47. The Secret Lives of Wives
49. The New “Mixed” Marriage
Part C. Focus: Valuing Sexuality
50. Good Sex: Why We Need More of It and a Lot Less of the
Bad Stuff
51. Pillow Talk
52. The Merry-Go-Round of Desire
UNIT 2. Sexual Biology, Behavior, and Orientation
Part A. The Body and Its Responses
12. Sudden Infertility
Part B. Hygiene and Sexual Health Care
13. Battling a Black Epidemic
14. Positive Thinking
15. Prison Outbreak: An Epidemic of Hepatitis C
16. When Sex Hurts
Part C. Human Sexualities and Orientations
17. Everyone’s Queer
18. Why Are We Gay?
19. The Battle over Gay Teens
20. The End of Gay Culture
UNIT 3. Interpersonal Relationships
Part A. Establishing Sexual Relationships
21. Great Expectations
22. In Search of Erotic Intelligence
23. 24 Things Love and Sex Experts Are Dying to Tell You
24. How to Tell Your Potential Love About Your Chronic STD
Part B. Responsible Quality Sexual Relationships
25. The Viagra Dialogues
26. Save Your Relationship
27. Be a Better Couple
28. How to Talk About Sex
137
Sociology
Technology & Society
NEW
ANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS IN SOCIETY
08/09
14th Edition
Paul De Palma, Gonzaga University
2008 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352848-9 / MHID: 0-07-352848-X
48x.mhtml
This Fourteenth Edition of ANNUAL EDITIONS: COMPUTERS
IN SOCIETY provides convenient, inexpensive access to
CONTENTS
UNIT 1. Introduction
1. Five Things We Need to Know About Technological Change
New! 2. Slouching Toward the Ordinary
3. On the Nature of Computing
UNIT 2. The Economy
New! 4. The Subprime Loan Machine
New! 5. Click Fraud
6. The Big Band Era
7. The Beauty of Simplicity
8. The Software Wars
New! 9. Scan This Book!
UNIT 3. Work and the Workplace
New! 10. National ID
11. Brain Circulation
12. The New Face of the Silicon Age
New! 13. Computer Software Engineers
14. The Computer Evolution
15. Making Yourself Understood
New! 16. E-Monitoring in the Workplace
UNIT 4. Computers, People, and Social Participation
17. New Technologies and Our Feelings: Romance on the
Internet
18. How Do I Love Thee?
New! 19. The Perfect Mark
20. Back-to-School Blogging
New! 21. E-Mail Is for Old People
UNIT 5. Societal Institutions: Law, Politics, Education, and the
Military
22. The Copyright Paradox
New! 23. Piracy, Computer Crime, and IS Misuse at the
University
138
24. Facing Down the E-Maelstron
New! 25. Can Blogs Revolutionize Progressive Politics?
New! 26. Center Stage
New! 27. The Coming Robot Army
UNIT 6. Risk
28. Why Spyware Poses Multiple Threats to Security
29. Terror’s Server
30. The Virus Underground
New! 31. Secrets of the Digital Detectives
New! 32. Data on the Elderly, Marketed to Thieves
33. The Fading Memory of the State
34. False Reporting on the Internet and the Spread of Rumors
UNIT 7. International Perspectives and Issues
New! 35. China’s Tech Generation Finds a New Chairman to
Venerate
New! 36. Is the Crouching Tiger a Threat?
37. Restoring the Popularity of Computer Science
38. China’s Computer Wasteland
New! 39. Cat and Mouse, on the Web
New! 40. In Search of a PC for the People
New! 41. A Nascent Robotics Culture
New! 42. March of the Robolawyers
New! 43. Best-Kept Secrets
New! 44. Toward Nature-Inspired Computing
45. The Intelligent Internet
46. Mind Control
NEW
TAKING SIDES: CLASHING VIEWS IN SCIENCE,
TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY
8th Edition
Thomas A Easton, Thomas College
2008 / 432 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-351512-0 / MHID: 0-07-351512-4
124.mhtml
SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY presents current
with testing material is available for each TAKING SIDES
CONTENTS
UNIT 1 The Place of Science and Technology in Society
Issue 1. Does Politics Come Before Science in Current Government
Decision Making?
Issue 2. Should Government Restrict the Publication of
Unclassified but “Sensitive” Research?
Sociology
Issue 3. Should the Internet Be Neutral?
UNIT 2 The Environment
Issue 4. Should Society Act Now to Halt Global Warming?
Issue 5. Is It Time to Revive Nuclear Power?
Issue 6. Will Hydrogen Replace Fossil Fuels for Cars?
UNIT 3 Human Health and Welfare
Issue 7. Do Falling Birth Rates Pose a Threat to Human Welfare?
Issue 8. Is There Sufficient Scientific Evidence to Conclude That
Cell Phones Cause Cancer?
Issue 9. Should DDT Be Banned Worldwide?
Issue 10. Should Potential Risks Slow the Development of
Nanotechnology?
Issue 11. Are Genetically Modified Foods Safe to Eat?
UNIT 4 Space
Issue 12. Should We Expand Efforts to Find Near-Earth Objects?
Issue 13. Will the Search for Extraterrestrial Life Ever Succeed?
Issue 14. Is “Manned Space Travel” a Delusion?
9. The Japanese Kindergarten of Singapore: “Internalization” and
“Internationalization”
10. The Learn from Japan Campaign in Singapore
11. Teaching and Learning Japanese in Singapore
Contributors
REVISITING SOCIOLOGY
(In Chinese)
By Keung-Sing Ho
2005 / 200 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-124996-6 / MHID: 0-07-124996-6
(Details unavailable in English)
UNIT 5 The Computer Revolution
Issue 15. Does the Internet Strengthen Social Connections?
Issue 16. Does the Spread of Surveillance Technology Threaten
Privacy?
Issue 17. Should the World’s Libraries Be Digitized?
THE COMPARATIVE SOCIETIES SERIES
UNIT 6 Ethics
Issue 18. Is the Use of Animals in Research Justified?
Issue 19. Is It Ethically Permissible to Clone Human Cells?
This series of short books devoted to different countries offers
much-needed cross-cultural and global material to instructors.
Used alongside an introductory sociology text or as a
supplement in courses on comparative societies, comparative
politics, comparative economics, or social stratification, this
book brings a rich global perspective into the undergraduate
classroom. The opening chapter establishes historical and
cultural context, while subsequent chapters focus on the basic
institutions, social stratification, social problems and social
change. The chapter organization is typical of a standard
introductory sociology text making it easy to use in any class.
Comparative Societies
JAPAN AND SINGAPORE
By Yun Hui Tsu
2006 / 324 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-125623-0 / MHID: 0-07-125623-7
Japan and Singapore have a common history going back
one hundred and fifty years. This shared experience is both
complex and contradictory and has many aspects: marriages,
friendships, cultural exchanges, business relations, and mutual
learning interlaced with economic competition, communal
rivalry, and war. The strong bilateral relations between the
two countries are likely to continue and remain vital to both
countries’ economic, social and political development. This
volume offers, for the first time, a multidisciplinary survey of
Japan-Singapore relations. Examining a wide range of topics
on prewar history, economic cooperation, cultural and social
trends, and bilateral trade and diplomacy, this book will be
of interest to both specialists and members of the public
concerned about regional affairs.
CONTENTS
1. When “Advancing South” Meets “Looking East”
2. A Social History of the Japanese in Singapore to 1945
3. Indians and Chinese in Japan’s Trade with Singapore before
the Asian-Pacific War
4. The Chinese and the Japanese in Colonial Singapore, 1870s
to 1941
5. Japanese Direct Investment in Singapore: Pokka and Kikkoman
6. Japan-Singapore Economic Partnership Agreement: Origins
and Implications
7. Japanese Women Working in Singapore
8. The Culture of Japanese Businessmen in Singapore
Edited by Prof. Harold R. Kerbo, California Poly State
University San Luis Obispo
Comparative Societies Series Volumes
FEATURES
v Very brief, inexpensive book designed to be used with an
introductory text and/or reader.
v Comparisons with familiar aspects of the US society are
frequent and well documented in easy-tounderstand tables and
diagrams.
v Provides cross-cultural and global material in a clear, concise
manner for students with no prior knowledge about Russia or
sociology.
MODERN SOUTH AFRICA
A VOLUME IN THE COMPARATIVE SOCIETIES SERIES
Phillip T Gay, San Diego State University-San Diego
2001 / 240 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-235211-5 / MHID: 0-07-235211-6
MODERN RUSSIA
Mikka Titma and Nancy Tuma of Stanford University
2001 / 224 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292823-5 / MHID: 0-07-292823-9
MODERN CHINA
Richard E Barrett, University of Illinois-Chicago
Fang Li, University of Chicago
1999 / 192 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292826-6 / MHID: 0-07-292826-3
139
Sociology
MODERN IRAN
Special Topics – Readers
Grant Farr, Portland State University
1999 / 168 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-292825-9 / MHID: 0-07-292825-5
NEW
Sociology of Complex
Organization
WEAPONS OF MASS
DESTRUCTION AND
TERRORISM
Russell D Howard, US Military
Academy
James J F Forest, US Military Academy
ORGANIZATION THEORY
TENSION AND CHANGE
David Jaffee, University of North Florida
2001 / 336 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-234166-9 / MHID: 0-07-234166-1
(Out of Print)
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-118962-0 / MHID: 0-07-118962-9 [IE]
Website: http://www.mhhe.com/jaffee
CONTENTS
1. Introduction: Definitions and Conceptions
2. Conceptual Framework for the Analysis of Organization Theory
3. The Rise of the Factory System
4. The Human Organization
5. Bureaucracy, Rationalization, and Organization Theory
6. Emerging Organizational Forms: Beyond Fordism
7. Emerging Organizational Paradigms: Post-Bureaucracy, Culture, and Knowledge
8. Technology and Organizational Transformation
9. The Environment and the Organization
10. Interorganizational Dynamics: Markets, Hierarchies and
Networks
11. The Future of Organization and Postmodern Analysis
Special Topics
NEW
TERRORISM AND COUNTERTERRORISM
ENVIRONMENT, READINGS AND
INTERPRETATIONS
3rd Edition
Russell D Howard and Reid L Sawyer of US Military Academy
Natasha E Bajema
2009 / 640 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337979-1 / MHID: 0-07-337979-4
794.mhtml
140
2008 / 624 pages
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-337970-8 / MHID: 0-07-337970-0
700.mhtml)
In TERRORISM AND WEAPONS OF MASS DESTRUCTION
AND DISRUPTION, Brigadier General (Retired) Russell
Howard and Dr. James Forest have collected original
and previously published seminal articles and essays by
scientists, academics, government officials, and members
of the nation’s security and intelligence communities. The
experience in nonproliferation and counterterrorism efforts.
Others have had significant responsibility for developing
government policies to address the threat of weapons of mass
destruction and terrorism. The contributors include a majority
of the significant names in the field including Bruce Hoffman,
Brian Jenkins, Jonathan Tucker, Rohan Gunaratna, David
Franz, Richard Betts, William Rosenau, and David Albright.
Unit One of the book introduces key terms and addresses
important strategic and policy debates. Authors explain
how the new forms of terrorism affect the post-9/11 security
environment and introduce the notion that weapons of mass
destruction could give terrorists short-term, asymmetric attack
advantages over conventional military forces. Unit Two
offers detailed accounts of the characteristics, availability,
and dangers of specific types of WMD, along with four case
studies that associate theory with practice—an important
feature of this volume. Unit Three deals with past, present,
and future national and international responses to—and
defenses against—the threat of WMD terrorism. and in the
final section of the volume, authors predict future WMD
threats and seek to draw on past events and mistakes in order
to identify lessons and strategies for the future.
Appendices include a primer on bioterrorism and fact sheets
on chemical, biological, nuclear and radiological terrorism.
CONTENTS
Part I. INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1.1 Definitions, Trends, and the Concept of “New
Terrorism”
Chapter 1.2 The Nature of the Post-9/11 WMD Terrorism Threat
Chapter 1.3 The WMD Terrorism Hype
Chapter 1.4 The Terrorist WMD of Choice
Sociology
Part II. UNDERSTANDING THE THREAT
Chapter 2.1 Different “Faces” of Nuclear Terrorism
Chapter 2.2 Radiological Dispersal Devices
Chapter 2.3 Sabotage of Nuclear Facilities and other Critical
Infrastructure
Chapter 2.4 Bioterrorism
Chapter 2.5 Chemical Terrorism
Chapter 2.6 Food Security and Agricultural and Terrorism
Chapter 2.7 Cyberterrorism
Chapter 2.8 Case Study #1: Ricin Plot in London 2003
Chapter 2.9 Case Study #2: Jemaah Islamiyah
Chapter 2.10 Case Study #3: Aum Shinrikyo
Chapter 2.11 Case Study #4: al Qaeda
Chapter 2.12 Case Study #5: A.Q. Khan Network
Chapter 2.13 Case Study #6: Iraq as an Example of State-Directed
WMD Terrorism
Part III. RESPONDING TO THE THREAT
Chapter 3.1 Deterrence and Preemption
Chapter 3.2 Intelligence and WMD
Chapter 3.3 WMD Detection Technology
Chapter 3.4 Nonproliferation Regimes
Chapter 3.5 Interdiction and Law Enforcement
Chapter 3.6 Case Study #1: The Public Health Response to the
2001 Anthrax Attacks
Chapter 3.7 Case Study #2: Hurricane Katrina and Emergency
Response
Chapter 3.8 Case Study #3: The Response to the 1995 Attack in
Tokyo, Japan
Part IV. LESSONS LEARNED AND FUTURE THREATS
Chapter 4.1 The Need for a Comprehensive, Multidimensional
Strategy
Chapter 4.2 Gaps in the International Framework for Combating
Terrorism
Chapter 4.3 Future Threats
Chapter 4.4 Conclusion
Appendix
141
Title Index
A
Abnormal Psychology With Mindmap II CD-ROM And
Powerweb, 5th Edition, Halgin ............................................... 60
Abnormal Psychology With Mindmap Plus CD-ROM And
Powerweb, 9th Edition, Alloy ................................................. 61
Abnormal Psychology, 4th Edition, Nolen-Hoeksema ............. 60
Adolescence, 12th Edition, Santrock ...................................... 29
Adolescence, 8th Edition, Steinberg ....................................... 29
Adolescence: Continuity, Change, And Diversity,
6th Edition, Cobb ................................................................... 30
Adult Development And Aging, 3rd Edition, Papalia .............. 33
Adult Development And Aging, 6th Edition, Hoyer ................ 32
Adult Development And Aging, With Powerweb,
5th Edition, Hoyer .................................................................. 33
Annual Editions: Social Problems 08/09, 36th Edition,
Finsterbusch ........................................................................... 97
Annual Editions: Social Psychology, 7th Edition,
Duffy ............................................................................. 49, 121
Annual Editions: Sociology 07/08, 36th Edition,
Finsterbusch ........................................................................... 93
Annual Editions: Sociology 08/09, 37th Edition,
Finsterbusch ........................................................................... 93
Annual Editions: The Family 08/09, 34th Edition,
Gilbert ......................................................................... 103, 107
Annual Editions: Urban Society, 13th Edition, Siegel ............ 112
Annual Editions: Violence And Terrorism 07/08,
10th Edition, Badey .............................................................. 100
Annual Editions: Violence And Terrorism 08/09,
11th Edition, Badey ................................................................ 97
Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth To Peak
Performance, 5th Edition, Williams ........................................ 77
Annual Editions: Adolescent Psychology, 6th Edition,
Stickle .................................................................................... 31
Annual Editions: Aging 07/08, 20th Edition, Cox ............ 34, 110
Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21st Edition, Cox ............. 33, 110
Annual Editions: Child Growth And Development 08/09,
15th Edition, Junn .................................................................. 27
B
Behavioral Statistics In Action, 3rd Edition, Vernoy ................ 71
Annual Editions: Computers In Society 08/09,
14th Edition, De Palma ........................................................ 138
Annual Editions: Criminal Justice 06/07, 30th Edition,
Victor .................................................................................. 130
Annual Editions: Developing World 08/09, 18th Edition,
Griffiths ............................................................................... 115
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, And Behavior 07/08,
22nd Edition, Wilson ...................................................... 65, 128
Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, And Behavior 08/09,
23rd Edition, Wilson .............................................................. 65
Annual Editions: Dying, Death, And Bereavement
08/09, 10th Edition, Dickinson ................................. 34, 46, 112
C
Cases In Child And Adolescent Development For
Teachers, Defrates-Densch............................................... 26, 31
Child And Adolescent Development For Educators,
3rd Edition, Meece ........................................................... 24, 28
Child Development With Multimedia Courseware CD
And Powerweb, 5th Edition, Dehart ....................................... 23
Child Development, Patterson ............................................... 22
Annual Editions: Education 08/09, 35th Edition,
Schultz ................................................................................. 132
Child Development: A Topical Approach And Making
The Grade CD ROM, Papalia ................................................. 25
Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 07/08,
22nd Edition, Cauley .............................................................. 43
Child Development: An Introduction, 11th Edition,
Santrock ................................................................................. 24
Annual Editions: Health 08/09, 29th Edition, Daniel............. 134
Child Psychology: A Contemporary Viewpoint With
Lifemap CD-ROM And Powerweb, 6th Edition,
Hetherington ......................................................................... 25
Annual Editions: Homeland Security, 2nd Edition,
Badey ..................................................................................... 98
Annual Editions: Human Development 08/09,
36th Edition, Freiberg ............................................................. 20
Child Psychopathology, Haugaard ................................... 36, 66
Child’s World (A), 11th Edition, Papalia ................................. 22
Annual Editions: Human Sexuality, 30th Edition,
Bunting .......................................................................... 84, 137
Children, 10th Edition, Santrock ............................................ 23
Annual Editions: Personal Growth And Behavior 07/08,
26th Edition, Duffy ............................................................. 9, 62
Classic Edition Sources: Human Development,
3rd Edition, Diessner .............................................................. 19
Annual Editions: Psychology 07/08, 37th Edition,
Duffy ..................................................................................... 10
Classic Edition Sources: Psychology, 4th Edition,
Pettijohn .................................................................... 11, 35, 71
Annual Editions: Race And Ethnic Relations, 16th Edition,
Kromkowski ......................................................................... 114
Classical Sociological Theory, 5th Edition, Ritzer ................. 117
Annual Editions: Social Problems 07/08, 35th Edition,
Finsterbusch ........................................................................... 99
142
Classic Edition Sources: Education, 4th Edition, Schultz ....... 134
Comparative Societies Series (The), Kerbo ............................ 139
Title Index
Contemporary Social Work Practice With Ethics Primer,
Case Study CD And Powerweb, Dewees .............................. 119
Contemporary Sociological Theory And Its Classical
Roots: The Basics, 2nd Edition, Ritzer .................................. 118
G
Guiding Your Children, 4th Edition, Reynolds ........................ 28
Counselling In Schools Theories, Processes And
Techniques, Tan ..................................................................... 42
Criminology And The Criminal Justice System,
With Powerweb, 6th Edition, Adler ...................................... 129
H
Criminology, 6th Edition, Adler ............................................ 129
Health Psychology, 6th Edition, Taylor ................................... 57
Health Psychology, 7th Edition, Taylor ................................... 56
D
Delinquency In Society, 7th Edition, Regoli .......................... 125
Developmental Psychopathology, 5th Edition, Wenar ............ 36
Dimensions Of Human Sexuality, 6th Edition, Byer................ 83
Diversity In Early Care And Education Honoring Differences,
5th Edition, Gonzalez-Mena ................................................... 44
History Of Psychology, 4th Edition, Hothersall....................... 80
History Of Psychology: Original Sources And
Contemporary Research (A), 2nd Edition, Benjamin ............... 80
Human Development Across The Lifespan, 6th Edition,
Dacey .................................................................................... 18
Human Development Across The Lifespan, 7th Edition,
Dacey .................................................................................... 15
Human Development, 8th Edition, Zanden ............................ 17
Drugs In American Society, 7th Edition, Goode .................... 125
Human Development, 10th Edition, Papalia ........................... 17
Drugs In Perspective, 6th Edition, Fields ......................... 64, 127
Human Factors In Engineering And Design, 7th Edition,
Sanders .................................................................................. 76
Drugs, Society, And Human Behavior, 12th Edition,
Ksir ................................................................................ 63, 126
Human Sexuality: Diversity In Contemporary America
With Sexsource CD-ROM And Powerweb, 5th Edition,
Strong ............................................................................ 83, 136
E
Educational Psychology, 3rd Edition, Santrock ....................... 40
Enhancing Cognitive Funtions Applications Across
Contexts, Tan ......................................................................... 40
Essentials Of Behavioral Research: Methods And Data
Analysis, 3rd Edition, Rosenthal ............................................. 68
Essentials Of Life-Span Development, Santrock ...................... 15
Essentials Of Psychology With Making The Grade
CD-ROM, Lahey ....................................................................... 8
Essentials Of Understanding Psychology, 7th Edition,
Feldman ................................................................................... 4
Exploring Social Psychology, 4th Edition, Myers ............. 48, 120
F
Fundamentals Of Cognitive Psychology, 7th Edition, Hunt ..... 73
I
Infants, Toddlers, And Caregivers With The Caregivers
Companion, 7th Edition, Gonzalez-Mena ............................... 44
Interpersonal Conflict, 7th Edition, Wilmot ............................. 57
Intimate Relationships, 4th Edition, Brehm ............................. 54
Intimate Relationships, 4th Edition, Miller .............................. 82
Intimate Relationships, Marriages And Families,
7th Edition, Degenova .......................................................... 101
Introduction To Clinical Psychology: Science And Practice,
Compas .................................................................................. 63
J
Japan And Singapore, Tsu ..................................................... 139
143
Title Index
L
Last Dance: Encountering Death And Dying (The),
8th Edition, Despelder .................................................... 45, 111
Lectures On The Psychology Of Women, 4th Edition,
Chrisler .................................................................................. 54
Life Span Development With Lifemap CD-ROM,
11th Edition, Santrock ............................................................ 16
P
Perception, 5th Edition, Blake................................................. 74
Personality Psychology: Domains Of Knowledge
About Human Nature, 3rd Edition, Larsen .............................. 51
Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts In Sociology (The),
4th Edition, Mcintyre ............................................................. 89
Practical Skeptic: Readings In Sociology (The),
4th Edition, Mcintyre ............................................................. 89
Principles Of Human Neuropsychology, Rains ....................... 73
M
Mapping The Social Landscape: Readings In Sociology,
5th Edition, Fergusan .............................................................. 88
Marriage And Families: Intimacy, Diversity And
Strengths, 6th Edition, Olson ........................................ 102, 106
Marriage And Family: The Quest For Intimacy,
6th Edition, Lauer ......................................................... 103, 106
Meaning Of Difference: American Constructions
Of Race, Sex And Gender, Social Class, And Sexual
Orientation (The), 5th Edition, Rosenblum .................... 109, 116
Mediated Learning Experience With Children, Seng ............... 25
Methods In Behavioral Research, 9th Edition, Cozby .............. 69
Modern Sociological Theory, 7th Edition, Ritzer .................. 117
Multicultural Psychology, 2nd Edition, Mio ............................ 51
N
Need To Know: Social Science Research Methods,
Mcintyre .............................................................................. 123
O
Organization Theory: Tension And Change, Jaffee ............... 140
Principles Of Research In Behavioral Science,
2nd Edition, Whitley .............................................................. 70
Pscyhological Testing And Assessment, 7th Edition,
Cohen .................................................................................... 72
Psychological Testing And Assessment: An Introduction
To Tests And Measurement, 6th Edition, Cohen...................... 72
Psychology With In-Psych Plus Student CD-ROM And
Powerweb Updated, 7th Edition, Santrock ............................... 8
Psychology, 5th Edition, Wortman ........................................... 9
Psychology: An Introduction, 9th Edition, Lahey....................... 8
Psychology: The Science Of Mind And Behavior,
4th Edition, Passer .................................................................... 4
Public And Private Families: A Reader, 5th Edition,
Cherlin ......................................................................... 101, 105
Public And Private Families: An Introduction,
5th Edition, Cherlin .............................................................. 105
Q
Qualitative Methods In Social Research, Esterberg ............... 123
R
Readings In Social Theory, 5th Edition, Farganis ................... 116
Ready, Set, Go! A Student Guide To SPSS 13.0 And
14.0 For Windows, 2nd Edition, Pavkov......................... 72, 124
Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural Anthology,
5th Edition, Disch ......................................................... 108, 119
Research Design And Methods: A Process Approach,
7th Edition, Bordens ............................................................... 68
Research Methods In Psychology, 7th Edition,
Shaughnessy ........................................................................... 70
Research Methods In Psychology, 8th Edition,
Shaughnessy ........................................................................... 68
Research Methods In Psychology: Ideas, Techniques
And Reports, Spatz ................................................................. 69
Revisiting Sociology (In Chinese), Ho ................................... 139
144
Title Index
S
Science Of Psychology: An Appreciative View (The),
King ......................................................................................... 7
Sex & Gender, 6th Edition, Lips ........................................ 37, 55
Sexuality Today, 9th Edition, Kelly ......................................... 82
Social Cognition, 2nd Edition, Fiske ....................................... 53
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Educational Psychology,
5th Edition, Abbeduto ............................................................ 42
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Family And Personal
Relationships, 7th Edition, Schroeder ........................... 104, 108
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Health And Society,
8th Edition, Daniel ............................................................... 135
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Human Sexuality,
10th Edition, Taverner .................................................... 83, 136
Social Cognition, From Brains To Culture, Fiske ..................... 52
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Lifespan Development,
Guest ..................................................................................... 21
Social Construction Of Difference And Inequality:
Race, Class, Gender And Sexuality (The), 4th Edition,
Ore .............................................................................. 108, 116
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Lifespan Development,
2nd Edition, Guest ................................................................. 19
Social Policy With Case Study CD And Ethics Primer,
Chapin ................................................................................. 119
Social Problems And The Quality Of Life, 11th Edition,
Lauer ...................................................................................... 96
Social Problems: A Critical Approach, 5th Edition,
Neubeck ................................................................................ 96
Social Psychology, 4th Edition, Franzoi .......................... 49, 121
Social Psychology, 9th Edition, Myers ............................ 48, 120
Social Stratification And Inequality, 7th Edition, Kerbo ......... 115
Sociological Theory, 7th Edition, Ritzer ................................ 118
Sociologically Examined Life: Pieces Of The Conversation
(The), 4th Edition, Schwalbe ................................................... 92
Sociology Matters, 3rd Edition, Schaefer ................................ 92
Sociology, 11th Edition, Schaefer ........................................... 91
Sociology: A Brief Introduction, 7th Edition, Schaefer ............ 90
Sociology: Diversity, Conflict, And Change, Neubeck ............ 93
Sociology: The Core, 8th Edition, Hughes............................... 88
Sport Psychology, 6th Edition, Cox ......................................... 76
Sports In Society: Issues And Controversies, 9th Edition,
Coakley ................................................................................ 132
Statistical Imagination (The), 2nd Edition, Ritchey ................ 124
T
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Abnormal Psychology,
4th Edition, Halgin ................................................................. 61
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Abnormal Psychology,
5th Edition, Halgin ................................................................. 61
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Childhood And Society,
7th Edition, Del Campo .................................................... 27, 45
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Crime And Criminology,
8th Edition, Hickey ............................................................... 130
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Drugs And Society,
8th Edition, Goldberg ..................................................... 64, 127
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Race And Ethnicity,
6th Edition, D’Angelo ........................................................... 113
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Science, Technology,
And Society, 8th Edition, Easton ........................................... 138
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Social Psychology,
2nd Edition, Nier ............................................................ 50, 122
Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Social Psychology,
3rd Edition, Nier ............................................................ 49, 121
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Adolescence,
Drysdale ................................................................................ 32
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Bioethical Issues,
12th Edition, Levine ............................................................. 109
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Controversial Issues
In Cognitive Science, Mason .................................................. 37
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Educational Issues,
14th Edition, Noll ................................................................. 133
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Legal Issues,
13th Edition, Katsh ............................................................... 131
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Psychological Issues,
15th Edition, Slife ................................................................... 10
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Social Issues,
15th Edition, Finsterbusch ................................................ 93, 98
Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Social Issues,
Expanded, 14th Edition, Finsterbusch ............................. 94, 100
Terrorism And Counterterrorism: Understanding The
New Security Environment, Readings And Interpretations,
2nd Edition, Howard .............................................................. 97
Terrorism And Counterterrorism Understanding The New
Security Environment, Readings And Interpretations,
3rd Edition, Howard ....................................................... 95, 140
Topical Approach To Lifespan Development (A),
4th Edition, Santrock .............................................................. 18
Theories Of Personality, 6th Edition, Feist .............................. 52
Theories Of Personality, 7th Edition, Feist .............................. 51
Thinking About Thinking What Educators Need
To Know, Ee ........................................................................... 41
To Empower, Be Empowered, Leng ........................................ 41
145
Title Index
U
Understanding Children: An Interview And Observation
Guide For Educators, 2nd Edition, Daniels ............................. 26
Understanding Psychology, 8th Edition, Feldman ..................... 6
W
Weapons Of Mass Destruction And Terrorism,
Howard .......................................................................... 95, 140
Women And Gender: A Feminist Psychology,
4th Edition, Crawford ............................................................. 55
146
Author Index
A
Compas: Introduction To Clinical Psychology:
Science And Practice .............................................................. 63
Cox: Annual Editions: Aging 07/08, 20th Edition ............ 34, 110
Abbeduto: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Educational
Psychology, 5th Edition .......................................................... 42
Adler: Criminology And The Criminal Justice System,
With Powerweb, 6th Edition ................................................. 129
Adler: Criminology, 6th Edition ............................................ 129
Alloy: Abnormal Psychology With Mindmap Plus
CD-ROM And Powerweb, 9th Edition .................................... 61
B
Badey: Annual Editions: Homeland Security, 2nd Edition ....... 98
Badey: Annual Editions: Violence And Terrorism 07/08,
10th Edition .......................................................................... 100
Badey: Annual Editions: Violence And Terrorism 08/09,
11th Edition ............................................................................ 97
Benjamin: A History Of Psychology: Original Sources
And Contemporary Research, 2nd Edition .............................. 80
Blake: Perception, 5th Edition................................................. 74
Bordens: Research Design And Methods: A Process
Approach, 7th Edition ............................................................. 68
Brehm: Intimate Relationships, 4th Edition ............................. 54
Bunting: Annual Editions: Human Sexuality,
30th Edition, ................................................................... 84, 137
Byer: Dimensions Of Human Sexuality, 6th Edition ................ 83
C
Cauley: Annual Editions: Educational Psychology 07/08,
22nd Edition ........................................................................... 43
Chapin: Social Policy With Case Study CD And Ethics
Primer .................................................................................. 119
Cherlin: Public And Private Families: A Reader,
5th Edition .................................................................... 101, 105
Cherlin: Public And Private Families: An Introduction,
5th Edition ............................................................................ 105
Chrisler: Lectures On The Psychology Of Women,
4th Edition .............................................................................. 54
Coakley: Sports In Society: Issues And Controversies,
9th Edition ............................................................................ 132
Cobb: Adolescence: Continuity, Change, And Diversity,
6th Edition .............................................................................. 30
Cohen: Pscyhological Testing And Assessment,
7th Edition .............................................................................. 72
Cohen: Psychological Testing And Assessment:
An Introduction To Tests And Measurement,
6th Edition .............................................................................. 72
Cox: Annual Editions: Aging 08/09, 21st Edition ............. 33, 110
Cox: Sport Psychology, 6th Edition ......................................... 76
Cozby: Methods In Behavioral Research, 9th Edition .............. 69
Crawford: Women And Gender: A Feminist Psychology,
4th Edition .............................................................................. 55
D
D’Angelo: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Race And
Ethnicity, 6th Edition ............................................................ 113
Dacey: Human Development Across The Lifespan,
6th Edition .............................................................................. 18
Dacey: Human Development Across The Lifespan,
7th Edition .............................................................................. 15
Daniel: Annual Editions: Health 08/09, 29th Edition ............. 134
Daniel: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Health And
Society, 8th Edition............................................................... 135
Daniels: Understanding Children: An Interview And
Observation Guide For Educators, 2nd Edition ....................... 26
De Palma: Annual Editions: Computers In Society 08/09,
14th Edition .......................................................................... 138
Defrates-Densch: Cases In Child And Adolescent
Development For Teachers ............................................... 26, 31
Degenova: Intimate Relationships, Marriages And
Families, 7th Edition ............................................................. 101
Dehart: Child Development With Multimedia
Courseware CD And Powerweb, 5th Edition .......................... 23
Del Campo: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In
Childhood And Society, 7th Edition .................................. 27, 45
Despelder: The Last Dance: Encountering Death And
Dying, 8th Edition .......................................................... 45, 111
Dewees: Contemporary Social Work Practice With
Ethics Primer, Case Study CD And Powerweb ...................... 119
Dickinson: Annual Editions: Dying, Death, And
Bereavement 08/09, 10th Edition.............................. 34, 46, 112
Diessner: Classic Edition Sources: Human
Development, 3rd Edition ...................................................... 19
Disch: Reconstructing Gender: A Multicultural
Anthology, 5th Edition .................................................. 108, 119
Drysdale: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On
Adolescence ........................................................................... 32
Duffy: Annual Editions: Personal Growth And
Behavior 07/08, 26th Edition .............................................. 9, 62
Duffy: Annual Editions: Psychology 07/08, 37th Edition ......... 10
Duffy: Annual Editions: Social Psychology,
7th Edition ...................................................................... 49, 121
147
Author Index
E
G
Easton: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Science,
Technology, And Society, 8th Edition ................................... 138
Gilbert: Annual Editions: The Family 08/09,
34th Edition .................................................................. 103, 107
Ee: Thinking About Thinking What Educators Need To
Know ..................................................................................... 41
Goldberg: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Drugs
And Society, 8th Edition ................................................. 64, 127
Esterberg: Qualitative Methods In Social Research ............... 123
Gonzalez-Mena: Diversity In Early Care And Education
Honoring Differences, 5th Edition .......................................... 44
F
Farganis: Readings In Social Theory, 5th Edition ................... 116
Feist: Theories Of Personality, 6th Edition .............................. 52
Feist: Theories Of Personality, 7th Edition .............................. 51
Feldman: Essentials Of Understanding Psychology,
7th Edition ................................................................................ 4
Gonzalez-Mena: Infants, Toddlers, And Caregivers
With The Caregivers Companion, 7th Edition ......................... 44
Goode: Drugs In American Society, 7th Edition .................... 125
Griffiths: Annual Editions: Developing World 08/09,
18th Edition .......................................................................... 115
Guest: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Lifespan
Development ......................................................................... 21
Guest: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Lifespan
Development, 2nd Edition ...................................................... 19
Feldman: Understanding Psychology, 8th Edition ..................... 6
Fergusan: Mapping The Social Landscape: Readings In
Sociology, 5th Edition............................................................. 88
H
Fields: Drugs In Perspective, 6th Edition ......................... 64, 127
Finsterbusch: Annual Editions: Social Problems 07/08,
35th Edition ............................................................................ 99
Halgin: Abnormal Psychology With Mindmap II CD-ROM
And Powerweb, 5th Edition .................................................... 60
Finsterbusch: Annual Editions: Social Problems 08/09,
36th Edition ............................................................................ 97
Halgin: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Abnormal
Finsterbusch: Annual Editions: Sociology 07/08,
36th Edition ............................................................................ 93
Halgin: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Abnormal
Finsterbusch: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On
Social Issues, 15th Edition ................................................ 93, 98
Haugaard: Child Psychopathology ................................... 36, 66
Finsterbusch: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On
Social Issues, Expanded, 14th Edition ............................. 94, 100
Hetherington: Child Psychology: A Contemporary
Viewpoint With Lifemap CD-ROM And Powerweb,
6th Edition .............................................................................. 25
FinsterbuschAnnual Editions: Sociology 08/09,
37th Edition ............................................................................ 93
Hickey: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Crime And
Criminology, 8th Edition ...................................................... 130
Fiske: Social Cognition, 2nd Edition ....................................... 53
Ho: Revisiting Sociology (In Chinese) ................................... 139
Fiske: Social Cognition, From Brains To Culture ..................... 52
Hothersall: History Of Psychology, 4th Edition....................... 80
Franzoi: Social Psychology, 4th Edition .......................... 49, 121
Howard: Terrorism And Counterterrorism
Understanding The New Security Environment,
Readings And Interpretations, 3rd Edition ....................... 95, 140
Freiberg: Annual Editions: Human Development 08/09,
36th Edition ............................................................................ 20
Howard: Terrorism And Counterterrorism:
Understanding The New Security Environment,
Readings And Interpretations, 2nd Edition .............................. 97
Howard: Weapons Of Mass Destruction And
Terrorism ........................................................................ 95, 140
Hoyer: Adult Development And Aging, 6th Edition ................ 32
Hoyer: Adult Development And Aging, With Powerweb,
5th Edition .............................................................................. 33
Hughes: Sociology: The Core, 8th Edition............................... 88
Hunt: Fundamentals Of Cognitive Psychology, 7th Edition ..... 73
148
Author Index
J
Jaffee: Organization Theory: Tension And Change ............... 140
Junn: Annual Editions: Child Growth And
Development 08/09, 15th Edition ........................................... 27
K
M
Mason: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Controversial
Issues In Cognitive Science ..................................................... 37
Mcintyre: Need To Know: Social Science Research
Methods ............................................................................... 123
Mcintyre: The Practical Skeptic: Core Concepts In
Sociology, 4th Edition............................................................. 89
Mcintyre: The Practical Skeptic: Readings In Sociology,
4th Edition .............................................................................. 89
Katsh: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Legal Issues,
13th Edition .......................................................................... 131
Meece: Child And Adolescent Development For
Educators, 3rd Edition ....................................................... 24, 28
Kelly: Sexuality Today, 9th Edition ......................................... 82
Miller: Intimate Relationships, 4th Edition .............................. 82
Kerbo: Social Stratification And Inequality, 7th Edition ......... 115
Mio: Multicultural Psychology, 2nd Edition ............................ 51
Kerbo: The Comparative Societies Series .............................. 139
Myers: Exploring Social Psychology, 4th Edition ............. 48, 120
King: The Science Of Psychology: An Appreciative View ......... 7
Myers: Social Psychology, 9th Edition ............................ 48, 120
Kromkowski: Annual Editions: Race And Ethnic
Relations, 16th Edition.......................................................... 114
Ksir: Drugs, Society, And Human Behavior,
12th Edition .................................................................... 63, 126
L
Lahey: Essentials Of Psychology With Making The Grade
CD-ROM .................................................................................. 8
Lahey: Psychology: An Introduction, 9th Edition ....................... 8
Larsen: Personality Psychology: Domains Of Knowledge
About Human Nature, 3rd Edition .......................................... 51
Lauer: Marriage And Family: The Quest For Intimacy,
6th Edition .................................................................... 103, 106
Lauer: Social Problems And The Quality Of Life,
11th Edition ............................................................................ 96
Leng: To Empower, Be Empowered ........................................ 41
Levine: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Bioethical
Issues, 12th Edition ............................................................... 109
Lips: Sex & Gender, 6th Edition ........................................ 37, 55
N
Neubeck: Social Problems: A Critical Approach,
5th Edition .............................................................................. 96
Neubeck: Sociology: Diversity, Conflict, And Change ............ 93
Nier: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Social
Psychology, 2nd Edition ................................................. 50, 122
Nier: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Social
Psychology, 3rd Edition .................................................. 49, 121
Nolen-Hoeksema: Abnormal Psychology, 4th Edition ............. 60
Noll: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Educational
Issues, 14th Edition ............................................................... 133
O
Olson: Marriage And Families: Intimacy, Diversity
And Strengths, 6th Edition ............................................ 102, 106
Ore: The Social Construction Of Difference And
Inequality: Race, Class, Gender And Sexuality,
4th Edition .................................................................... 108, 116
149
Author Index
P
Papalia: A Child’s World, 11th Edition ................................... 22
Papalia: Adult Development And Aging, 3rd Edition .............. 33
Papalia: Child Development: A Topical Approach And
Making The Grade CD ROM .................................................. 25
Papalia: Human Development, 10th Edition ........................... 17
Passer: Psychology: The Science Of Mind And Behavior,
4th Edition ................................................................................ 4
Patterson: Child Development ............................................... 22
Pavkov: Ready, Set, Go! A Student Guide To SPSS 13.0
And 14.0 For Windows, 2nd Edition .............................. 72, 124
Pettijohn: Classic Edition Sources: Psychology,
4th Edition .................................................................. 11, 35, 71
S
Sanders: Human Factors In Engineering And Design,
7th Edition .............................................................................. 76
Santrock: A Topical Approach To Lifespan Development,
4th Edition .............................................................................. 18
Santrock: Adolescence, 12th Edition ...................................... 29
Santrock: Child Development: An Introduction,
11th Edition ............................................................................ 24
Santrock: Children, 10th Edition ............................................ 23
Santrock: Educational Psychology, 3rd Edition ....................... 40
Santrock: Essentials Of Life-Span Development ...................... 15
Santrock: Life Span Development With Lifemap
CD-ROM, 11th Edition ........................................................... 16
Santrock: Psychology With In-Psych Plus Student
CD-ROM And Powerweb Updated, 7th Edition ........................ 8
R
Rains: Principles Of Human Neuropsychology ....................... 73
Regoli: Delinquency In Society, 7th Edition .......................... 125
Reynolds: Guiding Your Children, 4th Edition ........................ 28
Ritchey: The Statistical Imagination, 2nd Edition .................. 124
Ritzer: Classical Sociological Theory, 5th Edition ................. 117
Ritzer: Contemporary Sociological Theory And Its
Classical Roots: The Basics, 2nd Edition ............................... 118
Ritzer: Modern Sociological Theory, 7th Edition .................. 117
Ritzer: Sociological Theory, 7th Edition ................................ 118
Rosenblum: The Meaning Of Difference: American
Constructions Of Race, Sex And Gender, Social
Class, And Sexual Orientation, 5th Edition ................... 109, 116
Rosenthal: Essentials Of Behavioral Research:
Methods And Data Analysis, 3rd Edition ................................. 68
Schaefer: Sociology Matters, 3rd Edition ................................ 92
Schaefer: Sociology, 11th Edition ........................................... 91
Schaefer: Sociology: A Brief Introduction,
7th Edition .............................................................................. 90
Schroeder: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Family
And Personal Relationships, 7th Edition ........................ 104, 108
Schultz: Annual Editions: Education 08/09,
35th Edition .......................................................................... 132
Schultz: Classic Edition Sources: Education,
4th Edition ............................................................................ 134
Schwalbe: The Sociologically Examined Life:
Pieces Of The Conversation, 4th Edition ................................. 92
Seng: Mediated Learning Experience With Children ............... 25
Shaughnessy: Research Methods In Psychology,
7th Edition .............................................................................. 70
Shaughnessy: Research Methods In Psychology,
8th Edition .............................................................................. 68
Siegel: Annual Editions: Urban Society, 13th Edition ............ 112
Slife: Taking Sides: Clashing Views On Psychological
Issues,
15th Edition ............................................................................ 10
Spatz: Research Methods In Psychology: Ideas,
Techniques And Reports ......................................................... 69
Steinberg: Adolescence, 8th Edition ....................................... 29
Stickle: Annual Editions: Adolescent Psychology,
6th Edition .............................................................................. 31
Strong: Human Sexuality: Diversity In Contemporary
America With Sexsource CD-ROM And Powerweb,
5th Edition ...................................................................... 83, 136
150
Author Index
T
Tan: Counselling In Schools Theories, Processes And
Techniques ............................................................................. 42
Tan: Enhancing Cognitive Funtions Applications Across
Contexts ................................................................................. 40
Taverner: Taking Sides: Clashing Views In Human
Sexuality, 10th Edition .................................................... 83, 136
Taylor: Health Psychology, 6th Edition ................................... 57
Taylor: Health Psychology, 7th Edition ................................... 56
Tsu: Japan And Singapore ..................................................... 139
V
Vernoy: Behavioral Statistics In Action, 3rd Edition ................ 71
Victor: Annual Editions: Criminal Justice 06/07,
30th Edition .......................................................................... 130
W
Wenar: Developmental Psychopathology, 5th Edition ............ 36
Whitley: Principles Of Research In Behavioral Science,
2nd Edition ............................................................................. 70
Williams: Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth
To Peak Performance, 5th Edition ........................................... 77
Wilmot: Interpersonal Conflict, 7th Edition ............................. 57
Wilson: Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, And
Behavior 07/08, 22nd Edition ......................................... 65, 128
Wilson: Annual Editions: Drugs, Society, And Behavior
08/09, 23rd Edition ................................................................ 65
Wortman: Psychology, 5th Edition ........................................... 9
Z
Zanden: Human Development, 8th Edition ............................ 17
151
www.blackboard.com
/
www.webct.com
course management systems
Course Management Systems like Blackboard and WebCT offer you another way to integrate
digital McGraw-Hill content into your class. McGrawHill Online Learning Center content is formatted to
save you hours of computer inputting.
How instructors use it
Load McGraw-Hill content into your
platform and you will have a fully populated
course online. You can then customize the
content to match your syllabus. You will
also be able to assign specific exercises,
quizzes, or readings to your students.
Grades are posetd automatically to let you
know how students are doing as a whole,
or individually. Built-in communication
allows you to conduct live chats, oversee
bulletin board topics, and e-mail students
who might need more help than others.
How students use it
Students can visit your online course via
the Internet to check the coursework you
have assigned. The platform will record the
students’ progress through your course,
which will enable you to see where they
are studying most. Self-grading quizzes
also indicate exactly where students
need further review. The platform’s
communicaiton
system
encourages
student collaboration with features such
as live chat rooms, asynchronous bulletin
boards, or traditional e-mail.
Your Partner in
Test Generation
Imagine being able to create and access you test anywhere, at any time without installing the testing
software. Now, with the newest release of EZ Test Online, instructors can select questions from multiple
McGraw-Hill test banks, author their own and then either print the test for paper distribution or give it online.
Features and Functions
n Test Creation
n Online Test Management
n Online Scoring and Reporting
n EZ Test is designed to make it simple for you to select questions from McGraw-Hill test banks. You can
use a single McGraw-Hill test bank, or easily choose questions from multiple McGraw-Hill test banks.
n
n
EZ Test supports the use of following question types:
n True or False n Fill In the Blank
n Short Answer
n Yes or No n Numeric Response
n Survey
n Multiple Choice n Matching
n Essay
n Check All That Apply n Ranking
Uses variables to create algorithmic questions for any question type.
n You can create multiple versions of the same test.
n You can scramble questions to create different versions of your test. n Automated scoring for most of EZ test’s numerous questions types.
How do you get it?
To learn if it is available with your book, contact your local McGraw-Hill Education Representatives or email [email protected].
Introducing
PrepCenter
from McGraw-Hill
PrepCenter is McGraw-Hill’s unique library
of teaching assets that puts the power in your
hands. On one easy to navigate screen you can
search an entire package of learning material.
PrepCenter puts the power in your hands.
Choose to browse our complete library of digital assets and classroom activities by chapter,
concept, or media type.
Are you looking for something–anything–interesting to liven up the next lecture? Are you
looking for an exercise on segmentation? Are you looking for graphics or video?
Choose what YOU want to do:
Do you want to see if there are additional cases for chapter 2? Do you want to preview the
video clip on new product introduction? Do you want to download add the classroom activity
on ethics or save it in your PrepFolder?
Create your own organization…
With PrepCenter you can create your own set of PrepFolders organized however you want them-by date, topic, class–it’s up to you. Simply drag and drop the assets into your folder and save them
there for a future lecture. PrepCenter allows you to create and name as many Folders as you want,
when you want.
In your own time…Perhaps you would like to
spend a few days in the summer creating your
templates for your principles of marketing class
in the fall. Start the process, save your lectures,
and revisit before the start of school. Or if you
get assigned your course at the last minute, you
can create your presentations on the fly. With
one password and one website you can build
your classroom presentations when-ever, whereever and how-ever you want!
Ask for a demonstration today!
Now available for Business and Psychology selected titles!
M c G R AW- H I L L M A I L I N G L I S T
PleaseincludemeinyourmailinglistforinformationonMcGraw-Hillbooks.
McGraw-HillEducation(Asia)
60TuasBasinLink
Singapore638775
Tel(65)68631580
Fax(65)68623354
PleaseemailinformationonMcGraw-Hillbookstomyemailaddressat
Iamalreadyonyourmailinglistbutmyaddresshaschanged.
Pleaseupdatemyrecordtothefollowingnewaddress.
www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg
Name
PostalCode
Tel
Fax
(Mr/Ms/Dr/Prof)(Underlinefamilyname)
Position
Department
University
Address
Emailaddress
SUBJECT OF INTEREST
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Accounting
Advertising
BusinessManagement
Finance&Investment
Marketing
Economics
HumanResourceManagement
Insurance&RealEstate
Training
Computing
Aeronautical&AerospaceEngg
Architecture&UrbanPlanning
ChemicalEngineering
CivilEngineering
Construction
Electronics&Communications
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
ElectricalEngineering
GeneralEngineering
Industrial&PlantEngineering
MechanicalEngineering
MedicalScience
Dentistry
Nursing
Agriculture
Biology
Chemistry
Forestry
Geography&Geology
Physics&Astronomy
Zoology
Mathematics&Statistics
Art&Humanities
Education
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
English
Englishasa2ndLanguage/ELT
ForeignLanguage
Health&Nutrition
History
Law
LibraryScience
MassCommunication
Music
Philosophy&Religion
PhysicalEducation
PoliticalScience
Psychology
Sociology
Please return by fax at (65) 6862 3354 to
McGraw-Hill Education (Asia)
Singapore office.
E X A M I N AT I O N C O P Y R E Q U E S T F O R M
McGraw-HillEducation(Asia)
60TuasBasinLink
Singapore638775
Tel(65)68631580
Fax(65)68623354
www.mcgraw-hill.com.sg
 Professors/lecturerswhoareinterestedtoreviewtitleslistedinthiscatalogfor
textadoptionconsideration,pleasecompletethisrequestformandfaxtoyour
localMcGraw-Hilloffice(seeinsidebackcoverforfaxnumber)ortoMcGrawHillSingapore.
 Requestsforexaminationcopiesaresubjecttoapproval.McGraw-Hillreserve
therighttorefuseanyrequestswhichdonotrelatetoteaching.
 Pleasemakecopiesofthisformifnecessary.
REQUESTED BY
Name
Room#
Department
University
Address
Tel
Fax
Emailaddress
COMP REQUEST
PleaseindicateISBNNo,Author&Title
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
CourseName
Enrolment
Subject
CommencementDate
DecisionDate
IndividualDecision
GroupDecision
CurrentTextUsed

International Edition - McGraw

Transcription

Similar documents

from mhhe.com - McGraw Hill Higher Education

Topics in Cultural Sociology 335 Fall 2007

SIOPSA 2014 Annual Report

Psychology Department Newsletter

- McGraw

Moving Cultures - Hubert Hermans

dark horse comics - Diamond Book Distributors

Computer Science - McGraw

Management - McGraw

FIliPINO PSYCHOLOGY IN THE THIRD WORLD Department of

a cellist`s companion: a comprehensive catalogue of cello literature

DAFTAR E-BOOK PSIKOLOGI

50 great myths of popular psychology

Bulletin of Information

Reading Brochure

Intelligence in Infancy

Negotiating `Professional Agency`